What methods does CAESAR II provide for handling node incrementing, and why is this feature important in modeling?

CAESAR II allows for node incrementation through its Increment Node feature, where users specify the desired increment value for node numbers in a model. This feature is important as it ensures orderly node designation and prevents potential conflicts in node numbering across complex systems, aiding in clear network mapping. Configuration settings in CAESAR II dictate default node increments, which can be overridden through manual inputs, providing flexibility in model design .

How does CAESAR II facilitate modifications and management of piping models using its auxiliary and input tools?

CAESAR II offers a range of tools for modifying and managing piping models, accessible via the Classic Piping Input dialog box and auxiliary panels. Users can open piping files, input data element-by-element, and employ toolbars for operations like adding, deleting, or modifying model elements. The auxiliary panel provides tabs corresponding to selected items, aiding user navigation among complex data sets. These capabilities streamline the creation and adjustment of piping models, facilitating tailored configurations for specific project needs .

How can users utilize the 3D Modeler functionalities in CAESAR II for effective model visualization and updates?

Users can leverage the 3D Modeler functions in CAESAR II for efficient model visualization by locking graphics to prevent unintended updates, using Reset to restore default views, and accessing the List Input tool for model reviews in spreadsheet form. These functionalities help manage complex models by allowing users to rotate, modify, and visualize model configurations precisely. This approach enhances the oversight and accuracy of model alterations .

What is the function of the Load Cases with Hanger Design in CAESAR II, and what are the typical additional load cases required?

In CAESAR II, Load Cases with Hanger Design are essential for designing spring hangers, requiring specific load cases to determine hanger loads and vertical travel ranges. Common additional load cases include: W - weight for hanger load assessment, W+D1+T1+P1 for operating hanger travel, W+D1+T1+P1+H for operations with hangers, and W+P1+H for sustained loads. The load cases facilitate accurate hanger selection and system performance assessments .

Detail how CAESAR II employs cyclic reduction factors in its stress analysis calculations for piping systems.

In CAESAR II, cyclic reduction factors adjust allowable stress values considering the number of operating cycles a system will endure over its life. They are applied in stress analyses according to specific piping codes, like EN-13480, which uses a computed cyclic reduction factor for determining stress range reductions. These factors ensure the system's resilience to fatigue under repeat loading conditions by aligning allowable stress limits with anticipated operational demands .

Describe the significance of the function keys in navigating the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box.

Function keys are crucial in the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box for efficient navigation and data entry. Each key quickly places the cursor to specific input data blocks, facilitating fast data entry without relying on the mouse. For example, F2 moves to "From Node," F3 to "DX," and F4 to "Diameter," among others. This feature accelerates the data entry process for users dealing with complex piping models .

How does the eff field in CAESAR II influence the calculation of stress for various piping codes?

The eff field specifies the longitudinal weld joint efficiency, which influences the calculation of stress differently depending on the piping code. For example, in codes like B31.1 and B31.5, eff affects flexibility calculations by dividing SC and SH values before they're used. However, in codes such as B31.3 and B31.9, eff is ignored in flexibility but multiplied by SH when calculating the minimum wall thickness. Eff is not considered for some codes, like Swedish Methods and Stoomwezen, where it's irrelevant for flexibility and wall thickness .

Explain how the CAESAR II software utilizes the concept of design factors like Dfac and system design factors in stress calculations.

Design factors, such as Dfac, are critical in CAESAR II for adjusting stress limits and compliance with specific codes like IGE/TD/12. Dfac, for instance, represents the system design factor and must adhere to specific values (0.3, 0.5, 0.67) depending on the code specifications. These factors ensure the stress calculations meet the safety and performance criteria dictated by the respective piping code standards. In some codes, design factors replace fields entirely to maintain compliance, as demonstrated with UKOOA's replacement of other boxes with its system design factor f2 .

What role does the fatigue factor Kn play in CAESAR II, and how is it calculated?

The fatigue factor Kn in CAESAR II inversely affects calculations relative to other codes, where its value is greater than 1.0. Kn is calculated using the formula: Kn = 1 + 0.25(As/sn) (log10(n) - 3), where As is the stress range during the fatigue cycle, sn is the maximum stress during the fatigue cycle, and n is the number of stress cycles during design life. This factor adjusts the allowable stress limits in fatigue analyses .

What is the process to remove a password from a CAESAR II model, and what changes occur in the software's capabilities after removal?

To remove a password from a CAESAR II model, an authorized user must enter the correct existing password for this option. After the password is removed, all options in the Configuration Editor become modifiable from any folder where the user has read/write access rights. This allows users to change computation controls, stress options, and other configuration settings, enhancing the software's flexibility .

Open navigation menu

Upload

100% found this document useful (1 vote)

4K views1,239 pages

Caesar - II - Tutorial - Version 8

this is for the new caesar 2016

Uploaded by

ricardo

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (1 vote)

4K views1,239 pages

Caesar - II - Tutorial - Version 8

this is for the new caesar 2016

Uploaded by

ricardo

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

CAESAR II

User's Guide

Version 2016 (8.0)

September 2015
DICAS-PE-200104F

Copyright
Copyright 1985-2015 Intergraph CAS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; co ntains
confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and
international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.
Contains RealDWG by Autodesk, Inc. Copyright 1998-2015 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved.
Portions of the user interface copyright 2012-2015 Telerik AD.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictio ns as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws o f the
United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
305 Intergraph Way
Madison, AL 35758

Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.

Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or [Link], any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph
as guidance for using a software product.

Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with the
software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the
Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take
precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the
applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the
Documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal,
non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.

For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a EULA or do es not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensees internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensees internal, non-commercial use. The Other Documentation
may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time a nd
for any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.

Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the EULA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergra ph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed
a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applic able
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF
REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATIONS LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT
INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS
MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2)
YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.

Export Controls
Intergraph Corporations software products and any third-party Software Products obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its
subsidiaries, or distributors (including any Documentation, Other Documentation or technical data related to these products) are
subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. These Software
Products, and the direct product thereof, must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access)
under the following circumstances:
a.

To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, or Syria, or any national of these countries.

To any person or entity listed on any U.S. government denial list, including but not limited to, the U.S. Department of Commerce
Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, [Link] the U.S.
Department of Treasury Specially Designated Nationals List, [Link] and the U.S.
Department of State Debarred List, [Link]

To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the Software Product is related to the design,
development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive
nuclear uses.

To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.

Any questions regarding export or re-export of these Software Products should be addressed to Intergraph Corporations Export
Compliance Department, Huntsville, Alabama 35894, USA.

What's New in CAESAR II

The latest CAESAR II release delivers a number of significant new and extended capabilities in
response to current market requirements, as well as direct feedback from the growing CAESAR
II user community. The following changes have been made to CAESAR II:
CAESAR II 2016, Version 8.00

Technical Changes
The following technical changes for this release may affect the numeric results:

Updated the calculations for jobs using the B31.3 2012 code standard to use the Axial SIF
(ia) value for any non-bend elements, unless you do not specify an Axial SIF (ia) value.
When you leave the Axial SIF (ia) value blank, the software uses the Out-Plane SIF (io)
value. (DM-TX-13192)

Revised the calculations for wind loads using ASCE 2010 or IBC 2012. This update requires
the user to include a 0.6 scale factor for wind loads when setting up load cases. Also, refer
to each wind code standard, and ensure the wind speed is in accordance with the specified
wind design code. (CR-TX-10344)

Corrected the B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding/Contour Tees configuration setting to only

apply this constant for tee SIFs with B31.1 and B31.3 jobs and not jobs specified for
EN-13480. (TR-TX-13501)

Revised the materials properties for the ASME B31.3 2012 update. (DI-TX-13619)

Corrected calculations for sand/gravel soil models using the American Lifetime Alliance
(ALA) model type when the height/diameter ratio exceeds the valid range of the ALA
equations. The software now limits the height/diameter ratio to less than or equal to 20 for
yield loads at 40- to 45-degree angles. In addition, to prevent negative coefficient values,
CAESAR II now calculates the coefficient value e for 40- to 45-degree angles as a positive
value, which is different from the code standard. (TR-TX-14465)

Piping Code Updates

ASME B31.1, 2014 Edition (CR-TX-10720, DI-TX-13119)

ASME B31.3 2014 Edition (CR-TX-10721), including the following changes:

Addressed the code standard requirement to consider sustained (and occasional) stress in
all support conditions. New static load cases, called alternate sustained or alternate
occasional cases, depend upon the support configuration of a converged operating
condition. This condition addresses systems where non-linear supports are active in some
operating conditions and inactive in others. The alternate support condition is indicated
using the new Alternate SUS/OCC check box in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor
(DI-TX-13679, CR-TX-13680, CR-TX-13838)

Added two new load case templates (.tpl files) for the software to use when
recommending load cases, which include support for the alternate sustained (SUS) load
conditions. The template files include:
[Link] - the updated default load case template, which recommends alternate
sustained load casee for jobs including the B31.3 code

CAESAR II User's Guide

What's New in CAESAR II

LOAD_EXP.TPL - includes all expansion load cases between different operating
conditions. (This was the default template in CAESAR II 2014.)
LOAD_ALT.TPL - includes all expansion and alternate SUS load cases for all available
piping codes, except IGE/TD/12.

Resolved an issue where the software was not acquiring the HGR stress type for the
first load case when it applied recommend load cases for jobs with hanger design and
multiple temperatures. (DI-TX-13678)

Updated B31.3 materials, including changes to expansion coefficients (Ec), weld

reduction factors (W), and elastic modulus (EM) values. Updated allowable stress
values for material 341 (A789 S32750) and 342 (A790 S32750). Corrected low
temperature allowable values to match the code standard. (DI-TX-13120, DI-TX-13800,
DI-TX-13801)

Moved the B31.3 Implement Appendix P configuration setting from SIFs and
Stresses > Code Specific Settings to SIFs and Stresses > Legacy Settings as
Appendix P was removed and some of its requirements were merged into the body of
the B31.3 code standard.

Added appropriate warnings and notes to the error checking module and the output
reports to account for the code updates

ASME B31.8, 2014 Edition, including a small revision to the biaxial state of stress formula
(Sc), according to code Paragraph 833.4. You can find this formula in the CAESAR II Quick
Reference Guide. (CR-TX-11871, DI-TX-13125, DI-TX-13651)

ASME B31.9, 2014 Edition (CR-TX-10723, DI-TX-13441)

Wind/Seismic Code Updates

NBC Wind Code Standard, 2010 Edition. (CR-TX-11109, CR-TX-11110)

NBC Seismic Code Standard, 2010 Edition (CR-TX-13497)

ASCE 7 Wind Code Standard, 2010 Edition and IBC Wind Code Standard, 2012 Edition.
Includes a change in the wind load reduction factor. You must now type a 0.6 wind design
factor in wind load values and use the wind speed for the appropriate code standard.
(Completed portions in CAESAR II 2014 SP3) (CR-TX-10344, CR-TX-10611, CR-TX-12404)

ASCE 7 Seismic Code Standard, 2010 Edition and IBC Seismic Code Standard, 2012
Edition. (Completed in CAESAR II 2014 Service Pack 2.) (CR-TX-10611, CR-TX-12404)

Equipment Code Updates

API 560, 4th Edition (CR-TX-11947, CR-TX-13176)

API 610, 11th Edition (CR-TX-792, CR-TX-13178)

API 617, 8th Edition (CR-TX-4365, CR-TX-4366)

API 661, 7th Edition (CR-TX-11949, CR-TX-13177)

CAESAR II User's Guide

What's New in CAESAR II

Piping Input/Hanger Support

Added hanger data for the following hanger manufacturers: Hesterberg, Unison, Spring
Supports Mfg. Co., Senior, and Wookwang. Also, revised the listing of the manufacturer
formerly known as Flexider, to CASTIM 2000. (CR-TX-13017, CR-TX-3923, CR-TX-5071,
CR-TX-10192, CR-TX-10625, CR-TX-10879, CR-TX-13027)

Improved the Classic Piping Input to display a Pressure 3 value on the interface.
Previously, this third pressure value was only accessible by clicking >> to open the extended
dialog box. Now, you can type three sets of temperatures and pressures without having to
open a separate dialog box. (CR-TX-10336)

Finite Element Analysis (FEA)

Added easier access to third-party tools for better modeling and evaluation from the CAESAR
II main menu, to generate more accurate SIFs and K factors. Compare multiple file results,
assess the sensitivity of your model elements, and evaluate nozzle/branch connections with
NozzlePRO.

Load Case Editor

Redesigned the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor to improve the user's experience and
add more robust functionality when creating and revising load cases for analysis.
(CR-TX-11962)
Changes included the following features:

Removed the Load Case Options tab and merged all options to one List view.

Improved and enhanced the List view Easier scrolling and viewing options, as well as
filtering on columns, drag-and-drop capabilities, and easier manipulation of load cases.

Added a Group Edit view - select and change values on multiple load cases
simultaneously.

Improved the organization and groupings of input boxes on the Wind Loads and Wave
Loads tabs to improve the usability.

Updated user documentation.

Distance Measurements

Added functionality so you can minimize the Distance dialog box while remaining in
measuring mode in the piping input. Perform multiple measurements around a model
continually without the dialog box blocking any of the model. When you exit the dialog box,
the software exits the distance mode and returns you to the previous operator. Also, revised
the layout to improve the usability of the dialog box, improved snapping in the Line Drawing
(single line) mode, and increased the default font size setting for distance measurement
labels on the model for ease of reading. (CR-TX-10373)

Updated the Snap To Nearest Node functionality when measuring from piping elements to
other DWG piping objects, such as imported CADWorx models. (CR-TX-5973)

Added the ability to measure multiple distances in the Distance dialog box and see all of
your measurements simultaneously. Press CTRL + click while measuring distances along a
line of pipe, and the software retains and displays all the measurements you have made.
(CR-TX-10374)

CAESAR II User's Guide

What's New in CAESAR II

3D Model/Graphics

Added rotation functionality for S3D or SPR graphics (VUE) model when importing it into
CAESAR II using the S3D/SPR Model option in the piping input. You can specify the
degrees in which to rotate the loaded S3D or SPR model from the Load S3D/SPR Model
dialog box. (CR-TX-4531)

Enhanced the S3D/SPR Model functionality so you can now open zipped VUE files (ZVFs)
and Stitched VUE files (SVFs) from the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box. (CR-TX-8586)

Added the ability to filter by line numbers from the 3D Plot (Options > Graphical Output) in
the Static Output Processor.

Improved modeling with single- and multiple- element right-click menus containing
frequently-used commands.

Select a single element on the model, and right-click to access the Element context
menu. This menu includes typical actions performed on elements, restraints, and rigids
(such as valve/flanges).

Select multiple elements on the model, and right-click to access the Block Operations
context menu. This menu includes lets you perform group operations such as rotate,
delete, duplicate, renumber, and so forth, on a block of elements.

Notice that the software returns the cursor to the next logical action in the piping input
after you select one of the right-click menu options, which improves modeling/piping
input time. (CR-TX-12995, CR-TX-13033)

Added the ability to view only node names on the 3D model by selecting a new option on
Node Number drop-down box in the piping input. The Names Only option applies to
whatever other node numbering option you have selected. For example, if you select to see
Anchors on the model, and you select the Names Only, you see only those anchors with
node names and no anchor node numbers. If you select All, you will see all node names
specified for anchors, hangers, and restraints, but none of the node numbers for those
elements. The software defaults to showing both node names and node numbers.
(CR-TX-1257)

User Interface

Updated the look of the CAESAR II splash screen that appears when launching the software
to the latest Intergraph standards. Also updated the CAESAR II icon to the new Intergraph
style. (DI-TX-13041, DI-TX-13658)

Documentation/Help

Updated the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide with dates and information for all piping and
wind/seismic code editions supported in CAESAR II 2016.

Updated portions of the user documentation to the latest Intergraph PPM standards for
formats, which included adding more white space and indentation for field property formats.
(DI-TX-10490, DI-TX-R3733)

Added a comprehensive glossary of terms to the CAESAR II User's Guide to improve

understanding of the documentation. (DI-TX-10660)

The supporting software documentation is organized in the following manuals:
CAESAR II User's Guide - Describes the basic operation and flow of the commands found in
CAESAR II. This manual gives an overview of the software capabilities and introduces model
creation, analysis, and output review. It explains the function of, input for, and output from each
module of the software. This manual also explains much of the theory behind CAESAR II
calculations. It is intended as a general road map for the software.
CAESAR II Application Guide - Provides examples of how to use CAESAR II. These examples
illustrate methods of modeling individual piping components as well as complete piping systems.
This document contains tutorials on system modeling and analysis. The CAESAR II Application
Guide is a reference providing quick "how to" information on specific subjects.
CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide - Provides version and technical change details in addition
to installation and commonly used information. This document also lists the currently
implemented piping codes (with publication and revision dates) and related stress and allowable
equations.
You can view and print any of the manuals by clicking Help > Online Documentation on the
CAESAR II Main menu.

Software Support/User Assistance

Intergraph CAS understands that CAESAR II is a complex analysis tool. While the
documentation is intended to explain piping analysis, system modeling, and results
interpretation, you may have additional questions.
We understand the engineers need to produce efficient, economical, and expeditious designs.
To that end, we have a staff of helpful professionals ready to address any CAESAR II and piping
issues raised by you. CAESAR II support is available by telephone, e-mail, fax, and the Internet.
We provide this service at no additional charge to you for questions focused on the current
version of the software.
Formal training in CAESAR II and pipe stress analysis is also available from Intergraph CAS.
We schedule regular training classes in Houston and provide in-house and open attendance
training around the world. These courses focus on the expertise available for modeling, analysis,
and design.
To aid internet users when contacting technical support, Intergraph CAS has added an option
that generates an e-mail template with the basic computer and CAESAR II version details. This

CAESAR II User's Guide

Introduction
information is typically what is needed to resolve technical support issues. To use this option,
click Help > Email CAESAR II Support.
This command starts the default e-mail client and populates an e-mail with the default
information.
The e-mail is addressed to Technical Support and contains all the information relevant to your
CAESAR II installation. Type the problem description at the Type Message Here prompt and
attach any necessary files.
You can contact Intergraph CAS Technical Support or Sales:

ICAS Dealer Support ([Link] ) or ICAS General

Support ([Link]

Technical Support E-mail: ppmcrm@[Link]

Phone: 1-800-766-7701 (CAESAR II Direct), 280-890-4566 (General)

Fax: 281-890-3301

SECTION 2

Getting Started
This section explains the CAESAR II basic operation, and steps you through a quick static
piping analysis.
The main steps required to perform a static analysis are:
1. Starting CAESAR II (on page 29)
2. Create a new job (on page 30)
3. Piping Input generation (on page 31)
4. Model Error Checking (on page 34)
5. Building Load Cases (on page 35)
6. Run a static analysis (on page 36)
7. Static Output Review (on page 36)
A complete tutorial is provided in the CAESAR II Applications Guide.

In This Section
Starting CAESAR II..................................................................... 29
Understanding Jobs .................................................................... 30
Basic Operation .......................................................................... 30
Main Menu.................................................................................. 37

Starting CAESAR II
1. Click Start > All Programs > Intergraph CAS > CAESAR II >
CAESAR II. You may
also have a CAESAR II icon on your desktop that you can use to start CAESAR II.
The main CAESAR II window displays.

This window contains the main menu and toolbar from which you select jobs and analysis
types, start analysis, and review output.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Getting Started
2. Click File > Set Default Data Directory.
The Default Data Directory Specification dialog box displays.
3. Define the folder to save your jobs and other CAESAR II data files. The default folder is
C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\version\Examples.
4. From the Language menu, select your language for the interface.
5. In Windows Explorer, go to C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\version\System.
6. Using a text editor, open [Link] and specify your company name on the first line.
This will place your company name is the header of CAESAR II calculations.

After the analysis data files have been created by the error checker, you can run a static
analysis. The first step of a static analysis is to define the load cases. For new jobs (there are no
previous solution files available), the static analysis module recommends load cases to you
based on the load types encountered in the input file. These recommended load cases are
usually sufficient to satisfy the piping code requirements for the Sustained and Expansion load
cases. If the recommended load cases are not satisfactory, you should modify them.
1. From the Piping Input window, select Edit > Edit Static Load Cases

The Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box displays.

2. You can build loads two ways:

Combine the load components defined in the input (weight, displacements,

temperatures, and so forth) into load cases (basic cases), or

Combine pre-existing load cases into new load cases (combination cases).

3. Build the basic cases by selecting one or more load components in the Loads Defined in
Input list and then dragging and dropping them to the Load Cases list to the right. You can
also type on any of the individual load case lines. Stress types (indicating which code
equations should be used to calculate and check the stresses) are selected from the Stress
Type list.
Combination cases, if needed, must follow the basic cases. You can build combination
cases by selecting one or more load components and dragging and dropping the basic load
cases from either the Load Defined in Input primitives or from the other previous load
cases (by dragging the load case number) to combine cases (or create new load cases)
later in the list.
You can have a maximum of 999 static load cases. For more information, see Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box (on page 544).

CAESAR II User's Guide

Getting Started

Run a static analysis

After the load cases are defined, you can run the analysis.
1. Select File > Batch Run

to run the actual finite element solution.

The analysis creates the element stiffness matrices and load vectors and solves for
displacements, forces and moments, reactions, and stresses. The analysis also performs
the design and selection of spring hangers and iterative stiffness matrix modifications for
nonlinear restraints. Finally, the Static Output Processor window displays.

Review static output

When the analysis is finished, you can review the results using the Static Output Processor
window.
1. On the main CAESAR II window, select Output > Static.
The Static Output Processor window displays.
2. In the Load Case Analyzed list, select one or more load cases for which to review results.
3. In the Standard Reports list, select one or more reports to review.
4. Click --> Add.
5. Select where you want to view the results: the screen, Microsoft Word or Excel, the printer,
or an ASCII file.
6. Click Finish to view the reports.
7. Click Options > Graphical Output to review the analytic results in graphics mode, which
can produce displaced shapes, stress distributions, and restraint actions.
The actual study of the results depends on the purpose of each load case and the reason for the
analysis. Usually the review checks that the system stresses are below their allowables,
restraint loads are acceptable, and displacements are not excessive. Additional post processing
(such as equipment, nozzle, and structural steel checks) might be required depending on the
model and type of analysis.
After you finish reviewing the output, return to the main window by exiting the output review
module.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Getting Started

Main Menu
After starting CAESAR II, the software opens the main menu and toolbar. Keep this window as
small as possible to conserve screen space.

Topics
File Menu.................................................................................... 37
Input Menu ................................................................................. 40
Analysis Menu ............................................................................ 40
Output Menu............................................................................... 41
Language Menu.......................................................................... 42
Tools Menu ................................................................................. 42
Diagnostics Menu ....................................................................... 43
ESL Menu................................................................................... 45
View Menu .................................................................................. 45
FEA Tools Menu ......................................................................... 46
Help Menu .................................................................................. 46

File Menu
The File menu is used to create and save piping and structural jobs.

Topics
Set Default Data Directory .......................................................... 38
New ............................................................................................ 38
Open .......................................................................................... 39

CAESAR II User's Guide

Getting Started

Set Default Data Directory

Sets the default data (project) directory without selecting a specific job file. Some CAESAR II
options do not require that a job be selected but must know in which directory to work. All
CAESAR II generated data files are written to this directory. Click File > Set Default Data
Directory on the main menu to activate the Default Data Directory Specification dialog box.
Click Examples to set the default data directory to the examples directory delivered with
CAESAR II.

The data directory specification is very important because any configuration, units, or
other data files found in that directory are considered to be local to that job.

New
Starts a new piping or structural job. Click File > New
Job Name Specification dialog box.

on the main menu to activate the New

Output Menu
The Output menu lists all available output of piping or structural calculations that can be
selected for review.
Static
Displays the results of a static analysis. For more information, see Static Output Processor
Window (see "Static Output Processor" on page 575).
Harmonic
Displays Harmonic Loading results.
Spectrum Modal
Displays Natural Frequency/Mode Shape calculations or Uniform/Force Spectrum Loading
results.
Time History
Displays Time History Load Simulation results.
Animation
Displays Animated Graphic simulations of any of the above results. Click to view any of the
following simulations:
Mode Shapes
Harmonic

CAESAR II User's Guide

Getting Started
Time History
Static

Language Menu
CAESAR II supports multiple languages. To select the language, click Language on the
CAESAR II main menu, and then select the language you prefer. Many of the CAESAR II
modules are available in English and Japanese, such as the Main Menu, the Classic Piping
Input dialog box, the Static Load Case Editor, and the Static Output Processor. Additionally,
significant portions of the documentation, including the various guides and F1 Help information,
are translated.
English (United States)
Identifies that the current language is English, which is the default language.
Japanese
Changes portions of the CAESAR II user interface text and the user documentation to
Japanese.
Future releases of CAESAR II will include support for new languages in the product and
documentation.

Tools Menu
The Tools menu activates various CAESAR II supporting utilities.
Configure/Setup
The [Link] configuration file contains directives that dictate how CAESAR II will operate
on a particular computer and how it will perform a particular analysis. Each time that you open
the software, it searches for this configuration file in the current data folder. If the configuration
file is not found in the current data folder, the software then searches the CAESAR II system
folder. If the configuration file is not found in either location, a fatal error is generated and
CAESAR II exits. For more information, see Configuration and Environment (on page 48).
Calculator
Launches an on-screen calculator.
Create/Review Units
Creates custom sets of units or lets you review the units configuration. For more information,
see Create/Review Units (on page 1033).
Change Model Units
Converts an existing input file to a new set of units. For more information, see Change
Model Units (on page 1036).
Material Database
Edits or adds to the CAESAR II Material Database. For more information, see Material
Database (on page 1018).

CAESAR II User's Guide

Getting Started
Accounting
Activates or customizes job accounting or generates accounting reports. For more
information, see Accounting (on page 1026).
Multi-Job Analysis
Enables the user to run a stream of jobs without operator intervention. For more information,
see Batch Stream Processing (on page 1037).
External Interfaces
Displays the interfaces to and from third party software (both CAD and analytical). For more
information, see External Interfaces (on page 1039).
ISOGEN Isometrics
Starts CAESAR II Isometrics. For more information, see Generate Stress Isometrics (see
"Generate Stress Isometrics Overview" on page 759).
I-Configure
Starts I-Configure.
Explore System Folder
Opens the CAESAR II System folder.
Reset Layouts to Default
Restores all CAESAR II window layouts to the default positions. In addition, all toolbar
customizations are reset to the default state and your video driver is to OpenGL.

Diagnostics Menu
The Diagnostics menu activates utilities to help troubleshoot problem installations.
CRC Check
Verifies that software files are not corrupted. For more information, see CRC Check (on
page 44).
Build Version
Determines the build version of CAESAR II files. For more information, see Build Version
(on page 44).
Error Review
Allows you to look up errors for more information. For more information, see Error Review
(on page 44).
QA Test
Runs the QATEST software, which compares output file information between a new version
of the software and the previously verified version. For more information, see QA Test (on
page 45).

CAESAR II User's Guide

Getting Started

CRC Check
Assesses whether the version of CAESAR II you are running matches the originally installed
files. Run the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) to identify if any files are corrupted. When you
click CRC Check in Utilities > Diagnostics, the software opens the CRCCHK File Verification
dialog box and begins scanning all CAESAR II files. When the scan completes, the CRC Status
column indicates if there were any files that did not match the originally installed software files,
and the File Name column shows the file path. In addition, the scan results shows how many
files were read and how many errors the software detected.
The following issues can contribute to a CRC Check failure.

The distribution DVD is corrupted. Contact CAESAR II support for a new DVD.

The wrong files were installed (for example a service pack was installed for the wrong
version of the software).

A virus has infected the file. Use virus-detecting software to correct this issue.

You received a new file from Intergraph CAS. The CRC value is expected to be different in
this circumstance, and it is not a problem.

Build Version
Scans all EXE, DLL, and COM files for the ID Version information. Intergraph CAS defines ID
Version information for all of the previously mentioned files to indicate version and build details
for the file. The software displays additional information about the file, such as the name, file
size, build number, operating system, and date and time of the file. For more specifics on the ID
Version file information, click Details at the bottom of the dialog box.

1. To display the [Link] file, click Tools > Configure/Setup.
Alternatively, you can click Configure

on the toolbar.

The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays. The attributes for Computational
Control display.

In the left-hand pane, the configuration spreadsheets categories display.

In the right-hand pane, the configuration spreadsheet values for that category display.

The Data Directory displays the path where the current configuration file is stored.

2. Click the title in the Categories pane to navigate to the appropriate configuration
spreadsheets.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

3. Click the X in the right-hand corner to exit.

Create a new [Link] file

1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup to display the [Link] file.
Alternatively, you can click Configure

on the toolbar.

The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays. The attributes for Computational
Control display.
2. Click Save and Exit

located in the top-left corner of the Configuration Editor window.

Change the current [Link] file for this computer

1. To display the [Link] file, click Tools > Configure/Setup.
Alternatively, you can click Configure

on the toolbar.

The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays. The attributes for Computational
Control display.
2.

Click the description to change a value for a configuration attribute,

A drop-down menu which contains the possible values for the attribute displays.

3. Select a new value.

The new value displays in bold text.
4. Continue changing values until you are finished.
5. Click Save and Exit

located in the top-left corner of the Configuration Editor window.

Reset the current [Link] file to the default settings

Click Alt D to reset an individual field value in the current configuration file to its default
value.

Click Reset All -> Set Current Defaults to reset all the values for the current configuration
file to the default values.

1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup to display the [Link] file.

Alternatively, you can click Configure

on the toolbar.

The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays. The attributes for Computational
Control display.
2. Click the Reset All drop-down menu.
The various default file options display.
3. Select a default file.
The values in left-hand pane change to the default values. Values change to normal text
from bold text.
4. Save the changes.
The following section explains each of the CAESAR II configuration file Category options.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Computational Control
The Computational Control category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:

Convergence Tolerances (on page 50)

Input Spreadsheet Defaults (on page 53)

Miscellaneous (on page 55)

Figure 1: Computation Control Configuration Settings

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Convergence Tolerances
Topics
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance ........................................... 51
Friction Angle Variation ............................................................... 51
Friction Normal Force Variation ................................................... 51
Friction Slide Multiplier ................................................................ 52
Friction Stiffness .......................................................................... 52
Rod Increment (Degrees) ............................................................ 52
Rod Tolerance (Degrees) ............................................................ 52

Decomposition Singularity Tolerance

Defines the value used by the software to check the ratio of off-diagonal to on-diagonal
coefficients in the row. The default value is 1.0 e+10. If this ratio is greater than the
decomposition singularity tolerance, then a numerical error may occur. This problem does not
have to be associated with a system singularity. This condition can exist when very small, and/or
long pipes are connected to very short, and/or large pipes. These solutions have several general
characteristics:

When computer precision errors of this type occur, they are very local in nature. They
typically affect only a single element or very small part of the model and are readily
noticeable upon inspection.

The 1E10 limit can be increased to 1E11 or 1E12 and still provide a reasonable check on
solution accuracy. Any solution computed after increasing the limit should always be
checked closely for reasonableness. At 1E11 or 1E12, the number of significant figures in
the local solution is reduced to two or three.

Although the 1E10 limit can be increased to 1E20 or 1E30 to get the job to run, it is
important to remember that the possibility for a locally errant solution exists when stiffness
ratios are allowed to get this high. Solutions should be carefully checked.

Friction Angle Variation

Specifies the friction sliding angle variation. The default value is 15-degrees.
This parameter had more significance in software versions prior to 2.1. It is currently only
used in the first iteration when a restraint goes from the non-sliding to sliding state. All
subsequent iterations compensate for the angle variation automatically.

Friction Normal Force Variation

Defines the amount of variation in the normal force that is permitted before an adjustment is
made in the sliding friction force. The default value is 0.15, or 15 percent. Normally, you should
not adjust this value.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Friction Slide Multiplier

Specifies the internal friction sliding force multiplier.
You should never adjust this value unless you are instructed to do so by Intergraph
CAS Support.

Friction Stiffness
Specifies the friction restraint stiffness.
The default value for the friction restraint stiffness is 1.0E+06 lb/in.
If the structural load normal to a friction restraint is less than the restraint load multiplied by the
coefficient of friction, the pipe will not move at this support this restraint node is "non-sliding."
To model the non-sliding state, stiffnesses are inserted in the two directions perpendicular to the
restraint's line of action to oppose any sliding motion.
Nonlinear convergence problems may be alleviated by reducing the friction restraint stiffness.
Lower friction stiffness will more readily distribute friction loads throughout the system and allow
nonlinear convergence. However, this lower stiffness affects the accuracy of the results. Lower
stiffness values permit more "non-sliding" movement, but given the indeterminate nature of the
friction problem in general, this error may not be crucial.

Rod Increment (Degrees)

Specifies the maximum amount of angular change that any one support can experience
between iterations. For difficult-to-converge problems, values of 0.1 have proven effective.
When small values are used, you should be prepared for a large number of iterations. The total
number of iterations can be estimated from the following:
Estimate number of Iterations = 1.5(x)/(r)/(Rod Increment)
Where:
x = maximum horizontal displacement at any one rod
r = rod length at that support

Rod Tolerance (Degrees)

Specifies the angular plus-or-minus permitted convergence error. Unless the change from
iteration n to iteration n+1 is less than this value, the rod will not converge. The default value is
1.0 degree.
For systems subject to large horizontal displacements, values of 5.0 degrees for
convergence tolerances have been used successfully.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Input Spreadsheet Defaults

Topics
Alpha Tolerance .......................................................................... 53
Coefficient of Friction (Mu)........................................................... 53
Default Rotational Restraint Stiffness........................................... 53
Default Translational Restraint Stiffness ...................................... 53
Hanger Default Restraint Stiffness ............................................... 53
Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%)................................................. 54
New Job Ambient Temperature ................................................... 54
New Job Bourdon Pressure ......................................................... 54

Alpha Tolerance
Indicates the breakpoint at which CAESAR II decides that the entry in the Temp fields on the
input spreadsheet is a thermal expansion coefficient or a temperature. The default value is 0.05.
Any entry in the Temp fields whose absolute magnitude is less than 0.05 is taken to be a
thermal expansion coefficient in terms of inches per inch (dimensionless).

Coefficient of Friction (Mu)

Specifies the value that the software applies by default as the coefficient of friction to all
translational restraints. If you type 0, which is the default value, the software does not apply any
friction.

Default Rotational Restraint Stiffness

Defines the value used for non-specified rotational restraint stiffnesses. By default this value is
assumed to be (1.0E12 in-lb/deg).

Default Translational Restraint Stiffness

Defines the value used for non-specified translational restraint stiffnesses. By default this value
is assumed to be (1.0E12 lb./in).

Hanger Default Restraint Stiffness

Defines the value used for computing the hanger restrained weight loads. Where hangers are
adjacent to other supports or are themselves very close, such as where there are two hangers
on either side of a trunnion support, the CAESAR II hanger design algorithm may generate
poorly distributed hot hanger loads in the vicinity of the close hangers. Using a more flexible
support for computing the hanger restrained weight loads often allows the design algorithm to
more effectively distribute the systems weight. A typical entry is 50,000 lbs/in.; the default value
is (1.0E12 lb/in).

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%)

Specifies the default percentage of wall thickness allowed for mill and other mechanical
tolerances.
For most piping codes, this value is only used during the minimum wall thickness
computation. Mill tolerance is usually not considered in the flexibility analysis.
The default value is 12.5, corresponding to a 12.5% tolerance. To eliminate mill tolerance
consideration, set Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%) to 0.0.

New Job Ambient Temperature

Represents the installed, or zero expansion, strain state. The default ambient temperature for all
elements in the system is 70F/21C.
This value is only used to initialize the ambient temperature input field for new jobs.
Changing this configuration value will not affect existing jobs. To change the ambient
temperature for an existing job, use the Ambient Temperature (on page 302) field in the Piping
Input Special Execution Parameters dialog box.

New Job Bourdon Pressure

Specifies the type of Bourdon pressure effect used. The Bourdon effect causes straight pipe to
elongate and bends to open up translationally along a line connecting the curvature end points.
If the Bourdon effect is disabled, there will be no global displacements due to pressure.

None - Disables the Bourdon effect. There will be no global displacements due to pressure.

Trans Only - Includes only translation effects (Bourdon Pressure Option #1).

Trans + Rot - Includes translational and rotational effects on bends. This option may apply
for bends that are formed or rolled from straight pipe, where the bend-cross section will be
slightly oval due to the bending process. (Bourdon Pressure Option #2)

For straight pipe, Bourdon Pressure Option #1 is the same as Bourdon Pressure Option #2.
For elbows, Bourdon Pressure Option #1 should apply for forged and welded fittings where
the bend cross-section can be considered essentially circular.

The Bourdon effect (Trans only) is always considered when FRP pipe is used, regardless of
the actual setting of the Bourdon flag.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Miscellaneous
Topics
Bend Axial Shape........................................................................ 55
Ignore Spring Hanger Stiffness .................................................... 55
Include Insulation in Hydrotest ..................................................... 55
Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE Travel Cases ................. 55
Incore Numerical Check .............................................................. 55
Missing Mass ZPA....................................................................... 56
Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends ............................................... 56
WRC-107 Interpolation Method ................................................... 56
WRC-107(537) Version ............................................................... 56

Bend Axial Shape

Controls whether the displacement mode is ignored. For bends 45-degrees or smaller, a major
contributor to deformation can be the axial displacement of the short-arched pipe. With the axial
shape function disabled, this displacement mode is ignored and the bend will be stiffer.

Ignore Spring Hanger Stiffness

Indicates whether the software uses the stiffness of spring hangers in the analysis. The default
setting is False, meaning that the software does not ignore the stiffness of spring hangers.
Setting this option to True is consistent with hand computation methods of spring hanger
design, which ignores the effects of the springs.
Intergraph CAS recommends that you never change this value.

Include Insulation in Hydrotest

Controls whether the weight of any insulation and cladding will be considered in the hydrotest
case. To ignore the insulation and cladding in the hydrotest case, select False (the default
setting). To include the weight of insulation and cladding in the hydrotest case, select True.

Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE Travel Cases

Controls how the software handles spring hangers. If you select True, the software places the
designed spring stiffness into the Hanger Operating Travel Case and iterates until the system
balances. This iteration scheme therefore considers the effect of the spring hanger stiffness on
the thermal growth of the system (vertical travel of the spring). If this option is used, it is very
important that the hanger load in the cold case (in the physical system) be adjusted to match the
reported hanger cold load.
If you select False, spring hangers are designed the traditional way.

Incore Numerical Check

Enables the incore solution module to test the solution stability for the current model and
loadings. This option, if selected, adds the solution of an extra load case to the analysis.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Missing Mass ZPA

Indicates which spectrum value CAESAR II uses. If you select Extracted (the default setting),
the software will use the spectrum value at the last "extracted" mode. Changing this value to
Spectrum instructs CAESAR II to use the last spectrum value as the ZPA for the missing mass
computations.

Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends

Controls whether CAESAR II includes pressure stiffening effects in those codes that do not
explicitly require its use. In these cases, pressure stiffening effects will apply to all bends,
elbows, and both miter types. In all cases, the pressure used is the maximum of all pressures
defined for the element.
Pressure stiffening effects are defined in Appendix D of B31.1 and B31.3.
When set to Default, the software considers the pressure stiffening of bends according to the
active piping code.

WRC-107 Interpolation Method

Specifies the interpolation method used by the software. The curves in WRC Bulletin 107 cover
typical applications of nozzles in vessels or piping; however, should any of the interpolation
parameters, such as U, Beta, and so forth, fall outside the limits of the available curves, then
CAESAR II uses the last curve value in the appropriate WRC table.

WRC-107(537) Version
Sets the version of the WRC-107(537) bulletin used in the computations. Valid options are:

Aug'65 - August 1965

Mar'79 - March 1979

March '79 1B1/2B1 - March 1979 with the 1B1-1 and 2B-1 off axis curves. This is the
default setting.

In 2010, WRC Bulletin 537 was released. According to the foreword of WRC Bulletin
537, "WRC 537 provides exactly the same content in a more useful and clear format. It is not an
update or a revision of 107." CAESAR II uses the graphs from Bulletin 107. Bulletin 537 simply
provides equations in place of the curves found in Bulletin 107.

Database Definitions
The Database Definitions category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:

Databases (on page 57)

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

ODBC Settings (on page 62)

Databases
Topics
Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data Path ................................. 58
Default Spring Hanger Table ....................................................... 59
Expansion Joints ......................................................................... 59
Load Case Template ................................................................... 59
Piping Size Specification ............................................................. 60
Structural Database..................................................................... 60
Units File Name........................................................................... 60
User Material Database Filename................................................ 60
Valve/Flange Files Location ......................................................... 61
Valves and Flanges ..................................................................... 61

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data Path

Specifies which system folder CAESAR II users to run the software. Select a folder in the list.
Because the software writes the configuration file ([Link]) to the local data folder, you can
configure different data folders to reference different system folders. All of the system folders
contain formatting files, units files, text files, and other user-configurable data files. Some of
these formatting files are language or code-specific. Therefore, you may want to switch between
system folders depending on the current job.

Use Multiple System Folders in the Same Location

You can create multiple system folders in the same location to provide different options for
different projects. System folder names must use the following naming convention:
[Link], where .xxx, is a three-character suffix identifying the folder. You can create as
many system folders as needed below the CAESAR II installation program folder, as long as
you follow the required naming convention. CAESAR II uses the system folder you indicate in
the configuration settings.
For example, you could set up system folders specified for each of the piping codes
configurations you need, such as:
[Link] (Stoomwezen code system configuration)
[Link] (ASME NC code system configuration)
System.313 ASME B31.3 code system configuration)
You could also set up system folders that are customized specific projects.
Browse and locate any system folders named using the [Link] format from the Alternate
CAESAR II Distributed Data Path configuration setting. Then, you can select one and save the
configuration.

Use System Folders in Varying Locations

You can create system folders that reside in other locations, such as somewhere on your
network. This allows you to share the settings from the System folder with others. However, you
must copy the System folder and other necessary program folders to the secondary location.
You must also copy the LIB_I, LIB_M, and Spec folders (found in the Program folder
along with the System folder) to each new system folder location. You can leave the Backup,
Examples, and Temp folders in the original program folder location, as shown in the example
below.
The file name requirements mentioned in the previous section apply for system folders on a
network or in a secondary location as well. In addition, you can set up network system files that
apply at a project level.

There must be a primary system folder, named System, in which the software can place
accounting, version, and diagnostic files that it creates during execution. The location of the
primary system folder is dependent on the specific edition of the Windows operating system, as
follows:

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Windows 7 and later
"C:\ProgramData\INTERGRAPH CAS\CAESAR II\[Link]\System"
The [Link] in each of the above sample path represents the CAESAR II version number.

Default Spring Hanger Table

Defines the value of the default spring hanger table, which is referenced during the spring
hanger design stage of the solution. The software includes tables from more than 35 different
vendors.

Expansion Joints
Specifies which expansion joint database the software should reference during subsequent input
sessions. Available databases provided include Pathway, Senior Flexonics, IWK, Piping
Technology, and China.

Load Case Template

Specifies which load case template is active. The software uses the active template file to
recommend load cases.

Because the software writes the [Link] file to the local data folder, you can configure
different data directories to reference different template files.

Different piping codes have different requirements for load cases. If you use multiple piping
codes in your job, CAESAR II refers to the piping code defined on the last element in the
model to determine which load cases to recommend as per the code standards.

The load case template file name is limited to 15 characters (including the extension).

[Link] (default)
Select this option to include alternate Sustained (SUS) load cases to consider all support
configurations for each corresponding Operating (OPE) condition as required by the B31.3
code. This option, which is only applicable to the B31.3 piping code, also includes the
additional Expansion (EXP) stress range load cases for better coverage of multiple
operating conditions.

LOAD_BASIC.TPL
Select this option if you do not need additional EXP stress range load cases and do not use
the alternate SUS/OCC load cases for B31.3.

LOAD_EXP.TPL
Select this option to include additional EXP stress range load cases for better coverage of
multiple operating conditions and do not use the alternate SUS/OCC load cases for B31.3.

LOAD_ALT.TPL
Select this option to include alternate SUS load cases to consider all support configurations
for each corresponding OPE condition as required by the 2014 edition of B31.3. This option

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

is applicable to all piping codes (except for IGE/TD/12), and not limited to B31.3 piping code.
This option also includes the additional EXP stress range load cases for better coverage of
multiple operating conditions.

Piping Size Specification

Specifies the piping specification standard. Select one of the following standards: ANSI
(American National Standard), JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard), or DIN (German Standard).
By default, the software uses the ANSI pipe size and schedule tables in the input processor.

Structural Database
Specifies which database file is used to acquire the structural steel shape labels and cross
section properties. Select one of the following: AISC 1977, AISC 1989, German 1991, South
African 1991, Korean 1990, Australian 1990, United Kingdom, or China.

Units File Name

Specifies which of the available units files is active. The active units file is used for new job
creation and all output generation.

Because the [Link] file is written to the local data directory, you can configure
different data directories to reference different units files.

The software first searches for units files in the local data directory, followed by the active
System directory.

User Material Database Filename

Specifies which user material database (UMD) file the software will access. By default, when
you add to or modify the supplied material database, the changes are saved to a file named
[Link], which is located in the \System folder.
Versions of CAESAR II prior to 5.30 used the name [Link]. This file can be copied,
then renamed, if necessary, to [Link].
In some cases, it may be necessary to manipulate several UMD files. This can occur if UMD
files are acquired from different sources. Because a specific file name can only be used once, it
will be necessary to rename any additional UMD files. As long as the file suffix is UMD, and the
file resides in the \System folder, the various CAESAR II modules will be able to access them.
Material database files are accessed as described below:
Piping Input and Analysis
The software reads the CAESAR II supplied material database ([Link]).

The software reads the specified user material database (UMD) and uses the updated
materials in the UMD file instead of those in the CAESAR II supplied database.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

The Material Database Editor
The software reads the CAESAR II supplied material database ([Link]).

The software reads the specified user material database (UMD) and uses updated materials
in the UMD file instead of those in the CAESAR II supplied database.

CAESAR II saves any changes or additions to the specified user material database (UMD).

Create a New UMD File

1. Open the Configuration Editor and click Database Definitions.
2. In User Material Database Filename, type in a new name.

The UMD suffix should not be changed.

The file name plus the period plus the UMD suffix should not exceed 15 characters.

Do not use spaces (blanks) in the file name.

3. Before exiting the Configuration Editor, click Save and Exit

configuration.

to save the modified

4. When you open the Piping Input or the Material Database Editor, the software creates the
new UMD file.

Valve/Flange Files Location

Defines where CAESAR II looks for the valve/flange data file. The possible settings for this
configuration setting include:
CAESARII Directory
Directs the software to look for the valve/flange data files in the CAESAR II folders below
%allusersprofile%.
Specs in CII, Data in CW
Directs the software to look for the specification files in the CAESAR II folders below
%allusersprofile%, but to look for the actual data files in the CADWorx folders.
CADWorx Directory
Directs the software to look for the valve/flange data files in the CADWorx folders.

Valves and Flanges

Specifies which valve/flange database CAESAR II references during subsequent input sessions.
The available databases include:
[Link]
Reference the CADWorx Plant database.
[Link]
Reference the Crane database.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

[Link]
Reference a generic database.
[Link]
Reference a database (generic) without attached flanges.

ODBC Settings
Topics
Append Reruns to Existing Data .................................................. 62
Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant Databases .................... 62
ODBC Compliant Database Name............................................... 62

Append Reruns to Existing Data

Controls how the software handles data from multiple runs.
False
Overwrite data from previous runs in the ODBC database. This is the default setting.
True
Add new data to the database, thus storing multiple runs of the same job in the database.

Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant Databases

Turns on or off the capability to create ODBC-compliant databases for static output.

ODBC Compliant Database Name

Type the name of the ODBC project database. All jobs run in this data folder will write their
output to the database specified here.

FRP Pipe Properties

The FRP Properties category provides access to the following groups of configuration settings:

Material Properties (on page 63)

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Settings (on page 65)

Material Properties
Topics
Axial Modulus of Elasticity ........................................................... 63
Axial Strain: Hoop Stress (Ea/Eh*Vh/a) ....................................... 64
FRP Alpha (xe-06)....................................................................... 64
FRP Density ................................................................................ 64
FRP Laminate Type .................................................................... 64
FRP Property Data File ............................................................... 65
Ratio Shear Modulus: Elastic Modulus......................................... 65

Axial Modulus of Elasticity

Displays the axial elastic modulus of fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe. This is the default value
used to set the data in the input processor. When necessary, you may override this value.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Axial Strain: Hoop Stress (Ea/Eh*Vh/a)

Displays the product of the ratio of the axial to the hoop elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio,
which relates the strain in the axial direction to a stress in the hoop direction.
Ea
Elastic modulus in the axial direction.
Eh
Elastic modulus in the hoop direction.
Vh/a
Poisson's ratio relating the strain in the axial direction due to a stress in the hoop direction.

FRP Alpha (xe-06)

Type the thermal expansion coefficient for the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe used (multiplied
by 1,000,000). For example, if the value is 8.5E-6 in/in/deg, you will type 8.5. The exponent
(E-6) is implied.
If a single expansion coefficient is too limiting for your application, the actual thermal
expansion may always be calculated at temperature in inches per inch (or mm per mm) and
entered directly into the Temperature field on the Pipe spreadsheet.

FRP Density
Displays the weight of the pipe material on a per unit volume basis. This field is used to set the
default weight density of FRP materials in the piping input module.

FRP Laminate Type

Specifies the default laminate type as defined in the BS 7159 code for the fiberglass
reinforced plastic pipe. Valid laminate types are:
CSM and Woven Roving
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM and Multi-filament
Chopped strand mat and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface
tissue reinforced layer.
CSM
All chopped strand mat construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced
layer.
The software uses this entry to calculate the flexibility and stress intensity factors of bends;
therefore, this default entry may be overridden using the Type field on the bend auxiliary
dialog boxes.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

FRP Property Data File

Select the file from which the software will read the standard FRP material properties. After the
file is selected, the software will give you the option of reading in from that file.
You may create FRP material files as text files with the .frp extension; these files should be
stored in the CAESAR\System sub-folder. The format of the files must adhere to the format
shown in the following sample FRP data file:

The data lines must exactly follow the order shown in the above sample FRP data file.
The four data lines defining the UKOOA envelope are intended for future use and may be
omitted.

Ratio Shear Modulus: Elastic Modulus

Type the ratio of the shear modulus to the modulus of elasticity (in the axial direction) of the
fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe used. For example, if the material modulus of elasticity (axial)
is 3.2E6 psi, and the shear modulus is 8.0E5 psi, the ratio of these two, 0.25, should be entered.

Settings
Topics
BS 7159 Pressure Stiffening ........................................................ 66
Exclude F2 from UKOOA Bending Stress .................................... 66
Use FRP Flexibilities ................................................................... 66
Use FRP SIF ............................................................................... 67

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

BS 7159 Pressure Stiffening

Displays the method used to calculate the effect of pressure stiffening on the bend SIFs. The BS
7159 code explicitly requires that the effect of pressure stiffening on the bend SIFs be calculated
using the design strain (this is based upon the assumption that the FRP piping is fully
pressurized to its design limit). This is the default method for CAESAR II.
When the piping is pressurized to a value much lower than its design pressure, it may be more
accurate to calculate pressure stiffening based on the actual pressure stress, rather than its
design strain.
This alternative method is a deviation from the explicit instructions of the BS 7159 code.

Exclude F2 from UKOOA Bending Stress

Modifies the UKOOA requirements for axial bending stress. Some sources, such as Shell's DEP
[Link]-Gen. (December 1998) and ISO/DIS 14692 suggest that, when using the UKOOA
code, the axial bending stress should not be multiplied by the Part Factor f2 (the System Factor
of Safety) prior to combination with the longitudinal pressure stress.
True
Modify the UKOOA requirements for axial bending stress.
False
Use the UKOOA exactly as written.

Use FRP Flexibilities

Controls the fitting flexibility factor used by the software.
True
Set the fitting flexibility factor to 1.0 when FRP pipe is selected (Material #20). This is the
default setting.
False
Apply the standard "code" flexibility factor equations to all FRP fittings.
If the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes are in effect, the software uses code flexibility factors,
regardless of the setting of this configuration setting.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Use FRP SIF

Controls the SIF used by the software.
True
Set the fitting SIF to 2.3 when FRP pipe is selected (Material #20). This is the default
setting.
False
Apply the standard "code" SIF equations to all FRP fittings. Optionally, you can manually
type an alternative value.
If the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes are in effect, the software always uses code SIFs,
regardless of the setting of this configuration setting.

Geometry Directives
The Geometry Directives category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:

Bends (on page 67)

Input Items (on page 69)

Bends
Topics
Bend Length Attachment Percent ................................................ 68
Maximum Allowable Bend Angle.................................................. 68
Minimum Allowable Bend Angle .................................................. 68
Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend ................................................ 68

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Bend Length Attachment Percent

Controls the amount of accuracy included in the system dimensions around bends. The default
attachment is 1.0 percent.
Whenever the element leaving the tangent intersection of a bend is within (n)% of the bend
radius on either side of the weldline, CAESAR II inserts an element from the bend weldline to
the To node of the element leaving the bend. The inserted element has a length equal to exactly
(n)% of the bend radius. You can use Bend Length Attachment Percent to adjust this
percentage to reduce the error due to the inserted element; however, the length tolerance for
elements leaving the bend will also be reduced.

Maximum Allowable Bend Angle

Specifies the maximum angle CAESAR II will accept for a bend. The default value is
95-degrees.
Very large angles, short radius bends can cause numerical problems during solution. When you
have a reasonable radius and a large angle, problems rarely arise. However, if the large angle
bend plots well when compared to the surrounding elements, then the bend can probably be
used without difficulty. Well-proportioned bends up to 135-degrees have been tested without a
problem.

Minimum Allowable Bend Angle

Specifies the minimum angle CAESAR II will accept for a bend angle. The default value is 5.0
degrees.
Very small angles, short radius bends can cause numerical problems during solution. When you
have a reasonable radius and a small angle, problems rarely arise. However, if the small angle
bend is grossly small compared to the surrounding elements, then a different modeling
approach is recommended so that the bend is not used.

Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend

Controls the CAESAR II error checking tolerance for the "closeness" of points on the bend
curvature. The default value is 5.0-degrees.
Nodes on a bend curvature that are too close together can cause numerical problems during
solution. Where the radius of the bend is large, such as in a cross-country pipeline, it is not
uncommon to find nodes on a bend curvature closer than 5-degrees.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Input Items
Topics
Auto Node Number Increment ..................................................... 69
Connect Geometry Through CNodes ........................................... 69
Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance ......................................... 69
Loop Closure Tolerance .............................................................. 70
New Job Z-Axis Vertical .............................................................. 70

Auto Node Number Increment

Sets the value for the Automatic Node Numbering routine. The software uses any non-zero,
positive value that you type to automatically assume the To node value on the piping input
spreadsheets. The new To node number is determined as:
"To Node" = "From Node" + Auto Node Number Increment
If this value is set to 0.0, automatic node numbering is disabled.

Connect Geometry Through CNodes

Controls whether each restraint, nozzle, or hanger exists at the same point in space as its
connecting node.
Restraints, flexible nozzles, and spring hangers may be defined with connecting nodes. By
default, CAESAR II ignores the position of the restraint node and the connecting node. They
may be at the same point, or they may be hundreds of feet apart. In many cases, enabling this
option will cause "plot-wise" disconnected parts of the system to be re-connected and to appear
as-expected in both input and output plots.

Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance

Specifies the maximum slope of a straight pipe element for which thermal bowing effects will be
considered.
Thermal bowing is usually associated with fluid carrying horizontal pipes in which the fluid does
not fill the cross section. In these cases, there is a temperature differential across the cross
section. You can use Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance to define the interpretation of
"horizontal." By default, the software uses a value of 0.0001 as the horizontal threshold value. If
a pipe elements pitch is less than this tolerance, the element is considered to be horizontal, and
thermal bowing loads can be applied to it. An elements pitch is computed using the following
formula:
PITCH = | DY | / ( DX2 + DY2 + DZ2 )1/2

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Loop Closure Tolerance

Sets the loop closure tolerance that CAESAR II uses for error checking. You can set this value
interactively for each job analyzed, or you can type the loop closure tolerance using this option
and override the software default value of 1.0 in without distraction.

New Job Z-Axis Vertical

Controls in which plane the Z-axis lies. By default, CAESAR II assumes the Y-axis is vertical
with the X- and Z-axes in the horizontal plane.
False
Place the Z-axis in the horizontal plane. This is the default setting.
True
Make the Z-axis vertical. The X- and Y-axes will be in the horizontal plane.
This setting applies only to jobs created after this setting is changed.

Graphic Settings
The Graphics Settings category provides access to configuration settings that used to set the
different plot option colors, font characteristics, and the view options.

Advanced Options - Contains options that should only be used by graphics experts. For
more information, see Advanced Options (on page 71).

Background Colors - Contains options that define the color of the plot window. For more
information, see Background Colors (on page 72).

CADWorx Options - Contains options that define the color and behavior for CADWorx
drawings imported into CAESAR II models. For more information, see CADWorx Options (on
page 73).

Component Colors - Contains options that define the color for various components in the
plot. For more information, see Component Colors (on page 74).

Marker Options - Contains options that set the node marker color and size. For more
information, see Marker Options (on page 76).

Miscellaneous Options - Contains options that determine how graphics are displayed
either by default or when using the Reset Plot option. For more information, see
Miscellaneous Options (on page 77).

Output Colors - Contains options that set the colors used when plotting code stress in
output. For more information, see Output Colors (on page 81).

Text Options - Contains options for defining font, font style, font size, and color. Scripts are
supported. For more information, see Text Options (on page 82).

Visual Options - Contains options that control general plotting visibility. For more
information, see Visual Options (on page 83).

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

To change a color, click it once and then click the ellipses button that appears to the
right. Select a color in the dialog box that appears, and then click OK. To save the color settings,
click Save and Exit
before closing the Configuration Editor.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Advanced Options
Topics
Backplane Culling........................................................................ 72
Culling Maximum Extent .............................................................. 72
Use Culling Frustrum ................................................................... 72

Backplane Culling
This setting should only be used by graphics experts. If you are experiencing difficulties with
your graphics, contact Intergraph CAS Support for assistance.

Culling Maximum Extent

This setting should only be used by graphics experts. If you are experiencing difficulties with
your graphics, contact Intergraph CAS Support for assistance.

Use Culling Frustrum

This setting should only be used by graphics experts. If you are experiencing difficulties with
your graphics, contact Intergraph CAS Support for assistance.

Background Colors
Topics
Bottom ........................................................................................ 72
Top ............................................................................................. 72
Use Uniform Background Color ................................................... 72

Bottom
Sets the color for the bottom of the plot window.

Top
Sets the color for the top of the plot window.

Use Uniform Background Color

Controls the background color. Set this option to True if you want the plot background to be one
uniform color instead of blending between the top and bottom colors.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

CADWorx Options
Topics
Color - Ambient ........................................................................... 73
Color - Face ................................................................................ 73
Color - Line ................................................................................. 73
Color - Specular .......................................................................... 73
Color - Transmission ................................................................... 73
Gloss Value................................................................................. 73
Show Lines ................................................................................. 73
Show Model ................................................................................ 74
Use AutoCAD Colors ................................................................... 74
Use Keyboard for Walkthrough .................................................... 74

Color - Ambient
Sets the color of the ambient properties on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.

Color - Face
Sets the color of the face of the CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.

Color - Line
Sets the color of the piping lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.

Color - Specular
Sets the color of the specular properties on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.

Color - Transmission
Sets the color of the transmission lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.

Gloss Value
Sets the level of the gloss value on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.

Show Lines
Indicates to show or hide the piping lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Show Model
Indicates to show or hide the CADWorx drawing (model) that was imported into a CAESAR II
model.

Use AutoCAD Colors

Indicates to use the color settings from AutoCAD on a CADWorx drawing imported into a
CAESAR II model.

Use Keyboard for Walkthrough

Indicates to use the keyboard, not the mouse, to perform a walkthrough on a CADWorx drawing
imported into a CAESAR II model.

Component Colors
Topics
Anchor CNode............................................................................. 74
Anchors....................................................................................... 74
Expansion Joints ......................................................................... 75
Flange......................................................................................... 75
Hanger CNode ............................................................................ 75
Hangers ...................................................................................... 75
Nozzles ....................................................................................... 75
Nozzle Limit Color 1 .................................................................... 75
Nozzle Limit Color 2 .................................................................... 75
Pipes........................................................................................... 75
Restraint CNode.......................................................................... 76
Restraints .................................................................................... 76
Rigids.......................................................................................... 76
Selection ..................................................................................... 76
SIFs/Tees ................................................................................... 76
Steel ........................................................................................... 76

Anchor CNode
Sets the color of Cnode anchors when displayed in the graphics.

Anchors
Sets the color of anchors when displayed in the graphics.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Expansion Joints
Sets the color of expansion joints when displayed in the graphics.

Flange
Sets the color of all flanges when displayed in the graphics.

Hanger CNode
Sets the color of Cnode hangers when displayed in the graphics.

Hangers
Sets the color of the spring hangers (and spring cans) when displayed in the graphics.

Nozzles
Sets the color of all nozzles when displayed in the graphics.

Nozzle Limit Color 1

Sets the first color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow when displayed in the graphics.
This arrow shows the element orientation when defining the local coordinate system for an
equipment check. Set the second color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow in the Nozzle
Limit Color 2 (on page 75) configuration setting.

Nozzle Limit Color 2

Sets the second color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow when displayed in the graphics.
This arrow shows the element orientation when defining the local coordinate system for an
equipment check. Set the first color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow in the Nozzle Limit
Color 1 (on page 75) configuration setting.

Pipes
Sets the color of all pipe elements when displayed in the graphics.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Restraint CNode
Sets the color of the restraint Cnode when displayed in the graphics.

Restraints
Sets the color of all restraints (except for anchors and hangers) when displayed in the graphics.

Rigids
Sets the color of all rigid elements when displayed in the graphics.

Selection
Sets the color of the selected element when displayed in the graphics.

SIFs/Tees
Sets the color of all tees when displayed in the graphics.

Steel
Sets the color of all structural steel elements in both the structural steel plot and the piping plot
when structural steel is included.

Marker Options
Topics
Marker Color ............................................................................... 76
Marker Size ................................................................................. 76

Marker Color
Sets the color of the node markers shown in the graphics.

Marker Size
Sets the size of the node markers shown in the graphics.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Miscellaneous Options
These options determine how graphics display by default or how they display when you use the
Reset Plot option while in the graphics.

Topics
Default Operator ......................................................................... 77
Default Projection Mode .............................................................. 77
Default Render Mode .................................................................. 77
Default View ............................................................................... 78
Disable Graphic Tooltip Bubble ................................................... 78
Force Black and White Printing ................................................... 78
Idle Processing Count ................................................................. 79
Optimal Frame Rate.................................................................... 79
Restore Previous Anchor Size..................................................... 79
Restore Previous Hanger Size .................................................... 79
Restore Previous Operator.......................................................... 79
Restore Previous Projection Mode .............................................. 80
Restore Previous Render Mode .................................................. 80
Restore Previous Restraint Size.................................................. 80
Restore Previous View ................................................................ 80
Video Driver ................................................................................ 81

Default Operator
Controls the initial display of graphics. Available options are Zoom to Window, Annotate,
Orbit, Pan, Restore Previous, Select, and Zoom with Mouse. The default setting is Zoom to
Window.

Default Projection Mode

Specifies the projection of graphics in the software. You can select Orthographic, Perspective,
or Stretched. The default projection setting is Orthographic.

Default Render Mode

Specifies the render mode. Available options are Phong Shading, Centerline, Flat, Gouraud
Shading, Silhouette, Triangulated, and Wireframe, either with or without hidden lines. The
default render mode setting is Phong Shading.
Centerline and Silhouette are the fastest render modes and less memory intensive for
your computer graphics card.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Default View
Specifies the graphical view. Available options are SE Isometric, SW Isometric, NW Isometric,
NE Isometric, Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left, Right, and Restore Previous. The default
view setting is SE Isometric.

Disable Graphic Tooltip Bubble

Enables or disables the tooltip bubble that displays information about the element that you
mouse over in the graphics view.
True
Tooltip bubble does not display.
False
Tooltip bubble displays.

Force Black and White Printing

Controls printing output of graphics. If set to True, graphics are printed using only black and
white.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Idle Processing Count

Controls the number of objects the software is allowed to draw during a single idle cycle.
CAESAR II draws the model whenever your machine becomes idle, that is, whenever any
interaction between you and the computer ceases. For example, there may three or four idle
messages between keystrokes. On slower machines, it may increase performance to lower this
value, and vice versa.

Optimal Frame Rate

Determines how many times per second the software will re-draw the piping display when it is
being manipulated, such as when you are zooming, panning, or rotating the display. If you
experience graphics problems such as sluggishness during operations or large boxes being
drawn instead of the piping system display, lower this number.

Restore Previous Anchor Size

Returns the anchor size to its previous setting.
True
Restore the anchor size to its previous setting.
False
Use the default setting.

Restore Previous Hanger Size

Returns the hanger size to its previous setting.
True
Restore the hanger size to its previous setting.
False
Use the default setting.

Restore Previous Operator

Returns the operator to its previous setting.
True
Restore the operator to its previous setting.
False
Use the default setting.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Restore Previous Projection Mode

Returns the projection mode to its previous state. Projection mode is either isometric or
orthographic.
True
Restore the projection mode to its previous setting.
False
Use the default setting.

Restore Previous Render Mode

Returns the render mode to its previous state.
Four render modes are available in CAESAR II: solids, wireframes, silhouette, and
centerline.
True
Restore the render mode to its previous setting.
False
Use the default setting.

Restore Previous Restraint Size

Returns the restraint size to its previous setting.
True
Restore the restraint size to its previous setting.
False
Use the default setting.

Restore Previous View

Returns the standard view to its previous setting.
The standard views are Front, Back, Top, Bottom, Left, Right, SW Isometric, SE
Isometric, NW Isometric and NE Isometric.
True
Restore the standard view to its previous setting.
False
Use the default setting.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Video Driver
Determines the video driver used in plotting. Select OpenGL, Direct 3D, or Windows Basic
Video.

Output Colors
Topics
Actual Stress Settings ................................................................. 81
Displaced Shape ......................................................................... 81
Percent Stress Settings ............................................................... 82

Actual Stress Settings

Assigns a color to a specific level of stress. When plotting code stress in output, the software will
color the elements in terms of actual stress. The levels are currently set as follows:
Level

Actual Stress

Level 1

<10,000 psi

Level 2

10,000 to 15,000 psi

Level 3

15,000 to 20,000 psi

Level 4

20,000 to 25,000 psi

Level 5

25,000 to 30,000 psi

Level 6

> 30,000 psi

When plotting code stress in output, the software can also color elements in terms of
percent of code allowable. For more information, see Percent Stress Settings (on page 82).

Displaced Shape
Sets the color of the Displaced Shape option when displayed in output graphics.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Percent Stress Settings

Assigns a color to a specific level of stress. When plotting code stress in output, the software will
color the elements in terms of the percent of code allowable. The levels are currently set as
follows:
Level

Percent (of Code Allowable)

Stress

Level 1

< 20%

Level 2

20 to 40%

Level 3

40 to 60%

Level 4

60 to 80%

Level 5

80 to 100%

Level 6

>100%

When plotting code stress in output, the software can also color elements in terms of
actual stress. For more information, see Actual Stress Settings (on page 81).

Text Options
You can use these options to select font, font style, and font size and color. Scripts are
supported. The different plot texts are node numbers and names, annotation, and legends.

Topics
Annotation Text .......................................................................... 82
Legend Text................................................................................ 83
Node Text ................................................................................... 83
Output Text ................................................................................. 83
Rendered Mode Text Always Visible ........................................... 83
Silhouette Mode Text Always Visible ........................................... 83

Annotation Text
Defines the font, font size, and color of annotation text.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Legend Text
Sets the text color and font style settings of all legends, such as displacements, temperatures,
and so forth, when displayed in the graphics.

Node Text
Determines the color and font style settings of node numbers and node names when displayed
in the graphics.

Output Text
Defines the font, font size, and color of output text.

Rendered Mode Text Always Visible

Controls the display of rendered text. By default, the software will not draw text that is occluded
by anything else, including other text. For example, if a pipe is in front of text, the text will not be
drawn. If some text overlaps other text, the text that is further back will be hidden. To override
this behavior so that all text is shown, set RenderedModeTextAlwaysVisible to True.

Silhouette Mode Text Always Visible

Controls the display of silhouette text.

Visual Options
These options control general plotting visibility.

Topics
Always Use System Colors ......................................................... 84
Always Use System Fonts .......................................................... 84
Axis Mode................................................................................... 84
Fixed Size Restraint Size ............................................................ 84
Hide Overlapping Text ................................................................ 84
Restraint Helix is a Line .............................................................. 84
Shadow Mode............................................................................. 84
Show Bounding Box.................................................................... 85
Smooth Transitions ..................................................................... 85
Use Fixed Size Restraints ........................................................... 85
Visibility % .................................................................................. 85

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Always Use System Colors

Stores the colors the software uses to display the model in the registry.

Always Use System Fonts

Stores the fonts that the software uses to display the model in the registry.

Axis Mode
Turns on and off the display of the axes in the plot. By default, the axes displays in the lower left
corner of the plot.

Fixed Size Restraint Size

Controls the restraint size. By default, the software draws restraints relative to the size of the
pipe to which they are attached. For example, the symbol is larger on a 12-inch pipe than on a
2-inch pipe. You can override this behavior so that the software uses the same size restraint
everywhere by setting Use Fixed Size Restraints (on page 85) to True and defining a Fixed
Size Restraint Size value.

Hide Overlapping Text

Hides node text that is overwritten by other text. This makes reading the plot easier, but
eliminates some node text.

Restraint Helix is a Line

Controls how the software draws a restraint helix.
By default, a restraint with a variable retention is drawn with a small spring to indicate that it is
not fixed. If this property is set to True (the default setting), the software draws the spring as a
line; otherwise, the software draws the spring as a coiled cylinder.
If drawing the restraint helix as a line degrades plot performance, set Restraint Helix is
a Line to False.

Shadow Mode
Defines the shadow mode. Select Hard, Soft, or None. The default setting is None.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Show Bounding Box

Controls whether a bounding box appears around the model when it is being manipulated--for
example, rotated or panned-- with the mouse.
True
Display a bounding box.
False
Suppress the display of a bounding box.

Smooth Transitions
Specifies whether graphics have a smooth transition when the view is changed.
True
Enable smooth transition.
False
Change the view instantly. This option reduces the video card memory requirements.

Use Fixed Size Restraints

Controls the size of the restraint. When it is set to True, this property draws restraints based on
the value defined by the property Fixed Size Restraint Size (on page 84).

Visibility %
Determines the percentage of incident light that passes through an element volume when using
the Translucent Objects or Hidden Lines option in the graphics. Setting this to zero makes all
elements completely opaque while a setting of 100% renders all elements transparent. The
default setting is 50%.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Miscellaneous Options
The Miscellaneous Options category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:

Input Items (on page 86)

Output Items (on page 88)

System Level Items (on page 89)

Input Items
Topics
Autosave Time Interval ................................................................ 87
Disable "File Open" Graphic Thumbnail ....................................... 87
Disable Undo/Redo Ability ........................................................... 87
Dynamic Example Input Text ....................................................... 87
Enable Autosave ......................................................................... 88
Prompted Autosave ..................................................................... 88

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Autosave Time Interval

Sets the time interval used to perform the auto-save function. Type a value in minutes.

Disable "File Open" Graphic Thumbnail

Controls whether the graphic thumbnail plot in the Open dialog box (accessed by clicking File >
Open in the software) is displayed. The graphics thumbnail plots a small image of the model as
a single line drawing. On some slower, memory limited processors, or when scanning very large
models, this thumbnail graphic may take a few seconds to plot the model.
True
Turn on the display of thumbnail graphics.
False
Turn off the display of thumbnail graphics.

Disable Undo/Redo Ability

Controls the Undo/Redo feature of the input module. On some installations, it may be useful to
disable the Undo/Redo feature of the input module. With Undo/Redo enabled, CAESAR II can
process a job approximately one-half the size of that which can be processed when Undo/Redo
is disabled (for similar memory settings). Likewise, with Undo/Redo enabled, the input module
speed may be reduced.

Dynamic Example Input Text

Controls how much example text is placed in new dynamic input files. By default, the software
places example text and spectrum definitions in the input stream of new dynamic input files.
After you are familiar with the input, this example text may be unnecessary. Select from the
following options to vary how much of this example text is incorporated in the input:
Max
Place all of the examples and spectrum definitions in the input stream of new dynamic input
files.
None
Eliminate all the example text and all the built-in spectrum definitions. This setting is
intended for experienced users.
Spec
Eliminate all of the example text, but leaves the predefined spectrum definition. This means
that the built-in spectrum definitions (El Centro, and so forth) will still be defined and
available for use.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Enable Autosave
Controls whether CAESAR II will automatically save the piping input at specified intervals.
True
Turn on Autosave.
False
Turn off Autosave.

Prompted Autosave
Controls whether the software prompts you at the specified time interval to save the input. You
must also set Enable Autosave to True.
True
Prompt before performing the autosave
False
Perform the autosave without prompting.

Output Items
Topics
Displacement Reports Sorted by Nodes ...................................... 88
Output Reports by Load Case ..................................................... 89
Output Table of Contents............................................................. 89
Time History Animation ............................................................... 89

Displacement Reports Sorted by Nodes

Turns on and off nodal sort. By default, the software sorts the nodes in ascending order during
the force/stress computations. This produces a displacement output report in which the nodes
are ordered in increasing magnitude. Select False to turn off this nodal sort. The resulting
displacement reports will be produced in the order the nodes were entered during model
building.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Output Reports by Load Case

Controls how output reports are sorted. By default, the software generates output reports sorted
by load case. Select False to turn off this option, which causes output reports to be sorted by
type. For reports by type, all displacement reports will be generated, then all restraint reports,
then all force reports, and so on.

Output Table of Contents

Controls the generation of a table of contents, which is normally produced after a static or a
dynamic output session.
True
Generate a table of contents upon exit. This is the default setting.
False
Suppress generation of a table of contents.

Time History Animation

Controls the creation of the file used to animate the time history displacement of the piping
system. By default, this setting is turned on, which instructs CAESAR II to generate a file of
displacements, <jobname>.XYT, for every time step. This file is used in subsequent interactive
animation sessions by the user. The size of this file is dependent on the size of the model and
the number of time steps analyzed. Consequently, it may be advantageous from a disk usage
point of view not to create this file.
True
Generate the displacement file. This is the default setting.
False
Suppress generation of the displacement file.

System Level Items

Topics
Compress CAESAR II Files ......................................................... 90
Memory Allocated (Mb) ............................................................... 90
User ID........................................................................................ 90

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Compress CAESAR II Files

Controls the compression of CAESAR II files.
True
Compress all of the CAESAR II job files into an archive named <jobname>.c2, when the job
is not active. After the software creates the archive, it deletes the component files (_a, _j,
_p, _7, _s, and so forth).
False
Leave the component files in the data directory and do not create the c2 archive.
The advantages and disadvantages to using the compressed c2 archive are outlined
follows:
Advantages

Only one job file exists in the data directory.

The job and all related data are easily archived.

The job and all related data can be transmitted in its entirety.

Disadvantages

The archive makes it difficult to get to the component files.

The archive is big, because it contains all component files. Therefore, saving or
transmitting takes more resources than manipulating a single component file.

Pressure Variation in EXP Case

Controls whether any pressure variation between the referenced load cases will be considered
in the resulting expansion case. When set to Default, the software considers the pressure
variation according to the active piping code.

Reduced Intersection
Defines the code rules for reduced intersection. Select one of the following options:
B31.1 (Pre 1980)
Use the pre-1980 B31.1 code rules used for reduced intersection. These rules did not define
a separate branch SIF for the reduced branch end. The branch stress intensification factor
will be the same as the header stress intensification factor regardless of the
branch-to-header diameter ratio.
B31.1 (Post 1980)
Use the post-1980 B31.1 code rules for reduced intersections. The reduced intersection SIF
equations in B31.1 from 1980 through 1989 generated unnecessarily high SIFs because of
a mistake made in the implementation. (This is according to WRC329.) For this reason,
many analysts opted for the pre-1980 B31.1 SIF calculation. CAESAR II corrects this
mistake by automatically setting B31.1 Reduced Z Fix to True (the default setting). You can
vary the status of this flag in the CAESAR II configuration file to generate any interpretation
of B31.1 that you want. The default for a new job is for B31.1(Post 1980) and for B31.1
Reduced Z Fix to be set to True.
The No RFT/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs (see "No RTF/WLT in Reduced Fitting
SIFs" on page 94) option also affects the SIF calculations at reduced intersections.
WRC 329
Use the recommendations of WRC329 for reduced intersections. A reduced intersection is
any intersection where the d/D ratio is less than 0.975. The WRC329 recommendations
result in more conservative stress calculations in some instances and less conservative
stress calculations in others. In all cases, the WRC329 values should be more accurate and
more in-line with the respective codes intent.
ASME Sect. III
Use the 1985 ASME Section III NC and ND rules for reduced intersections.
Schneider
Activate the Schneider reduced intersection stress intensification factor multiplication. Has
the same effect as Use Schneider (on page 92).

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

PD 8010-2
ISO 14692
HPGSL
JPI

New Job Liberal Expansion Stress Allowable

Instructs the software to default new jobs to use the liberal expansion stress allowable. This
allowable adds the difference between the hot allowable stress and the sustained stress to the
allowable expansion stress range if it is allowed by the particular code in use. To instruct the
software to default new jobs to not use this allowable, select False.

Use PD/4t
Instructs the software to use the simplified form of the longitudinal stress term when computing
sustained stresses. Some codes permit this simplified form when the pipe wall thickness is thin.
This option is used most often when you are comparing CAESAR II results to older pipe stress
software results. The more comprehensive calculation--the default--is recommended.

Yield Stress Criterion

Specifies the method the software uses to calculate maximum stress. CAESAR II can calculate
this maximum stress (which is not a code stress) according to either the von Mises Theory or
the Maximum Shear Theory.
Code stress refers to a stress calculated by an equation provided by the code. For more
information on code-defined stresses, see the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
The Stresses Extended output report produced by CAESAR II contains a value representative of
the maximum stress state through the cross section, calculated according to the indicated yield
criteria theory.
Configuration
Setting

Failure Theory

Calculated Stress

Max3D Shear

Maximum Shear Stress

Maximum Stress Intensity

von Mises

Maximum Energy of
Distortion

Octahedral Shearing Stress

CAESAR II computes the selected stress at four points along the axis normal to the plane of
bending (outside top, inside top, inside bottom, outside bottom), and includes the maximum
value in the stresses report. The equations used for each of these yield criteria are listed below.
If von Mises Theory is used, the software computes the octahedral shearing stress, which differs
from the von Mises stress by a constant factor.
For codes B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII, and DnV, this setting controls
which equation the software uses to compute the equivalent stress. For these codes, the
software uses the equations shown in the piping code to determine the yield stress criterion in
the Stresses Extended output report.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Configuration and Environment

Stress Formulation
CAESAR II reports the largest stress using four calculation points through the pipe cross
section, as show in the following figure.

The four points are established by a line perpendicular to the bending moment acting on the
pipe (shown in red). Points 1 and 4 are on the outside surface of the pipe, where radial stress is
zero. Point 1 is in bending tension and Point 4 is in bending compression. Points 2 and 3 are on
the inside surface of the pipe where radial stress is compressive (negative) pressure.
Longitudinal stress (Sl), hoop stress (Sh), radial stress (Sr) and shear stress (St) are calculated
at each position using the appropriate formulas.

Position

Longitudinal Stress (Sl)

Hoop Stress (Sh)

SIF Multiplier for Sustained Stress Index

Modifies the stress index for sustained loads and occasional loads. The default setting is
0.0000, which indicates that the software uses whatever the currently active piping code
recommends for the SIF/Index multiplier. For example, if this configuration setting is set to
0.000, when you select B31.3 on the job, the B31.3 code recommends to set the SIF multiplier
to 0.7500. The software uses that value in the calculation.
With the release of CAESAR II 2014 and the implementation of B31.3 2012, the internal
interpretation of this existing configuration setting was changed. B31.3 2012 defines the SIF
multiplier value as 0.75. Other codes similar to B31.3 do not address this value. The default
value of this configuration setting was changed to 0.0000. This change enables CAESAR II to
internally set the multiplier to 0.7500 for B31.3 and to 1.0000 for other similar codes. The
following table summarizes these settings.
Option

Configuration
SIF Multiplier Setting

Sustained Moment
Multiplier (I)

B31.3 Code

Codes similar to B31.3

(such as: JPI, B31.5)

Option 1
(default)

0.0000

I = 0.75i

I = i (similar to Option 4)

Option 2

0.0001

I = 1.0

Option 3

0.7500

I = 0.75i

Option 4

1.0000

I=i

This change does not affect all piping codes.

The following interpretations apply to B31.3 code prior to the 2010 Edition, so they are only
applicable if you need to analyze older jobs to the older code addenda:

B31.3 Interpretation 1-34 (February 23, 1981) File: 1470-1 states that for sustained and
occasional loads, you can use an SIF of 0.75i, but not less than 1.0. To comply with this
interpretation (1-34), type 0.7500.

B31.3 Interpretation 6-03 (December 14, 1987) File B31-87-022 permits you to ignore the
stress intensification for sustained and occasional loads. To comply with this interpretation
(6-03), type 0.0001.

CAESAR II User's Guide

103

Configuration and Environment

Set/Change Password
You can set password protection for the configuration file using the Security command. By
setting a password on the primary configuration file, a corporate standard can be enforced
throughout the network. Subsequent use of the configuration module in other data folders will
allow only modification of display or other environment directives that do not affect calculated
results.

To set security on your configuration file:

1. Set up your configuration file and click Save and Exit
in the top-left corner of the
Configuration Editor window to save the configuration settings.
2. From the Home tab, select File > Set Default Data Directory.
3. Browse and select the CAESAR II System subfolder in the Default Data Directory
Specification dialog box
Locate the System subfolder in the root folder based on your platform.
Windows 7/8/8.1: \Program Data\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\Version Number\System
Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR
II\Version Number\System
Click

Configure or Tools > Configure/Setup to open the Configuration Editor dialog box, and

then click on the Security

drop-down arrow.

1. Select one of the following options, depending upon your current configuration:

New Password (on page 104)

Access Protected Data (on page 105)

Change Password (on page 105)

Remove Password (on page 105)

New Password
Type a password. After entering a password, you have the ability to change configuration
settings from the program folder, or alter or remove the password.

Initially, New Password is the only option available.

When typing a new password, you are prompted for the new password a second time to
ensure the password was typed as expected the first time.

CAESAR II User's Guide

104

Configuration and Environment

Access Protected Data

Allows you to modify protected options. This option is accessible only after a password exists.
The use of this option is not necessary if there is no previously specified password. If no
password has been set, you can modify all configuration settings.

Change Password
Allows you to change your current password. You must first type the correct existing password.
The current password may be changed at any time by anyone who has authorization to do so.
After a password has been set, the software disables all computation controls, stress options,
and any other configuration options, which could affect the CAESAR II computations.

Remove Password
Deletes the current password. Anyone with authorization can remove the current password by
entering the correct existing password for this option. After a password is removed, all options
that appear in the Configuration Editor can be modified from any folder where you have
read/write access rights.

CAESAR II User's Guide

105

SECTION 4

Piping Input Reference

This section describes how to specify job parameters through the menus, boxes, and
commands of the software.
To edit a piping model, open a piping file from the CAESAR II main menu. Then, click Input >
Piping. The CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box displays.

This dialog box describes the piping on an element-by-element basis. It consists of menus and
toolbars which perform a number of supporting operations, and data fields that contain
information about each piping element. A graphic representation of the model displays
automatically. This model updates as you add new elements.

CAESAR II User's Guide

106

Piping Input Reference

In This Section
Classic Piping Input Dialog Box................................................... 107
Available Commands .................................................................. 229
3D Modeler ................................................................................. 372
S3D/SPR Model View ................................................................. 390

Classic Piping Input Dialog Box

Piping data is grouped into blocks of related data on the left side of the Classic Piping Input.
Double click >> in the upper right corner of any group to display additional input boxes in a
dialog box. You can arrange these dialog boxes to meet your needs.
The right side of the piping input includes an auxiliary panel with tabs that relate to items
selected through the check boxes. You can also access these tabs by selecting the auxiliary
area in the Aux Tools Toolbar (Piping Input) (see "Aux Tools Toolbar" on page 357).

CAESAR II User's Guide

107

Piping Input Reference

Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog Box using the

Function Keys
Function keys help you to quickly type data without using the mouse to move to various input
boxes. By default, when you place the cursor inside a box on the Classic Piping Input dialog
box, pressing a function key on the keyboard moves the cursor to the beginning of a block of
input data according to the list below.
Function Key

Destination

From Node

Diameter

Temp 1

Material

Elastic Modulus (c)

Refractory Thickness

Line number

Help Screens and Units

Press the question mark key ? or the F1 function key while the cursor is in any of the input data
cells to display interactive help text for that item. Hover the cursor over a box to display a tool tip
indicating the current units.

Node Numbers
Each element is identified by its end node number. Because each input screen represents a
piping element, you must specify the element end points, called the From node and the To
node. The software uses these points as locations at which you can type or extract information.
You must specify a From and To node for all elements.
You can set the Auto Node Number Increment configuration setting in Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu and CAESAR II generates the From and To node values
automatically (to a value other than zero) based on the increment you specify.

CAESAR II User's Guide

108

Piping Input Reference

Double-click >> to display the Edit Node Numbers dialog box.

From
Specifies the node number for the starting end of the element. Node numbers must be
numeric, ranging from 1 to 32000. Typically, the From node number is automatically
generated by CAESAR II from the preceding element. You can change the node numbers,
but be careful not to use the same node number more than once in a model.

To
Specifies the node number for the end of the element. Node numbers must be numeric,
ranging from 1 to 32000. You can change the node numbers, but be careful not to use the
same node number more than once in a model.

Name
Assigns non-numeric names to node points. Double-click the Name check box to display an
auxiliary dialog box where you can assign names of up to 10 characters to the From and To
nodes. These names display with (or instead) of the node numbers in graphic plots and
reports. In Piping Input, click the down arrow on Node Numbers
(in the Plot Tools
toolbar) and select Names Only to display only the node names on the model, and not node
numbers.
Non-numeric names can be truncated in 80-column reports.

CAESAR II User's Guide

109

Piping Input Reference

Deltas
Type element lengths as delta dimensions according to the X, Y, and Z rectangular coordinate
system established for the piping system. The Y-axis represents the vertical axis in CAESAR II.
CAESAR II treats each element as a vector. The vector length is equal to the element length.
The vector direction points from the From node to the To node.
The delta dimensions DX, DY, and DZ, are the measurements along the X, Y, and Z-axes
between the From node and the To node. In most cases you only need to use one of the three
options, because the piping usually runs along the global axes. Where the piping element is
skewed, you must make two or three entries. You must define at least one option for all
elements except zero-length expansion joints.
When you are using feet and inches for compound length and length units, valid entries
include formats such as: 3-6, 3 ft. -6 in, and 3-6-3/16.
You can use offsets to modify the stiffness of the current element by adjusting its length and the
orientation of its neutral axis in 3-D space.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Deltas dialog box.

DX
Specifies the X component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch fraction or meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use
simple forms of addition, multiplication, and division, as well as exponential format.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this field.

CAESAR II User's Guide

110

Piping Input Reference

DY
Specifies the Y component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction or
meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use simple forms of
addition, multiplication, and division, as well as exponential format.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this field.

DZ
Specifies the Z component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction or
meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use simple forms of
addition, multiplication, and division, as well as exponential format.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this field.

Offsets
Indicates whether the software corrects modeled dimensions of an element back to its
actual dimensions. Double-click the Offsets check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog
box to select or clear this option.
Specify the distances from the position of the From node in 3-D space to the actual From
end of the element.
Specify the distances from the position of the To node in 3-D space to the actual To end of
the element.
If you leave any offset direction distances blank, the software defaults them to zero.
Thermal expansion is 0 for the offset portion of an offset element. No element flexibility is
generated for the offset portion of the element. The following figure shows a common usage
for the offset element.

CAESAR II User's Guide

111

Piping Input Reference

Length
Specifies the distance between the To node and the From node.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this field.

Direction Cosines
Specifies the X, Y, and Z components or element direction cosines.
For an element aligned with the X-axis,
Cos X ..... 1.0
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the Y-axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... 1.0
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the Z-axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... 1.0

CAESAR II User's Guide

112

Piping Input Reference

Pipe Sizes
Type the dimensions for the element. Plus mill tolerance is used only for the IGE/TD/12 piping
code. Seam weld is used only for the IGE/TD/12 piping code. These options carry forward from
one element to the next during the design session so you only need to type values for those
elements at which a change occurs. You can specify nominal pipe sizes and schedules.
CAESAR II converts these values to actual outside diameter and wall thickness. Outside
diameter and wall thickness are required data inputs.
Nominal diameters, thicknesses, and schedule numbers are a function of the pipe size
specification. Click Tools > Configure/Setup on the main menu or click CAESAR II
Configuration
on the CAESAR II Tools toolbar to select ANSI, JIS, or DIN as the piping
size specification.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box.

Diameter
Specifies the pipe diameter. Normally, you should type the nominal diameter and CAESAR
II converts it to the actual outer diameter necessary for the analysis. There are two ways to
prevent this conversion:

115

Piping Input Reference

Fluid Density
Displays the fluid density. Specify the fluid density when the internal fluid the piping system
transports significantly affects the weight loads. When the specific gravity of the fluid is
known, you can type that instead of the density. For example, you could type 0.85SG.
Specific gravities are converted to the appropriate densities immediately on input. To type
specific gravity, follow the numeric value with the letters SG (no spaces). The software
automatically converts this value to density.
In the default ENGLISH units system, densities are typed in pounds per cubic inch.

Propagate Properties
Indicates whether to propagate the property changes. Clear this check box to indicate that
properties apply to the current element only.

Operating Conditions
You can specify up to nine temperatures and ten pressures (one extra for the hydrostatic test
pressure) for each piping element. The temperatures are actual temperatures, not changes from
the ambient temperature. CAESAR II uses these temperatures to obtain the thermal strain and
allowable stresses for the element from the Material Database. As an alternative, you can
directly specify the thermal strains. For more information, see Alpha Tolerance (on page 53).
Thermal strains have absolute values on the order of 0.002, and are unitless. Pressures are
typed as gauge values and cannot be negative. Each temperature and each pressure that you
typed creates a loading for you to use when building load cases. Both thermal and pressure
data carries forward from one element to the next until changed. Typing a value in the Hydro
pressure box causes CAESAR II to build a hydro case in the set of recommended load cases.
CAESAR II uses an ambient temperature of 70F, unless changed using the Special
Execution Parameters option. For more information, see New Job Ambient Temperature (on
page 54).

CAESAR II User's Guide

116

Piping Input Reference

Double-click >> to display the Edit Operating Conditions dialog box.

Rigid
Double-click Rigid if the active element is much stiffer than the connecting pipe, such as a
flange or valve. This displays the auxiliary dialog box to collect the component weight. For
more information, see Rigid (on page 126).
For rigid elements, CAESAR II follows these rules:

When the rigid element weight is defined as a value other than zero, CAESAR II
computes any extra weight due to insulation and contained fluid. The software then
adds that value to the defined weight value.

The weight of fluid added to a non-zero weight rigid element is equal to the same
weight that would be computed for an equivalent straight pipe. The weight of
insulation added is equal to the same weight that would be computed for an
equivalent straight pipe multiplied by 1.75.

If the weight of a rigid element is zero or blank, CAESAR II assumes that the
element is an artificial construction element rather than an actual piping element. In
this case, the software does not calculate an insulation or fluid weight for that
element.

The stiffness of the rigid element is relative to the diameter wall thickness. Make
sure that the diameter on a rigid element indicates the rigid stiffness to generate.

Expansion Joint
Double-click Expansion Joint if the active element is an expansion joint. This displays the
auxiliary dialog box used to collect stiffness parameters and effective diameter. For more
information, see Expansion Joints (on page 126).
Expansion joints can be modeled as zero-length (with all stiffnesses acting at a single point)
or as finite-length (with the stiffnesses acting over a continuous element). In the single-point
case, you must type all stiffness. In the continuous element case, you must omit either the

CAESAR II User's Guide

120

Piping Input Reference

lateral or angular stiffness.

SIF & Tees

Double-click SIF & Tees if the active element has special stress intensification factors
(SIFs). CAESAR II automatically calculates these factors for each component. For more
information, see SIFs & Tees (on page 131).
Bends, rigids, and expansion joints are mutually exclusive. For more information, see
Rigid (on page 126) and Expansion Joints (on page 126).

Bends
Indicates that the element is entering a bend. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Bend check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can place Intermediate node points at specified angles along the bend, or at the bend
mid-point (M).

CAESAR II User's Guide

121

Piping Input Reference

Radius
Displays the bend radius. CAESAR II assumes a long radius by default. You can override
this value. Alternatively, select a value from the list.

Long - Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal
diameter.

Short - Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe
diameter.

3D - Indicates a 3D bend. The radius is equal to 3 times the nominal diameter.

5D - Indicates a 5D bend. The radius is equal to 5 times the nominal diameter.

Type
Specifies the bend type. For most codes, this refers to the number of attached flanges and
can be selected from the list. If there are no flanges on the bend, leave Type blank. A bend
should be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within two diameters of the
bend that significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize.
When using the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe,
this entry refers to the material laminate type and may be 1, 2, or 3. These laminate types
are

All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.

Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and
external surface tissue reinforced layer.

Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and
external surface tissue reinforced layer.

The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors
for the BS 7159 and UKOOA Codes only.
For ISO 14692, only type 3 filament-wound laminate is considered.

Angle
Displays the angle to a point on the bend curvature. You can place additional nodes at any
point on the bend curvature provided the added nodes are not within five degrees of each
other. You can change the 5 node-spacing limit by using the configuration. For more
information, see Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend (on page 68).
The element To node is always physically located at the far end of the bend. By
default, CAESAR II places a node at the midpoint of the bend (designated by the letter M in
this box) as well as at the zero degree position (start) of the bend, if possible.

CAESAR II User's Guide

122

Piping Input Reference

Node
Displays the node number associated with the extra point on the bend. CAESAR II places
unique node numbers in these boxes whenever you initiate a bend. New, unique node
numbers must be assigned to the points whenever you add points on the bend curvature. If
numbering by fives and the To node number for the bend element is 35, a logical choice for
the node number for an added node at 30 degrees on the bend would be 34. You can treat
the added nodes on the bend like any other nodes in the piping system. Nodes on the bend
curvature may be restrained, displaced, or placed at the intersection of more than two pipes.
Nodes on a bend curvature are most commonly used as an intersection for a dummy leg or
for the location of a restraint. All nodes defined in this manner are plotted at the tangent
intersection point for the bend.

Miter Points
Displays the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. When you type a number, CAESAR
II checks if the mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If the bend is determined to
be widely spaced, and the number of miter cuts is greater than one, the bend should be
broken down into n single cut widely spaced miters, where n is the total number of cuts in
the bend. The number of cuts and the radius of the bend are all that is required to calculate
the SIFs and flexibilities for the bend as defined in the B31 codes. The bend radius and the
bend miter spacing are related by the following equations:

Closely Spaced Miters

R = S / (2 tan )
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts

Widely Spaced Miters

R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0

r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0
= Bend Angle / 2.0

Fitting Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the thickness of the
matching pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall thickness, then the
inside diameter of the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the matching pipe.
CAESAR II calculates section modulus for stress computations based on the properties of
the matching pipe as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn,
and once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for
the flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius

CAESAR II User's Guide

123

Piping Input Reference

r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of
the matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT
value). More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
Code

For Tn:

For Mean Radius Calculation:

B31.1

Fitting

B31.3

Fitting

Matching Pipe

B31.4

Fitting

Matching Pipe

B31.5

Fitting

Matching Pipe

B31.8

Fitting

Matching Pipe

B31.8 Ch VIII

Fitting

Matching Pipe

SECT III NC

Fitting

Matching Pipe

SECT III ND

Fitting

Matching Pipe

Z662

Matching Pipe

NAVY 505

Fitting

B31.1 (1967)

Fitting

SWEDISH

Fitting

Matching Pipe

BS 806

N/A

STOOMWEZEN

N/A

RCC-M C/D

Matching
Pipe

Matching Pipe

CODETI

Fitting

NORWEGIAN

Fitting

FDBR

Fitting

BS 7159

Fitting

CAESAR II User's Guide

124

Piping Input Reference

UKOOA

Fitting

IGE/TD/12

Fitting

EN-13480

Fitting

Matching Pipe

GPTC/Z380

Fitting

Matching Pipe

K-Factor
Specifies the bend flexibility factor. CAESAR II calculates the factor according to the current
piping code. You can type a value to override this calculation.

Seam-Welded
Indicates that the bend is seam welded.

B31.3

127

SIFs & Tees

Indicates that you are supplying SIF and tee data. Select or clear by double-clicking the SIFs &
Tees check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for stress intensification factors (SIFs), or fitting
types, for up to two nodes per element. If you select components from the list, CAESAR II
automatically calculates the SIF values according to the applicable code unless you override this
behavior. Certain fittings and certain codes require additional data. Boxes display as appropriate
for the selected fitting.

There are two basic component types:

Three element intersection components

Two element joint components

CAESAR II User's Guide

131

Piping Input Reference

A fully defined intersection model requires that three pipes frame into the intersection node and
that two of them are co-linear. Partial intersection assumptions are made for junctions where
you have coded one or two pipes into the intersection node, but these models are not
recommended. Two element joint components can be formed equally well with one or two
elements framing into the node.
You only need to type the intersection or joint type and properties on one of the elements going
to the junction. CAESAR II duplicates the intersection characteristics for all other pipes framing
into the intersection.
Fully review the warning messages coming from CAESAR II during error checking.
These messages detail any assumptions made during the assembly and calculation of the
intersection SIFs.
The available intersections and joint types, along with the other parameters that can affect the
stress intensification factors for the respective component, are shown in the table that follows.

Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations (Except for ISO 14692)*
1

REINFORCED FABRICATED TEE

FTG RO

CROTCH

UNREINFORCED FABRICATED
TEE

FTG RO

CROTCH

WELDING TEE

FTG RO

CROTCH

SWEEPOLET

CROTCH

WELDOLET

CROTCH

EXTRUDED WELDING TEE

GIRTH BUTT WELD

WELD D OR
ID

SOCKET WELD (NO UNDERCUT)

FILLET

SOCKET WELD (AS WELDED)

FILLET

TAPERED TRANSITION

WELD D

THREADED JOINT

DOUBLE WELDED SLIP-ON

LAP JOINT FLANGE (B16.9)

BONNEY FORGE SWEEPOLET

BONNEY FORGE LATROLET

CAESAR II User's Guide

PAD THK

FTG RO

CROTCH

WELD ID

132

Piping Input Reference

BONNEY FORGE INSERT

WELDOLET

FULL ENCIRCLEMENT TEE

FTG RO

WELD ID

*This list does not include input items effecting SIF calculations for ISO 14692. For more
information on ISO 14692, see Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations For ISO 14692
(on page 140).

Node
Specifies the node number where the stress intensification exists. CAESAR II displays the
To node of the current element by default. You can type any node in the system, but it is
most often at a pipe intersection or joint.
If the node is at an intersection, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for all pipes going to the
intersection if the intersection Type is specified. You only need to type the intersection type
once. CAESAR II finds all other pipes framing into the intersection and applies the
appropriate SIFs.
If the node is at a two-pipe joint, such as a butt weld, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for the two
pipes going to the joint node if the joint Type is specified. You only need to specify the joint
type once. CAESAR II finds the other pipe completing the joint and applies the appropriate
SIFs.
If the node is not at an intersection or a joint then, leave the Type box blank and type user
defined SIFs in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes. Entries in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes only
apply to the element on which they are defined.
User defined stress intensification factors must be greater than or equal to one.
CAESAR II calculates and displays code-defined SIFs in the Intersection SIF scratchpad.
Access this scratchpad from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment
> Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or
Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input
Tools toolbar. You can modify parameters used in the scratchpad so that you can observe
the effects of different geometries and thicknesses. Most changes made in the scratchpad
can be automatically transferred back into the model.
If the node is on any part of the bend curvature then the following applies:

You cannot override code calculated SIFs for bends by default. A configuration
option exists to override this default. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at
Bend (on page 97). If you set Allow User's SIF at Bend to True, then you can
specify SIFs for bend To nodes. The SIFs specified in this way apply for the entire
bend curvature.

CAESAR II applies user-defined SIFs to straight pipe going to points on a bend

curvature regardless of any parameter in the setup file. This option is commonly
used to intensify injector tie-ins at bends, or dummy legs, or other bend
attachment-type of supports.

CAESAR II User's Guide

133

Piping Input Reference

Type
Specifies the type of tee or joint.

For non-FRP piping codes, there are six types of tees and ten types of joints. These
elements correspond to 1 to 6 and 7 to 16 in the Input Items Optionally Effecting SIF
Calculations (see "Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations (Except for ISO
14692)*" on page 132) table.

For BS 7159 and UKOOA, there are two types of tees: Moulded and Fabricated.
Moulded tee corresponds to either the Welding (3) or Extruded (6) welding tee
Type. Fabricated tee corresponds to a tee Type of Reinforced (1).

WELD (D)
Specifies the average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter of the
pipe. This value is used for Butt Welds and Tapered transitions. This is the average; not the
maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are
satisfied for your particular code.
FILLET
Specifies the fillet leg length. This option is used only in conjunction with a socket weld
component. This value is the length of the shorter leg for an unequal leg fillet weld. If a fillet
leg is given, both socket weld types result in the same SIF. See appendix D of the B31
piping codes for further clarification.

Weld ID
Specifies the weld identifier value. Choose from the following options:

0 or BLANK - As Welded

1 - Finished/Ground Flush

This box is only applicable for:

IGE/TD/12

Bonney Forge Sweepolets

Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets

Butt Welds in the Swedish Piping Codes or the IGE/TD/12 code

B1; Wc
Specifies values that depend upon the code that you are using.
ASME Class 2 and ASME Class 3
Defines the primary stress index used for the given node on the current element.
Unless you otherwise over ride this value, the following values are applied for ASME Class 2
and Class 3 piping:
Straight Pipe:

B1 = 0.5 B2 = 1.0

Curved Pipe:

B1 = -0.1 + 0.4h; but not <0 or >0.5

B2 = 1.30/h**2/3 but not <1.0; h = tR/ rm**2

Intersections:

CAESAR II User's Guide

B1 = 0.5

138

Piping Input Reference

Butt Welded Tees:

B2b = 0.4(R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0

B2r = 0.5(R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0

Branch Connections:

(r < 0.5R)
B2b = 0.50 C2b but not < 1.0
B2r = 0.75 C2r but not < 1.0
C2b = 3(R/T)**2/3 (r/R)**1/2 (t/T)(r/FTG ro) but not < 1.5
C2r = 1.15(r/t)**1/4 but not < 1.5

B31.1 / B31.3
Defines the weld strength reduction factor (W c) used to reduce the allowable stress for the
sustained load case.
BS-7159 and UKOOA
Defines the pressure stress multiplier (m) if it is different than the code requirements. For
straight pipe, m = 1.0; for bends and tees, m is defined in Figures 7.1 and 7.12 of the BS
7159 Code.
IGE/TD/12
Override the cyclic pressure stress intensification factor Ip(Cyc) if it is different than the code
calculations (calculated according to Table 9, Figure 5, and Figure 7 of the code).

B2
Specifies the primary stress index for the given node on the current element. This entry is
only applicable for ASME Class 2 and 3 piping.
If omitted, B1 and B2 are defaulted as follows:
Straight Pipe:

B1=0.5 B2=1.0

Curved Pipe:

B1=-0.1+0.4h; but not <0 or >0.5

B2=1.30/h2/3; but not <1.0; h=tR/rm 2

Intersections:

B1=0.5

Butt-Welded Tees:

B2b=0.4(R/T)2/3 but not <1.0

B2r=0.5(R/T)2/3 but not <1.0

Branch Connections:

(r<0.5R)
B2b=0.50 C2b but not <1.0
B2r=0.75 C2r but not <1.0
C2b=3(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (t/T)(r/FTG ro) but not <1.5
C2r=1.15(r/t)1/4 but not <1.5

You can use the SIF(IN) and SIF(OUT) boxes to override the CAESAR II calculated values

CAESAR II User's Guide

139

Piping Input Reference

for any intersection. Override values only apply for the single element on which they are
defined. SIFs can be calculated for partial intersections and dummy legs.
When IGE/TD/12 is active, the SIF/TEE dialog box changes its appearance to
accommodate specialized SIF parameters. Refer to the supplementary IGE/TD/12
documentation for further information.

Code Options (B31.1 & B31.8)

B31.1
Indicates that the tee meets the dimensional criteria of Figure D1 as well as Notes 10a, 10c,
10d, 10e, and 10f. This allows the software to use the branch equation when determining
the SIF value for the tee. Note that this option relies on the setting of the Configuration
Options Reduced Intersection and No RFT / WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs.
B31.8
Indicates that the software should use B31.8 Notes 6, 9, or 10, as applicable, when
determining the SIF value for the tee.
ASME NC and ND
Indicates that the tee meets the dimensional criteria of Figure 3673.2(b)-2 as well as Notes
10 and 11. This allows the software to use the branch equation when determining the SIF
value for the tee. Note that this option relies on the setting of the Configuration Options
Reduced Intersection and No RFT / WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs.
ASME NC/ND 3673.2(b)-1 Note 3
Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the software to compute the
Y value based on the highest temperature value specified.

Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations For ISO 14692

When you select SIF & Tees on the Classic Piping Input dialog box, the Auxiliary panel for
SIFs/Tees becomes active. The Type box indicates what type of tee or joint to use for the piping
code specified. The software uses this input in the same way for most piping codes. However,
there are only a few tee and joint types for ISO 14692.
1

Tee

Joint

Qualified Tee

Specifying a tee, a qualified tee, or a joint in the Type box allows CAESAR II to perform the
correct allowable stress calculations.

Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO 14692 code for
non-qualified tees.

Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the calculations specified in the code for joints and
fittings.

CAESAR II User's Guide

140

Piping Input Reference

Select 3 - Qualified Tee for the software to use the code-specified calculation for qualified
service stress for tees (including the pressure stress multiplier, m pst).

User-Defined SIFs Anywhere in the Piping System

SIFs for non-intersection points are normally taken to be 1.0 unless the piping element is a
bend. If the SIF should be greater than (1.0), then you can type the non-unity SIF in the
Intersection Auxiliary box without specifying the intersection type. A user-defined SIF only
acts at the node on the current element.

Stress Intensification Factors and Stress Indices Details

CAESAR II calculates SIFs automatically for bends and defined intersections as specified by
the applicable piping code. You can type a user-defined SIF for any point in the piping
system by activating the SIFs & Tees check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type the node number where the stress is to be intensified in the first available Node box.
Type the in-plane and out-plane stress intensification factors in the In-Plane SIF (ii) and the
Out-Plane SIF (io) boxes. Specify any axial and torsion index values on the elements on
the Axial Index (Ia) and Torsion Index (It) boxes.
You cannot specify SIFs for bend elements unless the Allow User's SIF at Bend
option is set to True in the configuration file. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at
Bend (on page 97). Code defined SIFs always apply.
CAESAR II does not allow user-defined stress intensification factors to be less than 1.0.
The node to be intensified must be the To or the From node on the current element.
Stresses are only intensified at the element end going to the specified node. For example, if
two pipes frame into node 10, one going from 5 to 10, and the other from 10 to 15 and a
stress intensification factor of 2.0 for node 10 is defined on the element from 5 to 10, then
the 10 end of the element from 5 to 10 has a stress intensification of 2.0 and the 10 end of
the element from 10 to 15 has a stress intensification of 1.0.
You can use user-defined stress intensification factors to override code calculated values for
nodes at intersections. For example, let node 40 be an intersection defined by an
unreinforced fabricated tee. The header pipes framing into the intersection go from 35 to 40
and from 40 to 45. The branch pipe framing into the intersection goes from 175 to 40. The
code-calculated values for the stress intensification factors in the header pipes are:
SIF (ii) = 4.50
SIF (io) = 3.75
and in the branch pipe are
SIF (ii) = 6.70
SIF (io) = 5.58
Also assume that finite element analysis of the intersection showed the header stress
intensification factors to be 2.3 and 1.87 respectively and the branch stress intensification
factors to be equal to the code recommended value, which is 6.70 and 5.58. To properly
override the code-calculated stress intensification factors for the header pipes, two pipe
elements must be modified:

CAESAR II User's Guide

141

Piping Input Reference

35 to 40

Node 40
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.3
SIF (io): 1.87

40 to 15

Node 40
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.3
SIF (io): 1.87

The stress intensification for the branch pipes can be calculated according to the code, so
part of the branch pipe data might appear:
175 to 40

NODE 40
Type: 2 - Unreinforced
SIF (ii):
SIF (io):

If either of the SIF boxes for the header elements going to 40 were left blank, the
code-calculated value would be used in its place. This is only true where code-calculated
values exist along with user-specified values.
If the element from 110 to 115 needs the stress intensification factors for each of its ends is
2.0, then a part of that element data might appear:
110 to 115

IGE\TD\12 Requirements
IGE\TD\12 requires different information than the other codes used in CAESAR II. When
IGE\TD\12 is active, the SIFs/Tees Auxiliary field changes to accommodate specialized SIF
parameters. For more information regarding the specialized parameters refer to the text and
figures at the end of this section.

Full Encirclement Tee

Long Weldneck Flange

CAESAR II User's Guide

153

Piping Input Reference

Sweepolet

Fabricated Tee

Fabricated Tee with Pad

CAESAR II User's Guide

154

Piping Input Reference

Weld ID
Specifies the weld identifier value. Choose from the following options:

0 or BLANK - As Welded

1 - Finished/Ground Flush

This box is only applicable for:

IGE/TD/12

Bonney Forge Sweepolets

Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets

Butt Welds in the Swedish Piping Codes or the IGE/TD/12 code

Stress Concentration Factors

Overrides the stress concentration factors calculated according to the IGE/TD/12 Code
equations. Any values typed here apply only to the element on which they have been
specified except when entered on a bend node. In that case, they apply throughout the
bend.
For branches of tees, any bending SCFs specified here must include the "w" term.

Fatigue Class
Overrides the fatigue class calculated according to the IGE/TD/12 Code equations. Any
values selected here apply only to the element on which they have been specified except
when entered on a bend node. In that case, they apply throughout the bend.

Boundary Conditions
The check boxes in this block open the auxiliary dialog box tabs to collect information on items
which restrain (or impose movement on) the pipe. These items include restraints, hangers,
flexible nozzles or displacements. Though not required, it is recommended that you define such
information on the dialog box which has that point as the From node or To node. This is of
benefit if the data must be located for modification. The auxiliary dialog box tabs allow you to
specify up to four restraints (devices which in some way modify the free motion of the system),
one hanger, one nozzle, or two sets of nodal displacements per element. If needed, you can
define additional conditions for any node on other elements.

CAESAR II User's Guide

155

Piping Input Reference

Restraints
Indicates that you are supplying restraint data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Restraints check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls data for up to four restraints for each element. Node
number and restraint types are required. All other information is optional. If you omit the
stiffness, entry defaults to rigid.
You can specify skewed restraints by typing direction cosines with the type, such as X
(1,0,1) for a restraint running at 45 in the X-Z plane.

You can specify as many as four restraints for an element. If you need to specify more than four
restraints on one element, you can place the additional restraints on any other element.
Do not use restraints in the following three situations:
1. Imposed Displacements - Specify displacements for the point using the Displacement
Auxiliary box.
2. Flexible Nozzles - Use the Nozzles Flex check box to open the Nozzles Auxiliary Data
box to input the vessel or tank characteristics required by WRC 297, PD 5500, or API 650 to

CAESAR II User's Guide

156

Piping Input Reference

calculate local nozzle flexibilities. After these flexibilities have been calculated, CAESAR II
automatically inserts the necessary restraints and flexibilities into the piping model.
3. Hangers program designed or pre-defined spring hangers - Use the Hangers check
box to open the Hanger Auxiliary Data box.

Node
Specifies the node number where the restraint is to act. The node number does not have to
be on the current element.

CNode
Specifies the connecting node. Restraints with connecting nodes can be used to tie one
node in the piping system to any other node in the system. If left blank then the restraint
node is tied by the restraint stiffness to a fixed point in space. If the connecting node is
specified then the restraint node is tied by the restraint stiffness to the connecting node.
In all cases, CNodes associate nodal degrees of freedom. Additionally, CNodes can be
used to geometrically connect different parts of a model graphically. This option is controlled
by the configuration option Connect Geometry through CNodes (on page 69).

Type
Specifies the restraint type. You can select a restraint from the list in the Restraint
Auxiliary box. For more information, see Section 3 of the CAESAR II Applications Guide.
Restraint Type

Abbreviation

Anchor

ANC

Translational Double Acting

X, Y, or Z

Rotational Double Acting

RX, RY, or RZ

Guide, Double Acting

GUIDE

Double Acting Limit Stop

LIM

Translational Double Acting Snubber

XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB

Translational Directional

+X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -Z

Rotational Directional

+RX, -RX, +RY, etc.

Directional Limit Stop

+LIM, -LIM

CAESAR II User's Guide

157

Piping Input Reference

Large Rotation Rod

XROD, YROD, ZROD

Translational Double Acting Bilinear

X2, Y2, Z2

Rotational Double Acting Bilinear

RX2, RY2, RZ2

Translational Directional Bilinear

-X2, +X2, -Y2, etc.

Rotational Directional Bilinear

+RX2, -RX2, +RY2, etc.

Bottom Out Spring

XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR

Directional Snubber

+XSNB, -XSNB, +YSNB, etc.

Anchor
Specifies an anchor restraint. This type of restraint is defined for all degrees of freedom at
the node.

X, Y, or Z
Specifies translational restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it
defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom.
For example, a +Y restraint is a restraint against movement in the minus -Y direction. It is
free to move in the plus Y direction.

X (cosx, cosy, cosz) or X (vecx, vecy, vecz)

Specifies translational skewed restraints. These values can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If
you type a direction vector such as vecx, vecy, or vecz, CAESAR II converts the direction
vector into the corresponding cosines.

RX, RY, or RZ
Specifies rotational restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it
defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom.

CAESAR II User's Guide

158

Piping Input Reference

Guide
Specifies a transverse restraint that can be skewed.

LIM
Specifies limit stops. These are axial restraints that can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you
type a sign, it defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the element
longitudinal axis.

XROD, YROD, ZROD

Specifies translational, large rotation, rod, or hanger-type restraints. These values can be
preceded by a (+) or (-) sign to indicate the orientation of the pivot point about which the rod
swings. A (+) is assumed. In the case of a YROD, this implies that the pivot point is above
the pipe. The rod or hanger length is also required.

XROD (COSX, COSY, COSZ) or XROD (VECX, VECY, VECZ)

Specifies translational skewed, large rotation rod, or hanger type restraints.

X2, Y2, Z2
Specifies bilinear restraints. These are restraints that have two different stiffnesses
associated with them. The stiffness is dependent upon the loading on the restraint. Bilinear
restraints can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).

RX (cosx, cosy, cosz) or RX (vecx, vecy, vecz)

Specifies rotational skewed restraints.

XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR

Specifies spring supports. These values can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
A bottom out spring requires additional input. The additional input includes the spring rate,
allowed travel, and initial load. If the allowed travel in the direction of support is exceeded,
the spring bottoms-out.

CAESAR II User's Guide

159

Piping Input Reference

XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB
Specifies snubbers, which are restraints that engage only during quick movements such as
those induced by a shock. They only act on the piping system in the occasional load case.
Snubbers can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
Because CAESAR II cannot perform load stepping, static analysis with snubbers requires a
preliminary manual analysis to determine thermal movements. Here is the procedure.
1. Analyze a hot operating case without your occasional loads.
2. Take the displacements from this analysis at the snubbers and put them back into the
input.
3. At the location where the snubbers are defined, define a CNODE and put these
displacements on the CNODE.
4. For your real analysis, apply these displacements to all load cases. Because they are
on the far side of the snubber, they won't affect anything unless the load case is called
OCC, which activates the snubber stiffness.
So:

When you run your standard OPE case (W+T1+P1+D1), the snubber node
displaces as before. There are no restraints because the load case is OPE, not
OCC.

When you run the operating + occasional case (W+T1+P1+D1+WIND1), the

snubber node displaces along with its CNODE. There is a difference in these two
displacements due to the WIND1 load and the snubber stiffness, because the case
is now set as OCC.

Any changes you type in the Hangers auxiliary dialog box override the global values you
specify in the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.

CAESAR II User's Guide

163

Piping Input Reference

Node
Specifies the node number to which the hanger is connected.

CNode
Specifies the connecting node number. This value is used only when the other end of the
hanger is to be connected to another point in the system, such as another pipe node.

Design Data
There are two sections on the Hanger auxiliary dialog box.
Design Data - Specifies the hanger data if you need CAESAR II to design the hanger for
you.
Predefined Hanger Data - Specifies the hanger data if you know the hanger information.

Hanger Table
Specifies the active hanger table.
The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
1. Anvil

2. Bergen Power

3. Power Piping

4. NPS Industries

5. Lisega

6. Fronek

7. Piping Technology

8. Capitol

9. Piping Services

10. Basic Engineers

11. Inoflex

12. E. Myatt & Co.

13. Sinopec

14. BHEL

15. CASTIM 2000 (formerly Flexider)

16. Carpenter & Paterson

17. Pipe Supports Ltd.

18. Witzenmann

19. Sarathi

20. Myricks

21. China Power

22. Pipe Supports USA

23. Quality Pipe Supports

24. PiHASA

25. Binder

26. Gradior

CAESAR II User's Guide

164

Piping Input Reference

27. NHK

28. PSSI GmbH

29. Seonghwa

30. Mitsubishi

31. Yamashita

32. Sanwa Tekki

33. Techno Industry

34. Hesterberg

35. Spring Supports Mfg. Co.

36. Senior

37. Unison

38. Wookwang

Additional design options are invoked if you use the following check boxes.

Extended Range

Cold Load

Hot load centered (if possible)

You can globally set the hanger data for a model from the Hanger Design Control Data
dialog box (see "Hanger Design Control Data" on page 262), accessed by clicking Hanger
design criteria
in the piping input. Specify the default hanger table that appears in this
dialog by specifying the Default Spring Hanger Table configuration setting in
Configuration Editor > Database Definitions. For examples of incorporating spring
hanger designs into your models, see the Hangers section in the CAESAR II Application
Guide.
Extended Load Range Springs - CAESAR II includes the maximum load range to permit
the selection of less expensive variable support hangers in place of constant effort supports
when the spring loads are just outside the manufacturers recommended range. Extended
load ranges are the most extreme ranges on the spring load table. Some manufacturers
build double-spring supports to accommodate this range. Others adjust the top or bottom
travel limits to accommodate either end of the extended table. Make sure that the
manufacturer can supply the spring before you use the maximum ranges. Use of the
extended range often eliminates the need to go to a constant effort support.
Lisega springs do not support an extended range. If you select Extended Range for
a hanger with Lisega springs, CAESAR II returns the standard Lisega spring table and
ranges.

Cold Load Spring Hanger Design - Cold load spring hanger design is a method of
designing the springs in which the hot (or operating) load is supported in the cold (or
installed) position of the piping. This method of spring design offers several
advantages over the more usual hot load design:

Hanger stops are easier to remove.

There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold
or when the stops are removed.

Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.

Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.

Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations.

A hot vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle

CAESAR II User's Guide

165

Piping Input Reference

connection is a typical configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be
designed is at the elbow adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because
the difference between the hot and cold loads counters the moment produced by
the vertical thermal expansion from the anchor.
The disadvantages to cold load design are:

In some systems, the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value

proportional to the spring rate times the travel in the hot condition.

168

Piping Input Reference

No. Hangers at Location
Specifies the number of hangers at a location.
Type a positive number to indicate the exact number of hangers at that location.
Leave the box blank to indicate that CAESAR II can place as many hangers as necessary to
make the installation work.
Type a negative number to indicate the maximum number of hangers that you accept. For
example, if you want to use as few springs as possible, yet are willing to use as many as 5
springs if necessary, type -5 in the No. of Hangers at Location box.

Allow Short Range Springs

Indicates that hanger design allows short range springs.
CAESAR II gives you the option of excluding short range springs from consideration from
the selection algorithms. Short range springs are considered specialty items in some
instances and are not used unless their shorter length is required for clearance reasons.
Clear this check box in this case.
If this option is not selected, CAESAR II selects a mid-range spring over a short-range
spring, assuming that they are more standard, readily available, and in general cheaper than
their short-range counterparts.
If the default should be that short range springs are used wherever possible, then check the
box on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.

Operating Load (Total at Loc.)

Overrides the operating load that CAESAR II is calculating.
This value is normally specified when you think that loads on a piece of equipment are
reduced if a hanger in the vicinity of the equipment is artificially caused to carry a
proportionately larger part of the total load. This operating load is the hot load that the
hanger is designed to support after it undergoes any travel due to the thermal expansion of
the piping. CAESAR II's calculated hanger operating loads may be read from the hanger
table printed in the output processor. The column is titled HOT LOAD. The value also
appears in this table. Type the total operating load that you want to use at the location. For
example, if there are two hangers specified at the location and each should carry 500 lb.,
then the operating load specified should be 1,000 lb.

CAESAR II User's Guide

169

Piping Input Reference

Hanger Hardware Weight
Specifies any additional weight that must be supported by the hanger that exists between
the hanger and the pipe. This weight could affect the hanger design if the magnitude of this
weight is great enough.

Multiple Load Case Design Option

Specifies the load case for hanger design. You can base the spring selection algorithm on
one or more operating conditions. A two-pump installation where only one pump operates at
a time is a good application for multiple load case hanger design.
There are currently thirteen different multiple load case design algorithms available:

Design spring per operating case #1.

Design spring per operating case #2.

Design spring per operating case #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, and #9.

Design spring for maximum operating load.

Design spring for maximum travel.

Design spring for average load and average travel.

Design spring for maximum load and maximum travel.

You can specify the Multiple Load Case Design option at the global level on the Hanger
Design Control Data dialog box. The globally specified option applies for all hanger design
locations unless overridden on a specific hanger design dialog box.
Type the number of operating thermal cases to consider when sizing springs for this system
on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box. This value defaults to 1.0. Also type the
Multiple Load Case Design option to be the default value unless the design option is to be
specified individually for each hanger to be designed in the system.

CAESAR II User's Guide

170

Piping Input Reference

Example Problem: Multiple Load - Case Spring - Hanger Design
This example illustrates the different hanger designs that can result from the use of different
multiple load case design options.

CAESAR II User's Guide

171

Piping Input Reference

Multiple Load Case Design Option for Hanger Design

Hanger A
Multiple Load Case
Design Option

Design Hanger Travel

Design Hanger Load

0.752 in

730.0 lb

0.029 in

560.0 lb

0.752 in

730.0 lb

0.752 in

730.0 lb

0.3905 in

645.0 lb

0.752 in

730.0 lb

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

CAESAR II User's Guide

172

Piping Input Reference

Hanger B
Multiple Load Case
Design Option

Design Hanger Travel

Design Hanger Load

0.032 in

592.0 lb

0.733 in

587.0 lb

0.032 in

592.0 lb

0.733 in

587.0 lb

0.3825 in

589.5 lb

0.733 in

592.0 lb

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Free Restraint at Node

Specifies the node number for the equipment where the restraint is freed. You can also
specify the corresponding free code to tell CAESAR II which of the restraint or anchor
directions to free. For nozzles that are further removed from the hanger usually only the Y
direction should be freed. Anchors or restraints simulating equipment connections that are in
the immediate vicinity of the hanger are usually freed during the hanger design restrained
weight run so that loads normally going to the equipment nozzle are carried by the hanger.
Hangers are commonly used around equipment nozzles to support the weight of the pipe as
it thermally expands away from the nozzle. The hanger can usually be designed to take
almost the full weight of the pipe between the anchor and the hanger if the anchor is freed
when making the restrained weight calculation. The pipe going to the anchor is treated just
like a free end, but only for the hanger weight calculation only.
The Free Restraint at Node box works in conjunction with the Free Code box. If the Free
Code is not specified for an anchor, then the software assumes that the anchor is
completely free for the restrained weight run.
The restrained Weight hanger design pass is the first analysis step in the hanger design. It

CAESAR II User's Guide

173

Piping Input Reference

is run automatically by CAESAR II. The following steps comprise the restrained weight run:
1. Putting rigid Y restraints at each hanger location.
2. Removing anchors and restraints that are to be freed.
3. Running the weight analysis to find the hot hanger loads.
Nonlinear restraints are not freed during hanger design.

Free Code
Specifies the directions in which the anchor or restraint is released. When an anchor or
restraint should be released for the restrained weight run, type the node number for that
anchor in the Free Restraint at Node box and specify the free code describing the
directions to be released in the Free Code box on the same hanger dialog box. The
available free codes are as follows:

Free the anchor or restraint in the Y direction only.

Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and X directions only.

Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and Z directions only.

Free all translational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint. (X,Y, and Z)

Free all translational and rotational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint.
(X, Y, Z, RX, RY, and RZ)

The last option usually results in the highest adjacent hanger loads, but you should only use
that option when the horizontal distance between the hanger and the anchor is within about
4 pipe diameters.

Predefined Hanger Data

Specifies predefined hanger data. When you use the Predefined Hanger Data section on
the hanger dialog box and there is more than one hanger at the location, use the No. of
Hangers at Location box in the Design Data section to specify the number of hangers.
Then, type the spring rate and pre-load applicable to a single hanger. There is no reason to
try to compute the equivalent spring rates or theoretical loads.
Pre-defined hanger data can be specified in one of two ways:

Specify all information for the hanger.

Specify only the spring rate for the hanger.

If you specify all of the information, and the restraint configuration for the node is completely
defined, then it is not included in the hanger design algorithm.
For a position to be completely pre-defined, one of the following conditions must apply:

Spring rate and theoretical cold load

Constant effort support load

CAESAR II User's Guide

174

Piping Input Reference

Spring Rate
Specifies the spring rate.

Theoretical Cold (Installation) Load

Specifies the cold load for the hanger. If you type both the spring rate and the cold load, the
hanger location is completely predefined and CAESAR II does not perform analysis level
design for the hanger.

Resetting Loads on Existing Spring Hangers

If only the spring rate is given, CAESAR II assumes that you want to rerate the spring at the
given location. The software reads the old spring rate from the existing hanger and inputs it
directly to CAESAR II. Leave the Theoretical Cold Load box blank for the rerate. If more
than a single spring exists at the location, then type the total number of springs in the No. of
Hangers at Location box in the Design Data section. CAESAR II assumes that the load is
distributed evenly among multiple springs at the same point.
CAESAR II goes through its normal hanger design procedure to calculate the load and
travel for all proposed hanger locations including the location with springs to be reset. The
stiffness of the reset springs is not used for this redesign. After CAESAR II sizes the springs,
it makes a comparison with the user-defined spring rates. If the selected spring rate is within
5% of your existing spring rate, CAESAR II lists the spring's figure number and size in the
output report. If the selected spring rate is more than 5% of your value, no manufacturer's
data is listed. In either case, CAESAR II uses the spring rate that you typed in all following
analyses. It is up to you to confirm that the new hot and cold loads are within the existing
spring's working range.
The primary use of the rerate capability is to find new installed loads for old springs. Springs
might be rerated after the shutdown of a unit that has been operating continuously for a long
period, or after mechanical or process changes are made to a piping system.

Constant Effort Support Load

Specifies the support load for the constant effort hanger.

Nozzles
Indicates that you are supplying nozzle data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Nozzle Flex on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for flexible nozzle connections. When you type
values in this dialog box tab, CAESAR II automatically calculates the flexibilities and adds them
to the active element. CAESAR II calculates nozzle loads according to WRC 297, API 650 or BS
5500 criteria.

CAESAR II User's Guide

175

Piping Input Reference

WRC 297
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to WRC 297.

When you type a nozzle node number, CAESAR II scans the current input data for the node and
fills the corresponding diameter and wall thickness in the Nozzle Outer Diameter and Nozzle
Wall Thickness boxes.
Current nozzle flexibility calculations are in accordance with the Welding Research Council
Bulletin No. 297, issued August 1984 for cylinder-to-cylinder intersections.
A valid nozzle node has the following properties:

Only a single element connects to the nozzle node.

The nozzle node is not restrained and does not have displacements specified for any of its
degrees of freedom.

Computed nozzle flexibilities are automatically included in the piping system analysis through
software-generated restraints. This generation is completely automatic. Six restraints are
established for each flexible nozzle input.

CAESAR II User's Guide

176

Piping Input Reference

If you define a vessel node number, then the vessel node acts like a connecting node for each
of the six restraints. Vessel nodes are subject to the same restrictions shown above for nozzle
nodes.
You should not put a restrainer on an element between the nozzle node and any
specified vessel node. CAESAR II creates the required connectivity from the nozzle flexibility
data and any user-generated stiffnesses between these two points erroneously add to the
nozzle stiffnesses.
After the error checking, CAESAR II displays all useful WRC curve data on the Errors and
Warnings dialog box. You can use these values to define the illustrated nozzles in the WRC
297 bulletin. It is sometimes helpful to know just how close a particular nozzle is to one of the
several asymptotic limits, or to a curve boundary.

You can see the WRC 297 computed data only during the error checking process.

CAESAR II User's Guide

177

Piping Input Reference

Nozzle Node
Specifies the node number located at the nozzle intersection with the vessel shell. There
should only be a single piping element connected to this node. There should be no restraints
acting on the node. The nozzle element must be perpendicular to the vessel shell.
You can model hillside nozzles and latrolets. To do this, the first (and possibly very short)
nozzle element that comes from the vessel must be perpendicular to the vessel to keep the
local stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go off on the
true centerline of the nozzle.

Vessel Node (Optional)

Specifies the node number on the vessel surface at the point where the nozzle intersects
the vessel shell. This is optional. If you do not specify this value, then the nozzle node is
connected by the stiffnesses to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you specify this value, then
the nozzle node is connected by the stiffnesses to the vessel node. Specify the vessel
nodes when you want to model through the vessel from the nozzle connection to the skirt or
foundation.

Nozzle Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the nozzle. CAESAR II fills this field automatically using
the corresponding pipe diameter. You can override this value because it does not have to be
equal to the diameter of the pipe used to model the nozzle.

Nozzle Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the nozzle. CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the
corresponding pipe wall thickness. You can override this value because it does not have to
be equal to the wall thickness of the pipe element used to model the nozzle.

Vessel Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the vessel.

CAESAR II User's Guide

178

Piping Input Reference

Vessel Wall Thickness
Specifies the wall thickness of the vessel at the point where the nozzle connects to the
vessel. Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.

Vessel Pad Thickness

Specifies the thickness of any reinforcing pad at the nozzle. This thickness is added to the
vessel wall thickness before the software performs nozzle stiffness calculations.

Distance to Stiffener or Head

Specifies the distance along the vessel center-line from the center of the nozzle opening in
the vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel that significantly stiffens the
vessel's cross-section against local deformation normal to the shell surface.

Distance to Opposite Stiffener

Specifies the distance along the vessel center line from the center of the nozzle opening in
the vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel in the opposite direction from
the previous one. This entry is ignored for spherical vessels.

Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX, VY, VZ

Specifies the direction vector or direction cosines which defines the center-line of the vessel.
For example, a vertical vessel in a Y-up coordinate system, these entries would read:

Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX - <blank>

Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VY - 1.0

Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VZ - <blank>

If the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are collinear, CAESAR II flags this as an

error.

Vessel Temperature (Optional)

Specifies the estimated temperature of the vessel or nozzle junction. If you type this value,
you must also type a valid vessel material number in the corresponding field. The software
uses the estimated temperature to calculate the hot modulus-of-elasticity.

CAESAR II User's Guide

179

Piping Input Reference

Vessel Material (Optional)
Specifies the vessel material number. If you type this value, you must pair the vessel
material number with a valid vessel temperature. The allowed vessel material number can
be any valid material number from the material database. This value corresponds to the pipe
materials used in the dialog box. If the vessel temperature and the vessel material number
are left blank or zero, then the software uses an elastic modulus of 29.0E6 psi.

API 650
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to API 650.

CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix P of API 650, "Design of
Carbon Steel Atmospheric Oil Storage Tanks."

CAESAR II User's Guide

180

Piping Input Reference

Tank Node (optional)

Specifies the node number on the tank surface at the point where the nozzle intersects the
tank shell.
This is optional. If you do not specify one, then the nozzle node is connected by the
stiffnesses to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you type this value, then the nozzle node is
connected by the stiffnesses to the tank node.
Specify the tank node when you want to model through the tank from the nozzle connection
to the foundation.

Nozzle Outer Diameter

Nozzle Wall Thickness

Tank Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the storage tank. API 650 Addendum 1 does not
recommend these computations for diameters less than 120 feet.

CAESAR II User's Guide

181

Piping Input Reference

Tank Wall Thickness
Specifies the wall thickness of the storage tank at the point where the nozzle connects to the
tank. Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.

Reinforcing on Shell (1) or Nozzle (2)

Specifies whether the reinforcing is on the shell or on the nozzle. If the reinforcing is on the
shell, then type 1. If it is on the nozzle, type 2.

Nozzle Height
Specifies the height from the centerline of the nozzle to the base of the tank.

Fluid Height
Specifies the liquid level of the fluid in the storage tank. This value must be greater than the
nozzle height.

Fluid SG
Specifies the specific gravity of the stored liquid. This value is unitless.

Tank Coefficient of Thermal Expansion

Specifies the coefficient of thermal expansion of the plate material of the tank. Values are
listed in engineering handbooks or the appropriate section of the API 650, App P. If this
value is left blank, the software assumes a value of zero.
Temperature Change
Specifies the change in temperature from ambient to the maximum that the tank normally
experiences. For example, if the maximum summertime temperature is 107F, then the
temperature change would be 107 70 = 37, where 70 is the default ambient temperature
defined in configuration and environment. You would type 37 in this box. If this value is left
blank, the software assumes a value of zero.

CAESAR II User's Guide

182

Piping Input Reference

Tank Modulus of Elasticity
Specifies the hot modulus-of-elasticity for the tank. If this value is left blank, the software
assumes a value of 0.2950E+08.

Set Displacement Vector

Specifies the displacement vector to assign to the calculated displacements. If you select
one among D1 to D9, the calculated displacements become the boundary conditions of the
current job, and CAESAR II can use them for the stress analysis. If you have already
specified displacements on the Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II uses the
calculated displacements to replace the original displacements. If you select None,
CAESAR II does not use the calculated displacements for the stress analysis.

PD 5500
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to PD 5500.

CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix G of the PD 5500
Specification for Unfired Fusion Welded Pressure Vessels.

CAESAR II User's Guide

183

Piping Input Reference

Vessel Node (Optional)

Vessel Type - Cylinder (0) or Sphere (1)

Indicates whether the vessel is cylindrical or spherical.
Type 0 if the vessel is cylindrical. For cylinders, the distances to stiffeners or heads and the
vessel direction cosines are required.
Type 1 if the vessel is spherical. For spheres, the boxes for the distances to stiffeners or
heads and vessel direction cosines are ignored.

Nozzle Outer Diameter

Vessel Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the vessel.

CAESAR II User's Guide

184

Piping Input Reference

Vessel Wall Thickness
Specifies the wall thickness of the vessel at the point where the nozzle connects to the
vessel. Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.

Vessel Pad Thickness

Specifies the thickness of any reinforcing pad at the nozzle. This thickness is added to the
vessel wall thickness before the software performs nozzle stiffness calculations.

Distance to Stiffener or Head

Distance to Opposite Stiffener

Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX, VY, VZ

Specifies the direction vector or direction cosines which defines the center-line of the vessel.
For example, a vertical vessel in a Y-up coordinate system, these entries would read:

Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX - <blank>

Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VY - 1.0

Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VZ - <blank>

If the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are collinear, CAESAR II flags this as an

error.
Vessel Temperature (Optional)
Specifies the estimated temperature of the vessel or nozzle junction. If you type this value,
you must also type a valid vessel material number in the corresponding field. The software
uses the estimated temperature to calculate the hot modulus-of-elasticity.

CAESAR II User's Guide

185

Piping Input Reference

Displacements
Indicates that you are supplying displacement data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Displacements on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls imposed displacements for up to two nodes for each
element. If a displacement value is entered for any vector, this direction is considered to be fixed
for any other nonspecified vectors.
Leaving a direction blank for all nine vectors models the system as free to move in that
direction. Specify 0.0 to indicate that the system is fully restrained in that direction.

CAESAR II User's Guide

186

Piping Input Reference

Node
Specifies the node number where the displacement is defined. Do not place a restraint at
this node.

Vector 1, Vector 2, ... Vector 9

Specifies the six components of the displacements for a vector. You can type as many as
nine vectors, corresponding to nine operating temperatures. The six components of a vector
are for six degrees of freedom along global X, Y and Z directions. If you leave any field
blank, that degree of freedom is free.

If an imposed displacement is specified for a specific degree-of-freedom, then that

degree-of-freedom is considered restrained for all load cases whether or not they
contain that displacement set.

You can import displacements into the CAESAR II model from a file. For more
information, see Import/Export Displacements from File (on page 364).

Flange Checks
Indicates that you are supplying flange data to evaluate an in-line flange. Select or clear this
option by double-clicking the Flange check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.

You can read the values for the Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G boxes from a file
if you select ASME - 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are
located in the ASME-2003.G text file in the system folder under the application data folder.

Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the flanges in a
model, specify the operating temperature at which the software evaluates the flanges in the
Flange Analysis Temperature box on the Load Cases tab of the Static Analysis - Load
Case Editor.

Flange evaluation can be performed for individual load cases and for ABS and MAX load
combination cases. For more information, see Combination Method (on page 550).

CAESAR II User's Guide

187

Piping Input Reference

From, To, Both
Specifies whether the flange is on the From end, the To end, or both ends of the element.
Specifies whether to evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method
or the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.
Peq
Evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method.
Peq = 16M/()G3 + 4F/()G2 + PD Pressure Rating
Where:
Peq = equivalent pressure (for checking against flange rating)
M = bending moment on flange
G = diameter of effective gasket reaction
F = axial force on flange
PD = design pressure
NC-3658.3
Evaluate the flanges using the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.
S = 36,000 * Mfs / (CAb * 3125) Min(Sy, 36000) non-occasional load case
S = 36,000 * Mfd / (CAb * 3125) 2.0 * Min(Sy, 36000) occasional load case
Where (note that the constants 36,000 and 3125 should be 248.22 and 21.6 in standard SI
units):
S = flange stress
Mfs = bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange,
developed during a non-occasional load case
Mfd = bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange,
developed during an occasional load case
Sy = yield strength of flange material at design temperature; (where Sy, given in psi,
shall not be taken as greater than 36,000 psi)
C = bolt circle diameter
Ab = total cross sectional area of bolts
PD = design pressure

CAESAR II User's Guide

188

Piping Input Reference

Read from File
Displays the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. Click this button to read
Temperature-Pressure Rating data from a file (ASME and DIN flanges are shipped with
CAESAR II).
As an alternative to reading from a file, you can type the data directly into the table.
You can create your own data files by following the format described in the CAESAR II
documentation.
Values for both Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G can be read from a file if you
select ASME 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are in the
text file ASME-2003.G located in the system folder of your application data directory.

Flange Class/Grade
Displays the flange class and material grade. Typically, flanges are identified by pressure
class and material grade, but you can type anything in this box. If the flange
Temperature-Pressure Rating data is read in from a file, then CAESAR II automatically
builds a flange name made up of the File Name, the Pressure Class, and the Material
Class.

Gasket Diameter, G / Bolt Circle

Displays the gasket diameter. Values for Gasket Diameter, G can be read from a file if you
select ASME 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are in the
text file ASME-2003.G located in the system folder of your application data directory. This
box does double duty depending on which analysis technique is active.
Peq Method:
Specify the diameter at the location of the gasket load reaction. From ASME Section VIII,
Division 1, Appendix 2, (except as noted in sketch (1) of Fig 2-4), G is defined as (see Table
2-5.2):

when b0 is less than or equal to 1/4, G equals the mean diameter of the gasket
contact face

when b0 is greater than 1/4, G equals the outside diameter of the gasket contact
face less 2b.

When using the Peq method with the Stoomwezen Piping Code, use the bolt circle
diameter instead of the gasket load reaction diameter (see chapter D0701 of the Code
RToD). The results of this Peq Method are considered by Stoomwezen to be conservative.
NC-3658 Method:
Specify the bolt circle diameter. This value is the diameter of the circle that passes through
the bolt centers.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the
flanges in a model, specify the operating temperature at which the software evaluates the
flanges in the Flange Analysis Temperature box on the Load Cases tab of the Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor.

CAESAR II User's Guide

189

Piping Input Reference

Temperature-Pressure Table
Specifies temperature and pressure values. Use this table to define the flange
Temperature-Pressure rating as a function of temperature for a particular material grade.
You can type up to 24 temperature-pressure pairs. These values must be typed in
ascending temperature order.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the
flanges in a model, specify the operating temperature at which the software evaluates the
flanges in the Flange Analysis Temperature box on the Load Cases tab of the Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor.

Bolt Area (Ab)

Specifies the total cross-sectional area of the bolts at the root of thread or the section of
least diameter under stress.

Flange Yield Strength, SYC, SY1-SY9

Specifies the flange yield stress at the cold (ambient) temperature and at each of the
operating temperatures, for use in calculating the flange allowable stress.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the
flanges in a model, specify the operating temperature at which the software evaluates the
flanges in the Flange Analysis Temperature box on the Load Cases tab of the Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor.

Nozzle Lmt Check

Indicates that you are supplying equipment data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Nozzle Lmt Check check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Equipment nozzle evaluation is one of the most important tasks in analyzing a piping system.
The various nozzle loads, when subjected to the operating criteria of the piping system, must be
less than their associated allowable loads. Verification of the nozzle loads is a time consuming
task, which cannot be performed until the pipe stress requirements are met.
CAESAR II enables you to define overall nozzle limits. This permits CAESAR II to perform a first
pass screening. Actual detailed nozzle evaluation can then be focused on those nozzles that fail
this initial screening.

CAESAR II User's Guide

190

Piping Input Reference

To illustrate this procedure, consider the limits defined for a nozzle displayed below:

The data above specifies the nozzle limits and how the resulting loads (from the analysis) are
compared to the limits. After the analysis has been performed and the results are available, you
can select the specific load case the nozzle must be evaluated against as well as the Nozzle
Check report. For more information on the Nozzle Check report see the Equipment Report.
Nozzle Limit Check is a first pass at qualifying the equipment nozzles. This is a simple
check based on the limits defined on this dialog box. This screening is not a substitute for the
more rigorous checks of the actual equipment standards.

CAESAR II User's Guide

191

Piping Input Reference

Node
Specifies the node number representing the equipment nozzle to be checked. The node
should have a restraint or a displacement in the CAESAR II model, because this node
represents an equipment nozzle.

Comparison Method
Specifies the method used to compare the actual nozzle loads to the defined limits.
Available choices are:

Absolute - Each load is compared directly to the corresponding limit. That is, FX to
FX_allowable, FY to FY_allowable, and so on.

|Fa| |Fal|
|Fb| Fbl|
|Fc| |Fcl|
|Ma| |Mal|
|Mb| |Mbl|
|Mc| |Mcl|

SRSS - The square root sum of the squares (SRSS) of each load divided by the
corresponding allowable is compared to 1.0.

Forces
and

Moments

Unity Check - The sum of the three forces and three moments, each divided by
their respective allowables is compared to 1.0.

and

CAESAR II User's Guide

192

Piping Input Reference

Ref Vector X, Y, Z
Specifies the three components or direction cosines of the reference vector. The reference
vector is used with the current element orientation to define the local coordinate system
ABC for this equipment check. See Axis B, in the Forces - Moments (on page 193) fields.
The vector must be perpendicular to the current pipe element. This vector need not be unity.
Examples:

( 0, 1, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "Y" direction

( 1, 0, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "X" direction

( 0.7071, 0, 0.7071 ) - the reference vector is skewed 45 degrees in the global X-Z
plane.

Read from File

Displays the Open dialog box. Select a file (some files are shipped with CAESAR II) and
read force and moment data into the Forces - Moments fields. Alternatively, you can enter
the data directly into the fields.

Forces - Moments
Specifies the three components of the force and the three components of the moment for
the load limits. The load limits are based on the local coordinate system ABC, where: axis A
is defined by the current element (From to To is positive), axis B is defined by the reference
vector, and axis C is the cross product of A and B (the right hand rule). For more information
on the use of these limits (Fal, Fbl, Fcl, Mal, Mbl, Mcl), see Comparison Method (on page
192).

A - Pipe/nozzle axis

B - Major equipment axis (the longitudinal direction of a vessel, or the pump shaft
direction.)

C - Other perpendicular direction.

Loading Conditions
The check boxes in this block allow you to define loadings acting on the pipe. These loads may
be individual forces or moments acting at discrete points, distributed uniform loads (which can
be specified on force per unit length, or gravitational body forces), or wind loadings (wind
loadings are entered by specifying a wind shape factorthe loads themselves are specified
when building the load cases. The uniform load and the wind shape factor check boxes are
unchecked on subsequent input screens. This does not mean that the loads were removed from
these elements; instead, this implies that the loads do not change on subsequent screens.

You can specify uniform loads in g-values by setting a parameter in the Special
Execution Options. For more information, see Configuration and Environment (on page 48).

CAESAR II User's Guide

193

Piping Input Reference

Forces/Moments
Indicates that you are supplying force and moment data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Forces/Moments check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary database tab controls imposed forces or moments for up to two nodes per
element. You can use up to nine force vectors.

Node
Specifies the node number where the forces and moments act.

Vector 1, Vector 2, ... Vector 9

Specifies the three components of the force and the three components of the moment for a
vector. You can type as many as nine vectors. The components of the force and the
moment are along the global X, Y, and Z directions.

Uniform Loads
Indicates that you are supplying uniform load data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Uniform Loads check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary database tab controls up to three uniform load vectors. These uniform loads are
applied to the entire current element, as well as all subsequent elements in the model, until
explicitly changed or zeroed out.

CAESAR II User's Guide

194

Piping Input Reference

The uniform load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you
change it.
Assuming uniform loading in F/L, a snow load of 8.0 pounds per foot (assuming units of pounds
per inch in a Y-up coordinate system) could be specified as follows:
Vector 1

Vector 2

Vector 3

Vector 2

Vector 3

X
Y

Wave Loads
Indicates that you are supplying wave load data.

Wave load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you change
it.

Drag Coefficient, Cd
Specifies the drag coefficient as recommended by API RP2A. Typical values range from 0.6
to 1.20. Type 0.0 to calculate the drag coefficient based on particle velocities.
Added Mass Coefficient, Ca
Specifies the added mass coefficient. This coefficient accounts for the added mass of fluid
entrained into the pipe. Typical values range from 0.5 to 1.0. Type 0.0 to calculate the added
mass coefficient based on particle velocities.

Lift Coefficient, Cl
Specifies the lift coefficient. This coefficient accounts for wave lift which is the force
perpendicular to both the element axis and the particle velocity vector. Type a value of 0.0 to
calculate the added lift coefficient based on particle velocities.

Marine Growth
Specifies the thickness of any marine growth adhering to the external pipe wall. The
software increases the pipe diameter experiencing wave loading by twice this value.

Marine Growth Density

Specifies the density used if you are including the weight of the marine growth in the pipe

CAESAR II User's Guide

198

Piping Input Reference

weight. If you leave this box blank, the software ignores the weight of the marine growth.

Off
Indicates that you do not want wind or wave loads on the current element and all following
elements until you change it.

Materials
CAESAR II requires the specification of the pipe materials elastic modulus, Poissons ratio,
density, and (in most cases) expansion coefficient. The software provides a database containing
the parameters for many common piping materials. This information is retrieved by picking a
material from the list, by typing the material number, or by typing the entire material name and
then picking it from the match list.

The coefficient of expansion does not appear on the dialog box, but you can review it during
error checking.
These material properties carry forward from one element to the next during the design session
so you only need to type values for those elements in which a change occurs.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Materials dialog box.

Material
Displays the material name. Materials are specified either by name or number. All available
material names and their CAESAR II material numbers are displayed in the list. Because
this list is quite long, typing a partial material name (such as A106) allows you to select from
matching materials.

Numbers 1-17 corresponds to the generic materials without code allowable

stresses.

Material 18 represents the cold spring element for cut short.

Material 19 represents the cold spring element for cut long.

CAESAR II User's Guide

199

Piping Input Reference

Material 20 is used to define Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe.

Material 21 is for user-defined material.

When you select a material from the database, the physical properties as well as the
allowable stresses are obtained and placed in the dialog box.
If you change the temperature or piping code later, these allowable stress values are
automatically updated.
For user-defined material, type the corresponding properties.

Allowable Stress
Indicates that you are supplying allowable stress data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Allowable Stress check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab is used to select the piping code and to enter any data required
for the code check. Allowable stresses are automatically updated for material, temperature
and code if available in the Material Database.

The Allowable Stress Auxiliary changes according to the piping code. It incorporates
piping codes with their associated inputs. Press F1 to display the help screen to be sure that
you correctly interpret each new input data cell.

CAESAR II User's Guide

200

Piping Input Reference

Allowable stress data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements
until you change it.
Click Fatigue Curves to specify material fatigue curve data. The Material Fatigue Curve
dialog box displays. Type stress versus cycle data with up to 8 points per curve.

Code
Specifies the piping code. CAESAR II uses B31.3 by default. You can change this default
setting in the configuration. The following table lists the piping codes. You can find their
current publication dates in the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
B31.1

Swedish Power Piping Code (Method 1)

B31.3

Swedish Power Piping Code (Method 2)

B31.4

B31.1 - 1967

B31.4, Chapter IX

Stoomwezen

B31.5

RCC-M C

B31.8

RCC-M D

B31.8, Chapter VIII

CODETI

B31.9

B31.11

Norwegian TBK-6

GPTC/Z380

ASME Sect III NC (Class 2) FDBR

ASME Sect III ND (Class 3) BS 7159
Navy 505

UKOOA

CAN/CSA Z662

IGE/TD/12

CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter

DNV

BS 806

ISO 14692

EN-13480

PD 8010-1

Specifies the stress range reduction factor for most piping codes.
B31.1 - Stress range reduction factor is obtained from equation 1c. Consult the applicable
piping code for methods of combining cycle life data where several thermal states exist and
where the number of thermal cycles is high. The software assumes a value of one if you do
not type a value.
B31.3 - Stress range reduction factor is obtained from equation 1c corresponding to Fig
302.3.5. If certain criteria are met, then the stress range reduction factor is allowed to
exceed 1.0. The number of cycles can be specified in this box for B31.3. This allows
CAESAR II to compute the cyclic reduction factor according to equation 1c.
B31.4 - Not used.
B31.8 - Stress range reduction factor is obtained from the equation given in Section
833.8(b). The number of cycles can be specified in this box for B31.8 which allows CAESAR
II to compute the cyclic reduction factor according to this equation.
B31.8 CHAPTER VIII - Not used.
B31.9 - References B31.1 for detailed stress analysis. For more information, see Paragraph
919.4.1.b.
CODETI - Called U in the code.
NORWEGIAN - Called fr in the code. This value can be as high as 2.34.
DNV - Material ultimate tensile strength at temperature.
CAN Z662

F1 = L - the location factor is obtained from Table 4.2

Application

CLASS 1

CLASS 2

CLASS 3

CLASS 4

General & Cased crossings

1.000

0.900

0.700

0.550

Roads

0.750

0.625

0.500

Railways

0.625

0.500

Stations

0.625

0.500

Other

0.750

0.625

0.500

Gas (non-sour)

Gas (sour service)

CAESAR II User's Guide

205

Piping Input Reference

General & Cased crossings

0.900

0.750

0.625

0.500

Roads

0.750

0.625

0.500

Railways

0.625

0.500

Stations

0.625

0.500

Other

0.750

0.625

0.500

General & Cased crossings

1.000

0.800

Roads

0.800

Railways

0.625

Stations

0.800

Other

0.800

Uncased railway crossings

0.625

All others

1.000

HVP

LVP

Class 1 - Location areas containing ten or fewer dwelling units intended for human
occupancy
Class 2 - Location areas containing 11 to 46 dwelling units intended for human occupancy
OR
buildings with more than 20 persons
outside areas with more than 20 persons
industrial installations
Class 3 - Location areas with more than 46 dwelling units intended for human occupancy
OR institutions where rapid evacuation may be difficult
Class 4 - Location areas where buildings intended for human occupancy have 4 or more
stories.

CAESAR II User's Guide

206

Piping Input Reference

F2 = T - The temperature derating factor, is obtained from Table 4.4
Temperature

Derating Factor T

up to 120 (C)

1.00

150

0.97

180

0.93

200

0.91

230

0.87

F3 - F9 - Not used.

CAN Z662 Chapter 11

F1 - Not used.

F2 = T - Temperature derating factor obtained from Table 4.4

F3 = - Design factor for Condition A from Table 11.1.

F4 = - Design factor for Condition B from Table 11.1.

F5 - F9 - Not used.

BS 806 - Mean stress to failure in design life at design temperature. F1, F2, ... F9. This
value corresponds to the nine possible thermal states.
FDBR - Identical to B31.1,unless you type the expansion coefficients directly instead of
temperatures. In that case, the software cannot determine Ehot. In this case, type a value of
1.0 in the FAC box and use these boxes to specify the product of f * Ehot / Ecold for each
temperature case.
SWEDISH METHOD 1 - Creep rupture stress at temperature. F1, F2 ... F9. This value
corresponds to the nine possible thermal states.
STOOMWEZEN - Creep related material properties as follows:

F1 = Rrg - Average creep stress to produce 1% permanent set after 100,000 hours
at temperature (vm).

F2 = Rmg - Average creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).

F3 = Rmmin - Minimum creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours
at temperature (vm).

BS 7159 - Fatigue factor Kn. This value is used inversely compared to other codes so that
its value is greater than 1.0. Kn is calculated as follows:

Kn = 1 + 0.25(As/sn) (log10(n) - 3)

Where:
As = stress range during fatigue cycle
n = Maximum stress during fatigue cycle
n = number of stress cycles during design life

CAESAR II User's Guide

207

Piping Input Reference

UKOOA - Ratio r from the material UKOOA idealized allowable stress envelope. This ratio
is defined as sa(0:1)/sa(2:1) as shown on the figure below. One value should be given for
each of the operating temperature cases.
IGE/TD/12 - UTS value.
EN-13480 - Stress range reduction factor taken from Table 12.1.3-1 (which matches the
B31.1 table above), or computed from equation 12.1.3-4. You can specify the number of
cycles in this box for EN-13480. This allows CAESAR II to compute the cyclic reduction
factor according to equation 12.1.3-4.
GPTC/Z380 - Not used.
PD-8010 (Part 1 & Part 2) - Not used.
ISO 14692 F is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.
JPI - Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.

Eff
Specifies the longitudinal weld joint efficiency. The field changes according to the current
piping code.
B31.1, B31.1-1967, B31.5 - Allowable stress tables include longitudinal weld joint
efficiencies where applicable. If Eff is specified, then values for SC and SH are divided by
Eff before they are used in the flexibility calculations. Eff is ignored in the minimum wall
calculation.
B31.3, B31.4, B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII, B31.9, B31.11, NAVY 505, Z662 (J), BS 806 (e),
CODETI (z), FDBR (vl), GPTC/Z380 - Allowable stress or yield stress tables do not include
longitudinal weld joint efficiencies. Eff is ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is
multiplied by Eff when calculating the minimum wall thickness.
B31.4 Chapter IX, ASME NC, ASME ND, RCCM-C, RCCM-D - Ignored for both flexibility
and minimum wall thickness calculations. The box is disabled for these codes.
Swedish Method 1, Swedish Method 2, Norwegian TBK 5-6 - Circumferential joint factor
z and is used in the calculation of the code stresses rather than in the calculation of the
allowables. This applies to both flexibility or minimum wall thickness.
Stoomwezen - Cyclic reduction factor referred to as Cf in the code. CAESAR II does not
consider weld joint efficiency for this code.
BS 7159 - Ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity Eh/Ea. The software
uses a default value of 1.0, as though the material is isotropic if you leave this box blank.
UKOOA - Replace this box with f2. This is the system design factor. The value is typically
0.67.
IGE/TD/12 - Replace this box with Dfac. This is the system design factor (f) as described in
Table 2 of the IFE/TD/12 code. The value must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
DNV - Replaces this box with usage factor Ns (pressure yielding) from Tables C1 or C2.
The value must be between 0.77 and 0.96.
EN-13480 - Ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is multiplied by Eff when calculating
the minimum wall thickness.

CAESAR II User's Guide

0.50

D (CLASS 4) Multi-Story Buildings are prevalent, traffic is heavy, and

where there may be numerous other utilities underground.

0.40 (0.4 defaults if

Fatigue Curves
Displays the Material Fatigue Curves dialog box.

CAESAR II User's Guide

215

Piping Input Reference

Cycle Stress Table
Specifies cycle and stress values. Use the material fatigue curve data to evaluate fatigue
load cases and cumulative use scenarios. You can type up to eight cycle-stress pairs.
These values must be entered in ascending cycle order.
IGE/TD/12 provides the opportunity to type up to five fatigue curves, representing fatigue
classes D, E, F, G, and W. Fatigue evaluations are explicitly specified by IGE/TD/12.
CAESAR II offers them as extensions to other codes.
You must type cycle/stress pairs in ascending order (ascending by cycles). Type stress
values as the allowable stress range rather than allowable stress amplitude. The software
considers fatigue curves to be specified using a logarithmic interpolation.
Static fatigue cases are evaluated against the full range of the fatigue curve, while
dynamic fatigue cases are assumed to represent amplitudes, and are therefore evaluated
against half of the range of the fatigue curve.

Read from File

Displays the Open dialog box so that you can select a file (some files are shipped with
CAESAR II) and read cycles and stress data into the Cycles and Stress boxes.

Composition/Type
Specifies the material composition of the pipe.

Aluminum - Aluminum alloy or alloy steel containing 9% nickel. For use at

temperatures lower than room temperature.

Austenite - Austenite stainless steel and high nickel contained allows. For use at
temperatures higher than room temperature.

Others - Any material other than aluminum or austenite.

TD/12 Modulus Correction

IGE/TD/12 Section A5.6 requires that the allowable fatigue stress (as specified in the fatigue
curves) be adjusted by the ratio of the material modulus-of-elasticity divided by 209103
N/mm2. This divisor can be adjusted if necessary by changing the entry in the Modulus
Correction box.

Allowable Stress (ISO 14692)

Activates allowable stress data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the Allowable
Stress check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. When you select material 20 for
FRP (Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic) and piping code ISO 14692, the Allowable Stress
auxiliary dialog box changes.

CAESAR II User's Guide

216

Piping Input Reference

al(0:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at 0:1 stress ratio. Typically, the axial stress (hoop stress
is 0 at this point) is lower than the axial stress al(2:1) (hoop stress is double the axial stress
at this point). The ratio of these stresses, called bi-axial stress ratio, can range between 0.5
and 0.75 for plain pipe depending on the winding angle and specific pipe type.

al(1:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962,, hoop stress
has the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio, that is hl(1:1)=al(1:1).
However, CAESAR II allows you to type different values for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a
generalized failure profile. In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error
Checker.
If you leave both the al(1:1) and hl(1:1) boxes blank, CAESAR II assumes that a simplified
envelope is used for plain pipe.

hl(1:1)
Specifies the long term hoop stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress
has the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio. That is, hl(1:1) = al(1:1).
However, CAESAR II allows a different value for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a generalized failure
profile. In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message displays in the Error Checker.
If you specify al(1:1) and leave hl(1:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(1:1) is equal to
al(1:1), and displays a warning message in the Error Checker. For more information, see
al(1:1) (on page 217).

CAESAR II User's Guide

217

Piping Input Reference

al(2:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962, hoop
stress is twice the axial stress at a 2:1 ratio, that is hl(2:1) = 2 * al(2:1). This is a natural
condition when a pressurized pipe is enclosed at both ends. However CAESAR II allows you
to type different values for hl(2:1) 2 * al(2:1). In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning
message in the Error Checker.

hl(2:1)
Specifies the long term hoop stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress is
twice the axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. That is, hl(2:1)= 2*al(2:1). However, CAESAR II allows
hl(2:1) to have a different value than twice of al(2:1). In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning
message in the Error Checker.
If you specify al(2:1) and leave hl(2:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(2:1) is equal to twice
al(2:1), and displays a warning message in the error checker. For more information, see al(2:1)
(on page 218).

Qs
Specifies the qualified stress for joints, bends, and tees. A qualified stress, Qs, provided by
the manufacturer is defined as:

Pq is the qualified pressure;

D is the average diameter of the pipe;
tr is the average reinforced wall thickness of the pipe.
The qualified stress, qs, for fittings is calculated as:

CAESAR II does not require qualified stress Qs for plain pipe. Qs for pipe = hl(2:1),
and hl(2:1) is required input for plain pipe.

You must enter qualified stress Qs for joints, bends and tees even if these fitting are
not in the piping model. You can type positive values (1000.0 for Qs and 1.0 for r,
for example) to pass the Error Checker.

CAESAR II User's Guide

218

Piping Input Reference

r
Specifies the bi-axial stress ratio for bends, tees, and joints. The bi-axial stress r is defined
as:

where:
sh(2:1) is the short-term hoop strength, under 2:1 stress conditions;
sa(0:1) is the short-term axial strength, under axial loading only.
In the absence of data from the manufacturer, use the default values:

Fitting

Component

Filament-wound unidirectional 90
and

Filament-wound and hand-lay 1

100% hand-lay

Tees

Other Hand
laminated

Bends

Joints

Short-term
Strength Bi-axial
Stress Ratio (r)*

0.45

1.0

1.9

Filament-wound and hand-lay 1

1.0

CSM/WR 1, 9

1.9

Spigot/Socket Adhesive or
Mechanical Connection

1.0

Threaded

0.45

Flange

1.0

Laminated

2.0

You can use a higher factor for r if justified by testing according to 6.2.6
ISO 14692-2-2002.
CAESAR II assumes that the bi-axial stress ratio r is 1.0 for tees according to ISO 14692.
CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error Checker if the bi-axial stress ratio r is
greater than 20 for bends or joints. You can ignore the warning message.
If a piping system has no joints or bends, the corresponding bi-axial stress ratio r should not
be required. However, you must type a positive value (such as 1.0) for r to get rid of error
messages.

CAESAR II User's Guide

219

Piping Input Reference

Eh/Ea
Specifies the ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity. If you leave this
box blank, CAESAR II uses a default value of 2.0.

Hand Lay
Indicates that the bend is hand-layed. If this box is selected, the software assumes smooth
bends. This affects the calculations of both the flexibility factor and the SIFs for the bend.

1, 2, ... 9 for Partial Factor for Temperature (A1)

Specifies the partial factor for temperature. Because each operating temperature needs an
A1 factor, you may need to specify up to 9 factors if all 9 operating temperatures are defined
in a model. If you leave the boxes blank, CAESAR II uses the default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.2 Design Temperature.
The effect of temperature on reduction of mechanical properties shall be accounted for by
the partial factor A1, which is determined according to Annex D in ISO 14692-2:2002.
The maximum operating temperature of the piping system shall not exceed the temperature
used to calculate the partial factor A1 of the GRP components. If the operating temperature
is less than or equal to 65C, then A 1 is generally equal to 1.0
The effect of low temperatures on material properties and system performance shall be
considered. For service temperatures below 0C, the principal should consider the need for
additional testing, depending on the resin system. Both qualification as well as additional
mechanical tests should be considered.
Glass Reinforced Plastic GRP materials do not undergo ductile/brittle transition within
the temperature range of this part of ISO 14692. Because of this, there is no significant
abrupt change in mechanical properties at low temperatures. A concern is that at
temperatures lower than 35C, internal residual stresses could become large enough to
reduce the safe operating envelope of the piping system.

Chemical Resistance (A2)

Specifies the partial factor for chemical resistance. If you leave the box blank, CAESAR II
uses the default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO 14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.3 Chemical Degradation.
The effect of chemical degradation of all system components from either the transported
medium or the external environment shall be considered on both the pressure and
temperature ratings. System components shall include adhesive and elastomeric
seals/locking rings, if used, as well as the basic glass fiber and resin materials.

CAESAR II User's Guide

220

Piping Input Reference

The effect of chemical degradation shall be accounted for by the partial factor A 2 for
chemical resistance, which is determined according to Annex D in ISO 14692-2:2002. If the
normal service fluid is water, then A 2 = 1. Reference shall be made to manufacturers' data if
available.

In general, the aqueous fluids specified in the qualification procedures of ISO

14692-2:2002 are among the more aggressive environments likely to be
encountered. However, strong acids, alkalis, hypochlorite, glycol, aromatics and
alcohol can also reduce the properties of Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) piping
components; the effect depends on the chemical concentration, temperature and
resin type.

The information from the manufacturers' tables is based on experience and

laboratory tests at atmospheric pressure, on published literature, raw material
suppliers' data, and so on. Chemical concentrations, wall stresses, reinforcement
type and resin have not always been taken into account. Therefore the tables only
give an indication of the suitability of the piping components to transport the listed
chemicals. In addition, the mixing of chemicals may cause severe situations.

Cyclic Service (A3)

Specifies the partial factor for cyclic service. If you leave the box blank, CAESAR II uses the
default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO 14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.4 Fatigue and Cyclic
Loading.
Cyclic loading is not necessarily limited to pressure loads. Thermal and other cyclic loads
shall therefore be considered when assessing cyclic severity.
If the predicted number of pressure or other loading cycle is less than 7000 over the design
life, the service shall be considered static. If required, the limited cyclic capability of the pipe
system components can be demonstrated according to 6.4.5 of ISO 14692-2:2002.
If the predicted number of pressure or other loading cycles exceeds 7000 over the design
life, then the designer shall determine the design cyclic severity, R c, of the piping system. Rc
is defined as:

where Fmin and Fmax are the minimum and maximum loads (or stresses) of the load (or
stress) cycle.
The partial factor, A3 , for cyclic service is given by:

where N is the total number of cycles during service life.

This equation is intended for cyclic internal pressure loading only, but may be applied with
caution to axial loads provided they remain tensile, that is, it is not applicable for reversible
loading.

CAESAR II User's Guide

221

Piping Input Reference

System Design Factor
Specifies the system design factor. This value is multiplied by the occasional load factor (k)
to generate the value of the part factor for loading (f2). If you leave this box blank, CAESAR
II uses the default value of 0.67.
The purpose of the system design factor is to define an acceptable margin of safety
between the strength of the material and the operating stresses for the three load cases.
These load cases are occasional, sustained including thermal loads, and sustained
excluding thermal loads. The following table shows the relationship between the system
design factor, the occasional load factor, and f2, along with their default values.
Loading Type

Load
Duration

System Design Occasional

Factor (SDF)
Load Factor

Occasional

Short-term 0.67

1.33

0.89

Sustained Including
Long-term 0.67
Thermal Loads

1.24

0.83

Sustained
Excluding Thermal
Loads

1.00

0.67

Long-term 0.67

Part Factor For

Loading (f2)

The part factor for loading f2 is equal to System Design Factor times the Occ Load
Factor.

Thermal Factor (k)

Specifies the thermal factor. This factor is defined in Section 8.4 of ISO-14692-3:2002(E). In
the absence of further information, the thermal factor k should be taken as 0.85 for liquids
and 0.8 for gasses. If you leave this box blank, CAESAR II uses a default value of 1.0.

Material Elastic Properties

CAESAR II User's Guide

225

Piping Input Reference

Refract Thk
Specifies the thickness of refractory to apply to the piping. Refractory is applied to the inside
of the pipe. It is included in the dead weight of the system and reduces the internal pipe area
affecting the fluid weight in the system.

Refract Density
Displays the density of the refractory lining. If you select a value from the list, the numeric
value replaces the material name when the box is registered.
Refractory densities are much higher than insulation densities and could lead to
under sized restraints.
Densities for some typical refractory materials display below:
MATERIAL

DENSITY (lb./[Link]. )

A.P. GREEN GREENCAST 94

0.09433

A.P. GREEN KRUZITE

CASTABLE

0.08391

A.P. GREEN MC-30

0.08391

A.P. GREEN MC-22

0.07234

A.P. GREEN KAST-SET

0.06655

A.P. GREEN KAST-O-LITE 25

0.05208

A.P. GREEN VSL-35AST 94

0.02257

B & W KAOCRETE B

0.05787

B & W KAOCRETE 32-C

0.08333

B & W KAO-TAB 95

0.09549

B & W KAOLITE 2200

0.03241

B & W KAOLITE 2200-HS

0.04745

B & W KAOLITE 2500-LI.

0.03472

CAESAR II User's Guide

226

Piping Input Reference

Insul Thk
Specifies the thickness of the insulation to be applied to the piping. Insulation applied to the
outside of the pipe is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected pipe
area used for wind load computations.
Even if you specify the unit weight of the insulation or cladding, the thickness values
are still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.

Clad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the cladding to be applied to the piping. Cladding is applied to the
outside of the insulation. It is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected
pipe area used for wind load computations.
Even if you specify the unit weight of cladding plus insulation, the thickness values
are still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.

Insulation Density
Displays the density of the insulation on a per unit volume basis. If you select a value from
the list, the numeric value replaces the material name when the box is registered.
If you leave this box blank, then the software assumes that the insulation is CALCIUM
SILICATE having a density of 0.006655.
Verify that this assumed value is appropriate for the current application. Sample density
values for insulation materials are:
MATERIAL

DENSITY

AMOSITE ASBESTOS

.009259

CALCIUM SILICATE

.006655

CAREYTEMP

.005787

FIBERGLASS (OWEN/CORNING) .004051

FOAM-GLASS/CELLULAR
GLASS

.004630

HIGH TEMP

.01389

KAYLO 10 (TM)

.007234

MINERAL WOOL

.004919

PERLITE / CELO-TEMP 1500

.007523

CAESAR II User's Guide

227

Piping Input Reference

POLY URETHANE

.001273

STYRO FOAM

.001042

SUPER X

.01447

Cladding Density
Displays the thickness of the cladding to apply to the piping. Cladding is applied to the
outside of the insulation and is included in the dead weight of the system. Cladding is also
included in the projected pipe area used for wind load computations.

Insul/Cladding Unit Weight

Displays an alternative to specifying the insulation and cladding thickness and density. This
is an optional combined uniform load (weight per unit length).
If you are applying wind loads, then you must type the insulation and cladding
thickness to obtain the correct projected area for wind load computation.

Propagate Properties
Indicates whether to propagate the property changes. Clear this check box to indicate that
properties apply to the current element only.

Line Number
Specifies the line number for an element.

Line numbers carry forward to successive elements. Because of this, you only need to specify
data on the first element of a new line.
To assign a line number name, do one of the following:

230

Piping Input Reference

Open CADWorx Model

Opens an existing CADWorx model.

Save <filename>
Saves the current CAESAR II job under its current name.

Save As
Saves the current CAESAR II job under a new name.

Save As Dialog Box

Save in
Specifies the folder in which to save the job.
Name
Lists the files in the selected folder that match the selected file type. You can sort the list by
clicking the Name, Data modified, or Type column headers.
File Name
Specifies the name of the selected file. This field is automatically filled in if you click a file in
the Name list.
Save as type
Specifies the type of file listed in the Name list.
Save
Writes the file to the selected folder.

Save As Dialog Box

CAESAR II User's Guide

231

Piping Input Reference

Save as Graphics Image

Saves the current CAESAR II job as an HTML page, .TIFF, .BMP, or .JPG file.

Error Check
Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the first step of analysis. When
the error check is complete, the Errors and Warnings dialog box displays the results. For more
information, see Error Checking (on page 522).

Archive
Assigns a password to the job to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or to type the
password to unlock the file. Archived input files cannot be altered or saved without this
password; however, they can be opened and reviewed.

Archive Dialog Box

Controls options for archiving a CAESAR II job.
Password
Specifies the password for the job. Type a password between 6 and 24 characters in length.

Archive Dialog Box

Controls options for archiving a CAESAR II job.
Password
Specifies the password for the job. Type a password between 6 and 24 characters in length.

Batch Run
Error checks the model without any involvement required by you. This process stops only for
errors, which must be resolved for the analysis to run successfully. When you select Batch Run,
the software uses the existing or default static load cases and performs the static analysis.

Print Setup
Sets up the printer for the input listing.

Print Setup Dialog Box

Controls parameters for setting up a printer.
Name
Specifies the name of the printer.
Properties
Displays printer properties.

CAESAR II User's Guide

232

Piping Input Reference

Size
Specifies the size of the paper in the printer.
Source
Specifies the active paper tray
Portrait
Prints the file using a vertical orientation.
Landscape
Prints the file using a horizontal orientation.
Network
Allows you to specify a printer from the network.

Print Setup Dialog Box

Controls parameters for setting up a printer.
Name
Specifies the name of the printer.
Properties
Displays printer properties.
Size
Specifies the size of the paper in the printer.
Source
Specifies the active paper tray
Portrait
Prints the file using a vertical orientation.
Landscape
Prints the file using a horizontal orientation.
Network
Allows you to specify a printer from the network.

Print Preview
Displays a preview of the print job.

Piping Input Reference

Recent Piping Files

Displays a list of most recently opened piping files.

Recent Structural Files

Displays a list of most recently opened structural files.

Exit
Closes the session. The software prompts you to save any unsaved changes.

CAESAR II User's Guide

236

Piping Input Reference

Edit Menu
Performs actions associated with cutting and pasting, navigating through the elements, and
performing a few small utilities.

Cut
Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected
elements replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.

Copy
Copies selected elements to the Clipboard. When you use this command, it replaces the
previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents.

Paste
Inserts the Clipboard contents into the file. The command is not available if the Clipboard is
empty.

Continue
Moves the dialog box to the next element in the model. The software adds a new element if
there is no next element.

Duplicate Element
Duplicates the last element in a model so that you can quickly continue building the model.
Select the last element, and then click Duplicate Element. For more information on duplicating
groups of elements in a model, see Duplicate (on page 334).
If you select an element that is not at the end of the model and click Duplicate Element,
the software continues to the next element in the model without duplicating the selected
element.

Insert Element
Inserts an element.

Insert Element Dialog Box

Controls options for inserting an element.
Before
Inserts a new element prior to the current element. The To node of the new element is then
equal to the From node of the current element.
After
Inserts a new element following the current element. The From node of the new element is

CAESAR II User's Guide

237

Piping Input Reference

then equal to the To node of the current element.

Delete Element
Deletes the current element.

Find
Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box that allows you
to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You can enter the node
numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only the From node number, the
software searches for the first available element that starts with that node number. If you enter
only the To node number, the software searches for an element ending with that node number.
When the software locates the element it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can
zoom out to better identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.

Find Element Dialog Box

Controls parameters for finding elements.
Node Numbers
Specifies the node numbers to search for. Enter a single node number to find the next
element containing that node number (either as a From or To node). Enter two node
numbers to find the next element containing both of those node numbers (in either order).
Zoom to Node if Found
Indicates that the software will display the found node in the active view.

Global
Specifies the absolute (global) coordinates for the start node of each discontiguous system
segment.
This may be required for three reasons:
1. To show nodal coordinates in absolute, rather than relative coordinates.
2. Defining global coordinates for discontiguous segments allows the piping segments to plot in
the correct locations, rather than superimposed at the origin.
3. It is important that the pipe be given the correct elevation if wind loading is present.

Global Coordinates Dialog Box

Controls parameters for defining the absolute coordinates for the start node of an element.
X
Specifies the X coordinate.
Y
Specifies the Y coordinate.

CAESAR II User's Guide

238

Piping Input Reference

Z
Specifies the Z coordinate.

Close Loop
Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes in the model.

Increment
Specifies the increment between nodes. CAESAR II uses the nodal increment set in
Configure/Setup when generating the From and To nodes for new elements. You can override
this behavior by typing a different value in this dialog box. For more information, see Auto Node
Number Increment (on page 69).

Set Node Increment Dialog Box

Specifies the parameters for setting an increment between nodes.
Node Increment
Specifies the increment between node numbers.

Distance
Finds the distance between two specified nodes or between any two points you select on
the model.
Press CTRL + click to select multiple distances along a line of pipe.

Distance Dialog Box

Allows measurements for finding distances between nodes or specified points on a model.
Choose a measuring method, and then view results for the measurements in the Distance
dialog, at the bottom of the dialog box, and on the model.

Use the Pan and Zoom functions to move around larger models when measuring the
distance between two nodes.

Press SHIFT to confine the measuring line to the x-, y-, or z-axis directions. When you press
SHIFT, the software selects the axis nearest to the cursor location. As the mouse moves
around the model, the software changes the measuring line direction to the closest axis to
the cursor location.

Press CTRL + click to select multiple distances along a line of pipe.

CAESAR II User's Guide

239

Piping Input Reference

Measure Method
Snap to Nearest Node
Specifies for the software to choose the start and end point of an element on the model by
highlighting snap points. Snap points are markers that indicate element node points. The
software uses snap points to highlight a node when the mouse cursor comes within a certain
proximity range of it. The software defaults to having this check box selected. Clear this
check box for the software to measure without using the snapping functionality.

Clear the Snap to Nearest Node check box when measuring distance in imported
graphics models, such as from CADWorx or Smart 3D. The software cannot snap to
nodes on models created outside of CAESAR II.

Change the shape, size, and color of snap point markers by selecting Properties >
Display Options from the right-click context menu. Make changes to the Graphic
Edit Options>Symbol Information settings, and then click Apply in the Plot
Settings dialog box.

Origin and Selected Element

Calculates the distance between the origin point using the starting node coordinates (0,0,0),
and a selected point on the model.
To and From Nodes
Calculates the distance between two nodes. Type the node numbers in the boxes and click
Calculate (or press ENTER) for the software to perform the distance calculation. The
distance calculated displays in the Results area of the dialog box.
Calculate
Calculates the To and From Nodes measurement specified in the Measure Method.
Free Measure
Calculates the distance between two points anywhere on the model (regardless of the
node). Free measure lets you measure randomly on a model.
Results
Shows the results of the previous distance calculation.
The software also displays the result on the status bar at the bottom of the window. The
results indicate the start and end point and the length measured in the unit of measure
specified for the current model.
The software displays the difference of change along the three axes in the delta (DX, DY, DZ)
boxes.

What do you want to do?

Measure between two nodes

1. Open a CAESAR II file.

2. Click Piping Input

in the main menu.

The Classic Piping Input dialog box opens.

CAESAR II User's Guide

240

Piping Input Reference

3. Click Distance

on the Input Tools toolbar.

The Distance dialog box opens.

4. Click Nodes to measure distance between two specified nodes.
5. Type the starting and ending node numbers and click Calculate.
The software displays the measured distance in the Delta X, Y, Z boxes at the bottom of the
Distance dialog box, on the measure line in the model, and in the status bar at the bottom
of the window.

After you select the method for measuring the distance, you can dock the Distance
dialog box to the side or even minimize the dialog box entirely. Then, as you measure
distances, the results display on the model and also in the status bar at the bottom of
the window.

Press ESC to stop the distance measuring functionality on the model (but leave the
dialog box open), or close the Distance dialog box.

Measure between two points on a model

1. Open a CAESAR II file.

2. Click Piping Input

in the main menu.

The Classic Piping Input dialog box opens.

3. Click Distance

on the Input Tools toolbar.

The Distance dialog box opens.

4. Double-click to select the element.
5. Click Origin and selected node.
You must have only one element selected on the model to use the Origin and
selected node option.
The software displays the measured distance from the To node of the element selected to
the origin (first) node in the model.
The distance measurement, including the location of the start and end points, displays in the
Results section of the dialog box and at the bottom of the main CAESAR II window. The
delta DX, DY, DZ boxes at the bottom of the Distance dialog box show the differences of
change along the three axes.

After you select the method for measuring the distance, you can dock the Distance
dialog box to the side. Then, as you measure distances, the results display on the
model and also in the status bar at the bottom of the window.

Press ESC to stop the distance measuring functionality on the model (but leave the
dialog box open), or close the Distance dialog box.

CAESAR II User's Guide

241

Piping Input Reference

List
Displays all of the applicable input data in a dialog box. You can edit, delete, or modify data in
the lists.
Show All Lists
Displays the all of the available List dialog boxes.
Close All Lists
Closes all of the List dialog boxes and clears (un-checks) all the list options, such as
Allowables, Bends, Elements, and so forth.
The List dialog boxes appear as a rows tabs at the bottom of the piping input. These tabs
specify the various list options that you can access.
When you select a tab, the headings at the top of the selected List dialog box display the
specific input data and controlling parameters in the corresponding columns. All of the input data
can be accessed through the various List dialog boxes.
The following shows an example of a List dialog box, the Elements dialog box.

The software displays the input information in the List dialog boxes in a column format. Move the
cursor into any box to type a new value to replace the original value. You can scroll through the
reports either vertically or horizontally.
Press F1 while within the data cells to display help information. You can delete the input
information by highlighting the selection and pressing Delete. The software supports many
standard Windows commands, such as Cut and Paste, on a box-by-box basis.
If you edit input data on a List dialog box, the software updates the Classic Piping Input dialog
box as well. The software indicates values that carry forward on the Classic Piping Input dialog
box by displaying the value in red if there is a change to the data value. For example, in the
example shown above, the PIPE OD value changes from 8.6250 inch to 6.6250 inch on the
element From Node 30 to To Node 50. The software displays the first element in the list with
the new value in red. Note that elements 2 through 3 inherit the value of element 1
automatically. In this example, the value of the PIPE OD does not change until you enter a new
value for element 4. All elements below element 4 inherit that value unless a new value is
entered.

CAESAR II User's Guide

242

Piping Input Reference

Other options from the Elements dialog box include the following:
Find the Current Node
Use the Find command (started with Ctrl F or Edit > Find) to quickly jump to the element
where the given node is located. Find remembers the last node number that you typed, so
subsequent searches of the same node can be accomplished by pressing Ctrl F.
Perform Global (Block) Operations
Perform global editing operations on selected parts of the piping system by highlighting an
element row, right-clicking on an element line, and selecting Block Operation and one of
the global (block) options. These options include varieties of rotations, deletions,
duplications, node renumbering, and status reporting. For more information on the block
operations, see Block Operations Toolbar (on page 356).
Access Element Auxiliary Data
Access the Auxiliary Data dialog boxes located on the piping input by highlighting an
element row, right-clicking on an element line, and selecting Block Operation > Aux
Screens. By single-clicking on any checked items from the dialog box shown below the
appropriate Auxiliary Data box displays. You can edit the data in the Auxiliary Data box,
which updates the input dialog box. Additionally, you can type new data by double-clicking
on any of the unchecked boxes to open the Auxiliary Data dialog box. You can delete an
entire Auxiliary Data box by double-clicking on the checked item. A prompt warns you of
the operation.

Display Block Status

View Block Status dialog box, which shows the piping data in the current job and in the
block.

CAESAR II User's Guide

243

Piping Input Reference

Next Element
Skips to the next element.

Previous Element
Skips to the previous element.

First Element
Skips to the first element.

Last Element
Skips to the last element.

Undo
Reverses or cancels any modeling steps. This can also be accomplished by pressing Ctrl-Z.
You can undo an unlimited number of steps. Undo is limited only by the amount of available
memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the undo function resets the redo function.

Redo
Repeats the last step done You can redo an unlimited number of steps. Redo is limited by
the amount of available memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the redo function resets the undo function.

Edit Static Load Cases

Displays the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box. For more information, see
Static Analysis (on page 522).

Edit Dynamic Load Cases

Displays the Dynamic Analysis dialog box displaying static load information. For more
information, see Dynamic Analysis Overview (see "Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems" on page
628).

CAESAR II User's Guide

244

Piping Input Reference

Review Units
Displays the Review Current Units dialog box. This dialog box displays the units used to create
the report file. Changing the units in the configuration does not affect the input. To change the
input units, click Tools > Change Model Units.

Model Menu
Performs actions associated with modeling, as well as specifying associated system-wide
information.

Break
Divides an element into two or more individual elements.
Click Model > Break on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. This command displays the
Break at element <node> - <node> dialog box.

Break at Element <node> - <node> Dialog Box

Controls options for breaking an element.

A straight run of pipe between two nodes needs to be broken to insert a restraint, or
some other change in properties.

A long straight run of pipe needs to be broken into multiple, uniform lengths of pipe with
similar support conditions on each length. For example, a long straight run of rack
piping, or a buried run with multiple soil supports at each point in the run.

CAESAR II User's Guide

245

Piping Input Reference

The example above illustrates a single nodal insert between the nodes 10 and 20. The node to
be inserted is 15 and is 6 ft. from the node 10. Alternatively, you could insert node 15 an
appropriate distance from the To node 20. If there was some other node in the model with a
restraint (or imposed displacements), like the one to be put on the newly generated node 15,
then the node identifying that restraint location could be filled in at the line Get Support From
Node and the restraint would be automatically placed at 15. In this case, the +Y support at node
10 is copied to node 15.
For multiple inserts in a rack piping system the dialog box might appear as follows:

If you type the node where a +Y restraint has already been defined at the prompt for "support
condition", a +Y restraint is placed at all of the generated nodes, namely 110, 112, ... , 120. The
multiple insert Break is used primarily for three reasons:

Rack piping supports where the total length and node spacing is known and typed
directly when requested at the prompts.

Underground pipe runs where the overall length of the run is known, and the lengths of
the individual elements in the run are known.

To add mass points in order to refine a model for dynamic analysis.

Break does not work when the element is an expansion joint or the delta dimensions in
the DX, DY, and DZ boxes are blank or zero.
Insert Single Node
Indicates that only one node is inserted.
Insert Multiple Nodes
Indicates that more than one node is inserted.

CAESAR II User's Guide

246

Piping Input Reference

Single Node Information
New Node Number
Indicates the node number for the inserted node.
Distance in (in.) from Node <node number>
Specifies the distance from the selected node.

Multiple Node Information

Total Number of Break Elements
Specifies the number of elements to insert.
Node Step
Specifies the increment between node numbers.
Length of each element
Displays the length of each element to insert.
Allow Duplicate Node Numbers
Indicates that duplicate node numbers are allowed.
Get Support From Node
Specifies the node from which to copy support information.

Valve
Provides access to the valve and flange databases. This command displays the Valve
and Flange Database: <database name> dialog box.

Valve and Flange Database: <database name> Dialog Box

There are currently four databases provided:

CRANE steel valves and total flange length

GENERIC valves and 2/3 flange length

Corner and Lada valves - no flanges

CADWorx Plant (this is the CAESAR II default)

CAESAR II automatically generates data lengths and weights of rigid elements for flange-valve
-flange combinations when you select the Flange-Valve-Flange check box.

CAESAR II User's Guide

247

Piping Input Reference

The CRANE database contains all flanged and welded fittings in the CRANE steel valve catalog.
The GENERIC database contains information from a variety of sources. In some cases, such as
weights for control valves, information from different sources was found to vary considerably. In
these cases the largest reasonable weight was selected for use in the database. In other cases
only the length of the fitting was available.

The default database, CADWorx Plant, is a subset of the full component database provided
with CADWorx Plant, Intergraph CAS's piping design and drafting software. This database
offers nine different component types (gate, globe, check, control, ball, plug, butterfly valves,
flange pair, and single flange) as well as four different end types (flanged, no-flanged, threaded,
or socket). Selection of flanged-end components or flanges themselves automatically provides
for gaskets.

CAESAR II User's Guide

248

Piping Input Reference

Selecting flanged ends (FLG) for a valve simply adds the length and weight of two
flanges and gaskets to the valve length and weight. NOFLG selects a valve without including the
two mating flanges.
Rigid Type
Specifies the rigid type for the fitting.
End Type
Specifies the end type for the fitting.
Class
Specifies the class for the fitting.
Whole element
Indicates that the selections apply to the whole element.
From end
Indicates that the selections apply to the From end of the fitting.
To end
Indicates that the selections apply to the To end of the fitting.
Both ends
Indicates that the selections apply to both ends of the fitting.
Flange-Valve-Flange
Automatically generates data lengths and weights of rigid elements for flange-valve-flange
combinations.

CAESAR II User's Guide

249

Piping Input Reference

Activate Flange Check
Turns on the flange check.

Add an Element from the Valve Flange Database

1. Type the node numbers for the rigid element in the From and To boxes on the Classic
Piping Input dialog box.
2. Click Valve/Flange

on the toolbar, or click Model > Valve from the menu.

3. Highlight blocks to select the fitting.

4. Select where to insert the new element.
Clicking the Flange Valve Flange check box enables CAESAR II to generate three
RIGID elements whose length and weight are automatically populated with data from the
Valve/Flange database.
5. Click OK to accept the selection.
If the particular selection is valid for the current line size, CAESAR II displays the length of
the element in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes, designates the element as RIGID, and inserts the
weight in the appropriate slot in the Auxiliary box.
The assumed orientation of the rigid is taken from the preceding element. CAESAR II is doing a
table lookup based on line-size and is inserting the selected table values into the dialog box.
Should the line size change at a later time, you must come back and ask CAESAR II to perform
another table look-up for the new size.
Use of the CADWorx Plant database offers several benefits over the use of other databases:

The CADWorx Plant database provides more accurate component lengths and weights
than those typically available in the GENERIC database.

Using the same component data for CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant modeling promotes
the efficiency of the bi-directional interface between them. Total sharing of data files and
specifications between CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant occurs when the CADWorx
installation option is saved in the registry. In that case, you should edit the third line of the
[Link] file to name the actual CADWorx specifications. These specifications are
located in the CADWORX\SPEC subfolder. For more information on editing this file, see
below.

You can more easily modify the CADWorx Plant Valve and Flange database, because the
specification files and component data files are ASCII text files. This process, which involves
possibly editing the [Link], specification, and data files, is described below.

The [Link] file is structured as follows:

The first line must read [Link]. It must not be changed.

CAESAR II User's Guide

250

Piping Input Reference

The second line is editable. It must begin with a zero. The second number on the line
designates the number of specifications to make available. It can be a maximum of 7.

The third line is editable. It lists the available specifications. Each specification name must
consist of 8 characters, padded by blanks on the right. The specification names designate
files with extension .SPC, located in the SPEC subfolder of the CAESAR II or the CADWorx
Plant specification folder (if the CADWORX option is set in the registry).

The fourth line is editable. It designates whether each specification uses English or Metric
nominal pipe sizes. Seven blanks followed by a 1 indicate an English nominal, while seven
blanks followed by a 2 indicate a metric nominal.

The last five lines are not editable.

The specification files are located in the SPEC subfolder of the CAESAR installation folder. They
are designated by the extension .SPC. The specification files correlate pipe size and component
with the appropriate data file. Individual lines in the file list the library subfolder to the LIB_I or
LIB_M folder, depending on whether English or Metric units are in effect), file name (with an
extension equal to the library name), range of nominal pipe sizes for which the specified data file
applies. You can edit any of these items. The last item on the line is the component type
number, and should not be changed. Other items in the file pertain to CADWorx Plant and are
not significant to CAESAR II.
The data files hold the dimensional and weight values. Data files for different types of
components hold different types of data. The data columns are labeled. The only data with
significance to CAESAR II involves the weight and lengths. You can change these values. The
following is a typical component data file for weld neck flanges:

CAESAR II User's Guide

251

Piping Input Reference

You can find more extensive information on editing these files in the CADWorx Plant User
Manual.

Expansion Joint
Displays the Expansion Joint Database <data file> and Expansion Joint Modeler
dialog boxes.

Expansion Joint Dialog Box

CAESAR II automatically generates an expansion joint model from catalog data that you select.
The catalog used may be selected in the CAESAR II Configure/Setup routine. You decide where
in the model the expansion joint should go, that is, between which two nodes, and the modeler
assembles the completed joint. Selectable joint styles include Untied, Tied, Hinged, Gimbaled,
Untied-Universal, and Tied Universal expansion joints.

CAESAR II User's Guide

252

Piping Input Reference

An example selection session is illustrated as follows. Of particular note are the following items:

You can select any of four material types. These material types are used to adjust the
bellows stiffnesses to the actual highest temperature in the model. This typically results in
higher stiffnesses than those shown in the vendor's catalog because the stiffnesses in the
catalog may be based on a higher design temperature.

You can select any combination of end types.

Bellows, liner, cover, rod, and hinge or gimbal assembly weights are looked up from the
stored database and automatically included in the expansion joint model.

For universal joints, the minimum allowed length is stored, but when the available space
exceeds the minimum allowed, you are prompted for the length that you want the expansion
joint assembly to occupy.

The last screen that follows shows the "proposed" model before it is inserted into the
CAESAR II input. This allows you to investigate the characteristics of several joints before
settling on one.

Actual maximum pressure ratings are also a part of the database, and in many cases
exceed the nominal pressure rating shown in the catalog. You can use pressures up to
these actual allowed maximums.

Allowed joint movements are also stored as part of the database and are printed with each
proposed model. These values should be recorded for use in checking the model after a
successful design pass has been completed.

Pressure thrust is included in the modeling considerations for each of the expansion joint
styles, removing this concern.

In the case of "tied" expansion joints, rigid elements are used to model the tie-bars.
Restraints with connecting nodes are used to contain the pressure thrust, and to keep the
ends of the expansion joint parallel.

CAESAR II User's Guide

253

Piping Input Reference

CAESAR II User's Guide

254

Piping Input Reference

Expansion Joint Modeler - From / To Nodes

Indicates whether the expansion joint assembly should be installed at the From end or the
To end of the current element if the length of the current element exceeds the length of the
expansion joint assembly.

CAESAR II User's Guide

255

Piping Input Reference

Expansion Joint Modeler - Hinge/Pin Axis
Specifies the direction cosines which define the axis of the hinge pin of the expansion joint
assembly. That is, the axis about which the joint can rotate.
For example, if the hinge can rotate about the X-axis, type:1.0 0.0 0.0

Expansion Joint Modeler - Tie Bar Plane

Specifies the direction cosines corresponding to a line drawn from the mid-point of one tie
rod to the mid-point of the other. If an expansion joint has only two tie rods permitting
rotation about the plane defined by the tie rods, type the direction cosines which, when
crossed with the axis of the expansion joint assembly, define the plane.
In this example, you would enter VX as1.000, VY as -0.000, and VZ as 0.000.

Expansion Joint Modeler - Overall Length

Specifies the length of the universal joint. Alternatively, select the check box to default the
joint length to the shortest recommended length. The length of a universal joint is variable
depending upon the length of the intermediate spool piece.

Expansion Joint Modeler - Expansion Joint Database

Specifies the database to use in the modeler. The current expansion joint vendor provides
multiple databases.
You can change the default expansion joint vendor in Expansion Joints (on page 59).

Torsional Spring Rates

Type a large value such as 1E10 if the torsional spring rate is unknown. This produces
conservative results. These results are conservative with respect to loads and
non-conservative with respect to displacements. It is very common to rate the bellows
allowed torsion by the amount of rotation that it experiences. Large torsional stiffnesses
result in small, seemingly satisfactory rotations. When results from a piping analysis are
communicated back to the expansion joint manufacturer, it is important to report both the
rotation and the stiffness used to produce that rotation. For more information, see Expansion
Joints (on page 885).

Expansion Joint Design Notes

It was common practice in the expansion joint industry to design expansion joint bellows and
hardware (restraints) for the system pressure, and pressure thrust only. Generally, no
consideration was given to the system deadweight or thermal forces. This poor practice was
tolerated before the wide-spread use of piping analysis software because:

The deadweight and thermal forces are normally small compared to the pressure
and pressure thrust.

Designers laid out expansion joints so that the thermal forces were very low and
therefore not significant.

The allowable stresses used in hardware designs have a significant safety factor.

CAESAR II User's Guide

256

Piping Input Reference

The forces and moments generally were not known. Today, when an expansion joint is
modeled, it is recommended that al information relating to the joint be submitted to the
expansion joint manufacturer. This is especially true of the forces and moments resulting
from the operating loads, such as deadweight, thermal forces, and operating deflections.
Better evaluations of the loading conditions on the bellows and hardware simply help the
manufacturer make sure that his design is suited for the intended installation and service.

Expansion Joint Modeler - Modeler Results

Click Build to insert the proposed model of the expansion joint assembly into the piping
system model.
The Bellows Catalog Data (at the bottom of the Expansion Joint Modeler dialog box)
shows the bellows stiffness parameters and allowable movements from the vendor catalog.
Note the allowable movements for later evaluation of the expansion joint.

Expansion Joint Modeler Notes

Expansion joints cannot be inserted on an element that is either already rigid or an
expansion joint. Bends, however, can be at either end of the element where you are
inserting the expansion.
You do not have to give a length on the element where you are inserting the expansion joint.
The six types of expansion joint models supported currently by CAESAR II are:

Untied single bellows

Tied single bellows

Hinged single bellows

Gimbaled single bellows

Untied universal bellows

Tied universal bellows

The four possible joint end types are:

Welded-end

Slip-on flange

Weld neck flange

Plate flange

If the length of the element to receive the expansion joint model is given, then the expansion
joint assembly should fit within this length. If it does not, a warning message displays. If a
universal joint has been requested, the length of the receiving element should be at least
long enough to accept the smallest possible universal length, as defined by the minimum
spool piece size from the manufacturers' database. If the element to receive the universal
expansion joint model is zero, you are prompted for the expansion joint length. If the
element to receive the universal expansion joint model had an original length, then the
maximum possible space available for the universal is reported and you are asked for the
length. If the element to receive any expansion joint is longer than the expansion joint to be
inserted, you are prompted for the end of the element where the joint should be inserted.
Overall universal lengths should be limited to about 10 times the pipe diameter before the
center spool piece weight begins to become a problem.

CAESAR II User's Guide

257

Piping Input Reference

If there is a bend at either the From or the To end of the element to receive the expansion
joint, then you must define the length of the element.
To find extra nodes needed for the expansion joint model, CAESAR II starts with the
element From node and increments by one until a sufficient number of nodes not used
elsewhere in the model are encountered. It is these nodes that are reported in the
Proposed-model dialog box.
Angular stiffnesses reported are given in the current set of units. Only the translational
stiffness label is found at the top of the bellows stiffness report. If you are unsure about the
rotational stiffness units, they may be seen either in the help screens or in the UNITS report
from the LIST option.
You are prompted to adjust the stiffness for the expansion joint if the highest operating
temperature is given and not equal to the expansion joint catalog design temperature. This
reduces bellows stiffnesses greater than those published in the catalog.
Bellows, tie-bar, and hinge/gimbal assembly weights are combined together and distributed
over the expansion joint rigid end pieces.
The expansion joint modeler makes every attempt possible to generate nodes in the model
that are unique. Inspect the nodes that are generated closely and make sure that you do not
use them unintentionally in any future model building.
Review the generated CAESAR II models and be sure that everything is consistent with
your intentions.

Expansion Joint Styles

The following six styles of expansion joints are built automatically by CAESAR II. With each
type is a brief discussion of its use when associated with hot, pressurized equipment
protection.
Untied
Specifies a single unrestrained expansion joint. This type of joint can absorb movement in
all directions. It also subjects the system to pressure thrust which must be designed for,
external to the expansion joint. This type of joint should almost never be used by the
expansion joint novice needing to protect hot, pressurized equipment. Guide restrictions
limiting displacements into the joint, regular maintenance problems because of all of the
support hardware away from the bellows, and pressure thrust make using and analyzing this
type of bellows difficult.
Tied
Specifies a tied single expansion joint that is capable only of transverse (lateral) movement.
Pressure thrust is restrained internally by the tie-bars. This is a good, dependable expansion
joint to use for several reasons:

You do not have to design for pressure thrust.

Tie rods provide stability to the overall joint. This makes working with it in the field
easier.

There is a single displacement mode (lateral). You can compare this mode directly
to the rated lateral movement in the catalog without the need for the relatively
complicated geometric calculations in the Expansion Joint Rating.

The disadvantages to the single tied expansion joint are:

CAESAR II User's Guide

258

Piping Input Reference

They are fairly stiff in practice. This joint often does not provide the needed flexibility
to sufficiently reduce the loads on sensitive equipment.

The tie-bar assembly does provide some nonlinear restraining effect on flexibility
that is unaccounted for in the analysis. This may be appreciable when the bellows
displacement becomes large, such as when it is most critical that it perform as
predicted.

Hinged
Specifies a single hinged expansion joint. This type of joint can only angulate about one
axis. Pressure thrust is retained internally by the hinge mechanism. Hinge joints are often
used in pairs to absorb considerable displacement in a single plane while transmitting very
little load to any attached equipment. The piping system must be designed to assure that
displacement into the hinges is planar for all types of thermal and occasional loadings to be
experienced by the system. Where pressure loads to be absorbed by the hinge mechanism
are high, considerable friction forces can be generated that somewhat limits further flexing
of the joint. This transmits larger loads than expected back into the piping system.
Gimbal
Specifies a single gimbal expansion joint. This type of joint can angulate about two axes.
Gimbaled joints restrain both pressure thrust and torsion by the gimbal mechanism. These
joints are often used in pairs to absorb considerable displacement in several directions,
while transmitting very little load to any attached equipment.
U-UNIV
Specifies an untied universal expansion joint. This type of unit is similar to a single
unrestrained expansion joint. It can absorb movement in all directions and normally has a
much higher capacity for transverse (lateral) deflection than a single bellows. An untied
universal subjects the system to pressure thrust loads which must be designed for external
to the expansion joint. Even when pressure is negligible, these joints can often be difficult to
use in practice unless proper guiding of the thermal displacement protects the joint against
unwanted movement.
T-UNIV
Specifies a tied universal expansion joint. This is similar to a tied single joint, except that the
tied universal has much higher transverse (lateral) movement capability. Pressure thrust
loads are restrained internally by the tie-bars. These types of joints are a good option where
vertical pipe runs close to the equipment are available. The tie-bars restrict movement to a
single mode (lateral) and eliminate the worry about pressure thrust design. Longer lengths
result in smaller lateral stiffnesses, but overall length is somewhat restricted by the weight of
the center spool. A good rule of thumb is to restrict the overall length of the assembly to ten
times the pipe diameter. Be careful not to put the assembly into compression, as the tie bar
mechanisms are not designed to take this load and damage to the bellows can result.
These six types of expansion joints are not all of the types available, but they are the most
common. If a joint is needed that is not covered by the above, select the style closest to that
required. Edit the resulting input after the EJ Modeler is complete and processing returns to
the Classic Piping Input dialog box.

CAESAR II User's Guide

259

Piping Input Reference

Available Expansion Joint End-Types
The following expansion joint end-types are available in the CAESAR II modeler.
Welded
Indicates standard pipe beveled for welding.
Slipon
Indicates a slip-on flange.
WN
Indicates a weld neck flange.
Plate
Indicates a plate flange in accordance with the manufacturers catalog.
Slip-on, weld neck, and plate flanges may not be available in all diameters and pressure
ratings, such as over 24-in. diameters. Consult the catalog for specific interface dimensions,
codes, and materials. When you select a combination that is not available, you are warned
that there are no database values for his particular geometry and line size.

Bellows Application Notes

The following considerations are important when selecting the number of convolutions for a
particular application:
Movement Capability
The more convolutions selected, the greater the movement capacity of the bellows. It is a
common practice to perform a quick hand calculation to estimate the required movement
and then select the number of convolutions from the rated movements in the catalog. After
an analysis is performed, the exact evaluation of the bellows performance can be made
using the expansion joint rating module provided with CAESAR II.
Spring Forces
Specifies the spring forces. The more convolutions that you select, the lower the resulting
bellows spring forces become. This is particularly critical when the expansion joint is located
near rotating equipment.

CAESAR II User's Guide

260

Piping Input Reference

Available Space
The more convolutions selected, the greater the required overall length. If working in a
confined area, the number of convolutions may be restricted by the space.
Pressure Rating
The pressure rating should be equal to, or larger than the design pressure of the system. In
many instances, larger pressures can be tolerated than the rated pressure shown. In many
small diameter expansion joints, the same bellows is used in 50, 150, and 300 psi-rated
joints. The CAESAR II modeler contains the true minimum pressure limits for all of the
bellows in the database, and checks the maximum pressure in the line (as specified) against
the allowed pressure. This allows you to select a smaller joint with more flexibility for certain
applications.
Materials
Bellows can be formed from most ductile materials that can be welded by the automatic
T.I.G. butt welding process and yield a homogeneous ductile weld structure. Because the
specific media content varies from system to system, and most media data specified prior to
system operation is approximate with considerable fluctuation possible, it is not feasible to
make specific recommendations concerning bellows materials. The following are the four
most common bellows materials that are supported by CAESAR II:

304SSA240 tp 304 Stainless Steel

316SSA240 tp 316 Stainless Steel

600IncInco 600 High Nickel

625IncInco 625 High Nickel

Liners
Internal liners smooth the flow through the expansion joint. The smooth flow reduces
pressure drop and also prevents flow-induced vibration of the bellows. Liners are generally
recommended when the flow velocity exceeds 1.3 ft./sec. as a minimum, and are definitely
recommended when the flow velocity exceeds about 25 ft./sec. Consult the manufacturers
catalog for additional information. Heavy gage liners should be used in high velocity or
turbulent flow systems. Also, heavy liners should be used when the media is abrasive.
Covers
External covers protect very thin bellows, (0.010 to 0.090 in.) from mechanical damage.
Covers are also recommended when the line is insulated.

CAESAR II User's Guide

261

Piping Input Reference

Title Page
Displays the title page of the current job. This is up to 60 lines of text that is stored with
the problem, and may be used for detailing run histories, discussing assumptions, and so
on. These lines may be printed with the output report through the input echo.

Hanger Design Control Data

Specifies hanger design criteria for the current model.

Hanger Design Control Data Dialog Box

Spring hanger design can be globally controlled by typing data into the Hanger Design Control
Data dialog box.
The Hanger Design Control Data dialog box contains five items that also appear on each
individual hanger design in your model. The software populates values you specify in this dialog
box on the individual Hangers auxiliary dialog box in the Classic Piping Input. However, you
can override those values on a hanger-by-hanger basis on the individual Hangers auxiliary
dialog box.
The hanger values you can set globally include:

Short-range springs

Rigid support displacement criteria

Maximum-allowed travel limit

Hanger table

Multiple load-case design option

CAESAR II User's Guide

262

Piping Input Reference

You can specify the number of temperature cases the software uses in the hanger design in the
Hanger Design Control Data dialog box, and these values are used in the hanger design
algorithm. In addition, you can specify if the software calculates the actual cold loads. For
examples of incorporating spring hanger designs into your models, see the CAESAR II
Application Guide.

No. of Hanger - Design Operating Load Cases

Specifies the number of load cases to be considered when designing spring hangers. This
value may be between 1 and 9 and corresponds to the number of thermal load cases to be
used in hanger design. If more than one operating case is to be considered in the hanger
design then you must also select the Multiple Load Case Design Option to use.

Calculate Actual Cold Loads

Indicates that CAESAR II makes one additional pass after the hanger design is completed
and the hangers are installed, to determine the actual installed loads that should be used
when the hangers are first installed and the load flanges adjusted in the field. This
calculation tends to be important in the following situations:

The stiffness of the piping system is small.

The stiffness of the hanger selected is high.

The hanger travel is large. This is usually more important in smaller diameter piping
systems that are spring supported away from equipment nozzles.

Actual cold loads should be calculated when springs in smaller diameter lines are to be

CAESAR II User's Guide

263

Piping Input Reference

adjusted in the cold position.

Allow Short Range Springs

Allowable Load Variation (%)

or as may be more familiar:

The Allowable Load Variation value is typed as a percentage. For example, type twenty
five percent as 25.0.

Rigid Support Displacement Criteria

CAESAR II User's Guide

264

Piping Input Reference

cases. Rigid rods are double-acting restraints. In some cases these can develop large hold
down forces that do not really exist because the support has lifted off, or because the rigid
rod has bowed slightly. When this condition develops, you should rerun the hanger design
inserting single directional restraints where rigid rods were put in by CAESAR II.
Do not replace hangers with rigid rods in very stiff parts of the piping system. These parts
are usually associated with rotating equipment or vessel nozzles that need to be protected.

Maximum Allowed Travel Limit

Hanger Table
Specifies the active hanger table.
The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
1. Anvil

2. Bergen Power

3. Power Piping

4. NPS Industries

5. Lisega

6. Fronek

7. Piping Technology

8. Capitol

9. Piping Services

10. Basic Engineers

11. Inoflex

12. E. Myatt & Co.

13. Sinopec

14. BHEL

15. CASTIM 2000 (formerly Flexider)

16. Carpenter & Paterson

17. Pipe Supports Ltd.

18. Witzenmann

19. Sarathi

20. Myricks

21. China Power

22. Pipe Supports USA

23. Quality Pipe Supports

24. PiHASA

25. Binder

26. Gradior

27. NHK

28. PSSI GmbH

29. Seonghwa

30. Mitsubishi

CAESAR II User's Guide

265

Piping Input Reference

31. Yamashita

32. Sanwa Tekki

33. Techno Industry

34. Hesterberg

35. Spring Supports Mfg. Co.

36. Senior

37. Unison

38. Wookwang

Additional design options are invoked if you use the following check boxes.

Extended Range

Cold Load

Hot load centered (if possible)

Hanger stops are easier to remove.

There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold
or when the stops are removed.

Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.

Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.

Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations.

A hot vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle
connection is a typical configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be
designed is at the elbow adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because
the difference between the hot and cold loads counters the moment produced by
the vertical thermal expansion from the anchor.

CAESAR II User's Guide

266

Piping Input Reference

The disadvantages to cold load design are:

In some systems, the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value

proportional to the spring rate times the travel in the hot condition.

Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.

Multiple Load Case Design Options

Specifies the multiple load case design option. Whenever more than one thermal load case
is used in the hanger sizing algorithm, CAESAR II must know how you want to weigh the
results from the different cases. There are currently 13 different methods that you can use
for multiple load case hanger design selection. These 13 methods are described in greater
detail under the hanger auxiliary data section.
1. Design per Load Case #1
2. Design per Load Case #2
3. Design per Load Case #3
4. Design per Load Case #4
5. Design per Load Case #5
6. Design per Load Case #6
7. Design per Load Case #7
8. Design per Load Case #8
9. Design per Load Case #9
10. Design for the maximum operating load
11. Design for the maximum travel
12. Design for the average load and the average travel
13. Design for the maximum load and the maximum travel

CAESAR II User's Guide

267

Piping Input Reference

Seismic Wizard
Selects a particular Seismic Code and its associated data.
The wizard computes the applicable g factor and fills in the appropriate data cells.
X-component is set into Vector 1, Y-component is set into Vector 2, and Z-component is set
into Vector 3; all other load components are set to zero.
A warning displays if the current element has uniform loads defined.
Because the wizard sets data in gravitational loading, you must verify other uniform load
definitions for correctness.

Seismic Design Code

Specifies the design code and edition for the current job. You can select from several different
seismic code standards.

270

Piping Input Reference

CFE Sismo Static Seismic Wizard
Computes the static g factor based on the Manual De Diseno por Sismo (Seismic Design
Manual) 1993 methodology.

CFE Sismo Seismic Wizard

CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.

Uniform Loads Tab

Seismic Zone (CFE)

Specifies the seismic zone. Zone D is the zone of highest seismic activity. Zone A is the
least active. For more information, review the Manual De Diseno por Sismo (Seismic
Design Manual). A map with different regions displays on page 1.3.29.

CAESAR II User's Guide

271

Piping Input Reference

Structure Group (CFE)
Specifies the structural group as defined in the following table:
Group A

High Degree of Safety

Group B

Intermediate Degree of Safety

Group C

Low Degree of Safety

Soil Type (CFE)

Specifies the soil type as defined in the following table:
I Hard Soil

Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers with propagation velocity bo = 700

m/s or modulus of rigidity >= 85000 t/m2

II Med. Soil

Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of

propagation which meets the condition: c5 5c cc

III Soft Soil

Ground deposits with fundamental period of effective vibration of propagation

which meets the conditions: c5 5c cc

First Mode Period (CFE)

Specifies the period of first natural mode of the piping system in seconds.
Increase Factor (CFE)
Specifies the increase factor. The Mexican Earthquake Code considers an SRSS type effect
on the structure. This value scales up the earthquake loads in a linear (Scalar) fashion. This
value is traditionally 1.118 and should always be greater or equal to 1.0.

CFE Sismo Example

For further information on CFE Sismo, see the example below.
For seismic zone D and soil type I, the following parameters are found in Table 3.1.
a0 = 0.50
C = 0.50
Ta (s) = 0.0
Tb (s) = 0.0
r=
If T> Tb , then
a = c ( Ta / Tb)r = 0.50 * (0.6 / 1.15) ^ 0.5 = 0.3612
For a structure group of A High Safety, the acceleration is multiplied by 1.5

CAESAR II User's Guide

272

Piping Input Reference

a = 0.3612 * 1.5 = 0.5417
CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.

NBC Static Seismic Wizard

Computes the static g factor based on the NBC 2005 methodology.

CAESAR II User's Guide

273

Piping Input Reference

Importance Factor IE (NBC)
Specifies the importance factor as defined in Article [Link] as defined in the following table:
Importance Category

Importance Factor (IE)

Low

0.8

Normal

1.0

High

1.3

Post-disaster

1.5

Site Class (NBC)

Specifies the site classification for the seismic site response from Table [Link].A.
Sa(0.2) (NBC)
Specifies the spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 seconds as defined in Paragraph
[Link].(1).
Component Elevation Ratio [hx/hn] (NBC)
Specifies the component elevation ratio. The values hx and hn are the height above the
base to level n or x respectively. The base of the structure is the level at which horizontal
earthquake motions are imparted to the structure.
Component Amplification Factor [Rp] (NBC)
Specifies the force amplification factor from Table [Link].
Element or Component Factor [Cp] (NBC)
Specifies the component factor from Table [Link].
Component Force Amp. Factor [Ar] (NBC)
Specifies the component response modification factor from Table [Link].

279

Piping Input Reference

9. After the dialog box is complete, Click Design to start the optimization procedure.
The progress of the design scheme displays. After the loop is designed, you are informed of
how much pipe and how many bends were required to create the loop.
10. Click Undo
to restart the Loop Wizard using different loop types. You can use this
information to find the most economical implementation.

When the optimizer finishes, the new expansion loop is inserted into the selected element.

CAESAR II User's Guide

280

Piping Input Reference

11. Run a final analysis to verify all results. There are instances where the optimizer reports an
error. Examples of such situations are: (a) requesting a loop insertion in an element that is
not long enough, or (b) setting an impossible target maximum.
Selecting the special loop type enables CAESAR II to select the best loop to reach the
indicated target. This loop type is indicated on the dialog box by a lightning bolt. The best
characteristic of each loop is based on the relative cost of bends to straight pipe. When you
select the lightning bolt loop type, the Bend Cost Factor box activates. The default value of
100 indicates that a bend costs 100 times as much as the equivalent length of straight pipe.
Adjust this value as necessary.

CAESAR II User's Guide

281

Piping Input Reference

Loop Optimization Wizard Overview
The Loop Optimization Wizard automates the sizing of expansion loops in a piping system.

Optimization Type
Specifies the type of output value to optimize or reduce. You can use the Loop Design
Wizard to improve Stress levels or Restraint load components for any piping loop in a
model.
Load Case (for Design)
Specifies the load case for which to reduce an output value. Adding a loop may well solve a
problem in a displacement-driven load case (Operating or Expansion) but not in a
force-driven load case (Sustained or Occasional).
After you select the Load Case value, the software displays Stress or Restraint Load
output values for review and selection.

Target Stress
Specifies the target level to which you would like to reduce the output value. Typing a stress
value (or a Load, in conjunction with a Load Component type) acts as a filter, showing only
elements which have stress values exceeding that level. This target value also becomes the
stress or load for which the selected target (Maximum System Stress, Restraint Load
Component, or Node) is optimized.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.

Max. Stress
Optimizes the maximum stress level in the system (as opposed to a stress level at a single
node) to the value in the Target Data box.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.

At Node
Specifies either the node at which the stress level is to be optimized (and the element upon
which that node is located) or the node at which a restraint load component is to be
optimized (along with the Load Component Type). Double-click one of the entries in the
Element/Node/Stress list or a Load Component in the Restraint Load to automatically fill
in these entries.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.

CAESAR II User's Guide

282

Piping Input Reference

On Element
For Stress Optimization:
Specifies the element on which the node for which the stress level is to be optimized is
located. Double-click one of the entries in the Element/Node/Stress list to automatically fill
in this entry.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.
For Restraint Load Optimization:
Specifies the restraint load component which is to be optimized. Double-click one of the
Load Component entries in the Restraint Load list to automatically fill in this entry.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.

Element/Node/Stress/Restraint Load Component

Displays the items which you can double-click to automatically fill in the entries designating
the item (either nodal stress or restraint load component) for which the results should be
optimized.

Create Loop on Element

Specifies the element which is replaced by the loop. You can select the element from the list
or from the model. The Loop Optimization Wizard can only be used to substitute loops in
place of single elements.

Loop Type
Specifies the general configuration of the loop.

Type #1 - places the loop at the From end of the original element in the
plane of the Major Direction.

Type #2 - Places a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the From
end of the original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the
plane of the Minor Direction.

Type #3 - Places the loop in the middle of the original element in the plane
of the Major Direction.

Type #4 - Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop in the middle of
the original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane
of the Minor Direction.

CAESAR II User's Guide

283

Piping Input Reference

Type #5 - Places the loop at the To end of the original element, in the plane
of the Major Direction.

Type #6 - Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the To end of
the original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane
of the Minor Direction.

Type # 7 - Builds a loop of the same size as the original element.

Type # 8 - Builds a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop of the same size
as the original element, first in the Major Direction and then in the Minor
Direction.

Type #9 - Causes CAESAR II to try all eight loop types and find the most
economically efficient solution based on total pipe length and number of bends.

Bend Cost Factor

Specifies the relative cost of a bend relative to straight pipe. This value is used when
CAESAR II is asked to select the most economic loop design. For example, if a bend
(including hardware, fabrication, and other costs) costs 100 times as much as the same
length of straight pipe, then the appropriate value would be 100.0.

Width to Height Ratio

Specifies the loop height to width ratio that should be maintained when building the loop.
Available options are 2.0, 1.0, 0.5, and none.
Select none if the segments of the selected loop configurations still coincide with the original
element run. For example, segment #4 of Loop Type #1, segment #6 of Loop Type #2,
segments #1 and #5 of Loop Type #3, segments #1 and #7 of Loop Type #4, or segment #1
of Loop Types #5 and #6 have a length equal to exactly the length of a long radius bend.
This entry does not apply in the event that Loop Types #7 or #8 were selected. In this case,
the height to width ratio is not used. The height varies as necessary and the width is held
constant to the length necessary to make up the original element length. This last option is
often preferable in areas where there is limited room for wide loops.

CAESAR II User's Guide

284

Piping Input Reference

Draw Cube
Graphically creates the anticipated area where the loop is installed. This cube may then be
resized or moved to reflect the preferred area for the loop. The Loop Optimization Wizard
tries to design a loop that fits in the allocated space.

Major Direction
Specifies the direction and distance of the primary direction of the loop.
Minor Direction
Specifies direction and distance of the secondary direction of a 2-D loop.

Major Direction Available Space

Specifies the maximum available space for the loop in the major direction.

Minor Direction Available Space

Specifies the maximum available space for the loop in the minor direction.

Design (Button)
Begins the loop optimization process. If an appropriate loop cannot be designed, you must
change some of the parameters and try again.

Line Numbers
Displays the Line Numbers dialog box.

Line Numbers Dialog Box

Controls options for line numbers. You can set visibility options for line numbers from the 3D
model on the piping input and the Graphical Output in the Static Output Processor.
Press SHIFT + click to select multiple line numbers.
Create from Selection
Creates line numbers from the selected elements. You can only create line numbers for
selected elements from the piping input 3D model.
Remove Line Number
Deletes line numbers from the selected elements. You can only remove line numbers for
selected elements from the piping input 3D model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

285

Piping Input Reference

You can also right-click select Remove Line Number (in Piping Input only).
Reset Settings
Returns visibility settings to their default settings. Use the drop down to specify to Reset
Visibility, Reset Color, or All settings.
You can also right-click on a line and select one of the reset options.
<type here to search>
Limits the elements that display in the Line Numbers dialog box to those line numbers and
node numbers that match the text in this field. Clear this field to display all elements. You
can search on a line number name or a node number.
Show/Hide
Turns the display of line numbers for elements on or off.
Visibility
Specifies the opacity of elements. 100% indicates that the element is opaque. 0% indicates
that the element is completely translucent, or invisible.
Color
Displays the Color dialog box from which you can specify a color for the element.
Name
Specifies the name of the element.

Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes

Displays the Node Selection dialog box. Access this function from the Classic Piping Input
dialog box by clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or Intersection
SIF scratchpad on the Input Tools toolbar.

Node Selection Dialog Box

Controls options for selecting the node.
Enter intersection Node Number to be reviewed - Specifies the number of the node
where you want to evaluate the stress intensification factors.
OK - Displays the Review Intersection SIF's dialog box.

Review Intersection SIFs Dialog Box

Controls options for reviewing intersection SIFs.

CAESAR II User's Guide

286

Piping Input Reference

The boxes that display in this dialog box depend upon the piping code you select for the
job. The following list details all possible boxes that the software can display in this dialog box.
The first section shows the most common dialog boxes, but other code-specific inputs below
that.
Node
Specifies the node number where the stress intensification exists. CAESAR II displays the
To node of the current element by default. You can type any node in the system, but it is
most often at a pipe intersection or joint.
If the node is at an intersection, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for all pipes going to the
intersection if the intersection Type is specified. You only need to type the intersection type
once. CAESAR II finds all other pipes framing into the intersection and applies the
appropriate SIFs.
If the node is at a two-pipe joint, such as a butt weld, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for the two
pipes going to the joint node if the joint Type is specified. You only need to specify the joint
type once. CAESAR II finds the other pipe completing the joint and applies the appropriate
SIFs.
If the node is not at an intersection or a joint then, leave the Type box blank and type user
defined SIFs in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes. Entries in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes only
apply to the element on which they are defined.
User defined stress intensification factors must be greater than or equal to one.
CAESAR II calculates and displays code-defined SIFs in the Intersection SIF scratchpad.
Access this scratchpad from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment
> Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or
Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input
Tools toolbar. You can modify parameters used in the scratchpad so that you can observe
the effects of different geometries and thicknesses. Most changes made in the scratchpad
can be automatically transferred back into the model.
If the node is on any part of the bend curvature then the following applies:

CAESAR II applies user-defined SIFs to straight pipe going to points on a bend

Long - Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal
diameter.

Short - Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe
diameter.

3D - Indicates a 3D bend. The radius is equal to 3 times the nominal diameter.

5D - Indicates a 5D bend. The radius is equal to 5 times the nominal diameter.

Bend Type Specifies the bend type. For most codes, this refers to the number of attached
flanges and can be selected from the list. If there are no flanges on the bend, leave Type
blank. A bend should be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within two
diameters of the bend that significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize.
When using the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe,
this entry refers to the material laminate type and may be 1, 2, or 3. These laminate types
are

All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.

Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and
external surface tissue reinforced layer.

Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and
external surface tissue reinforced layer.

The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors
for the BS 7159 and UKOOA Codes only.

CAESAR II User's Guide

294

Piping Input Reference

For ISO 14692, only type 3 filament-wound laminate is considered.
Bend Angle Displays the bend angle.
Fitting Thickness Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the
thickness of the matching pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall
thickness, then the inside diameter of the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the
matching pipe. CAESAR II calculates section modulus for stress computations based on the
properties of the matching pipe as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn,
and once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for
the flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius
r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of
the matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT
value). More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
Code

For Tn:

For Mean Radius Calculation:

B31.1

Fitting

B31.3

Fitting

Matching Pipe

B31.4

Fitting

Matching Pipe

B31.5

Fitting

Matching Pipe

B31.8

Fitting

Matching Pipe

B31.8 Ch VIII

Fitting

Matching Pipe

SECT III NC

Fitting

Matching Pipe

SECT III ND

Fitting

Matching Pipe

Z662

Matching Pipe

NAVY 505

Fitting

B31.1 (1967)

Fitting

SWEDISH

Fitting

Matching Pipe

CAESAR II User's Guide

295

Piping Input Reference

BS 806

N/A

STOOMWEZEN

N/A

RCC-M C/D

Matching
Pipe

Matching Pipe

CODETI

Fitting

NORWEGIAN

Fitting

FDBR

Fitting

BS 7159

Fitting

UKOOA

Fitting

IGE/TD/12

Fitting

EN-13480

Fitting

Matching Pipe

GPTC/Z380

Fitting

Matching Pipe

The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend
stress calculations.
Number of Miter Cuts Displays the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. When you
type a number, CAESAR II checks if the mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If
the bend is determined to be widely spaced, and the number of miter cuts is greater than
one, the bend should be broken down into n single cut widely spaced miters, where n is
the total number of cuts in the bend. The number of cuts and the radius of the bend are all
that is required to calculate the SIFs and flexibilities for the bend as defined in the B31
codes. The bend radius and the bend miter spacing are related by the following equations:

Closely Spaced Miters

R = S / (2 tan )
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts

Widely Spaced Miters

R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0

r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0
= Bend Angle / 2.0
Seam Weld Indicates that the bend is seam welded.

B31.3

CAESAR II User's Guide

296

Piping Input Reference

IGE/TD/12

Used by IGE/TD/12 to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded
elbow fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This option is only available
when IGE/TD/12 is active.
Matching Pipe OD Specifies the outside diameter of the matching pipe. This is used in
the average cross sectional radius calculation:
r2 = (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter as entered
WT = Wall Thickness of attached pipe
The B31.3 (1993) code defines r2 as the mean radius of matching pipe.
Matching Pipe Thk Specifies the match pipe wall thickness. You should not subtract any
corrosion. All SIF calculations are made ignoring corrosion. This wall thickness is used in
the mean radius (r2) calculation as defined in the piping codes.
Elastic Modulus Specifies the elastic modulus among EC, E1 to E9. This value is used
for the pressure stiffening calculations.
Pressure Specifies the pressures among PMax, P1 to P9, PHydro and none. This value
is used for the pressure stiffening calculations.
Bend In-Plane SIF Displays the SIF under in-plane bending.
Bend Out-of-Plane SIF Displays the SIF under out-of-plane bending.
In-Plane Flexibility Factor Displays the flexibility factor under in-plane bending.
Out-of-Plane Flexibility Factor Displays the flexibility factor under out-of-plane bending.
Flexibility Characteristic Displays the pipe factor.
Recalculate - Displays the SIFs after you enter a different set of data. If you change the
input data, CAESAR II allows you to transfer the data back to a CAESAR II model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

297

Piping Input Reference

Special Execution Parameters

Displays the Special Execution Parameters dialog box. Click Environment > Special
Execution Parameters. These parameters remain set for that particular job.

Print Forces on Rigids and Expansion Joints

Indicates whether forces are printed on rigid elements and expansion joints. Forces and
moments are not normally printed for these elements because the forces that act on these
elements can usually be read directly from the forces that act on the adjacent pipe elements.
Select this option to cause forces and moments to be calculated and printed for all rigid
elements and expansion joints in the system.

CAESAR II User's Guide

298

Piping Input Reference

Print Alphas and Pipe Properties
Indicates whether the software prints alphas and pipe properties. CAESAR II prints the
thermal expansion coefficients along with the pipe, insulation, fluid, and refractory weights in
the error checker. This report can be very useful during error checking to help identify
possible problems in the temperature or weight input specifications. Rigid elements and
expansion joints are treated the same as straight pipe. Rigid weights and insulation cladding
factors are not reflected in this table.

Activate Bourdon Effects

Specifies the Bourdon effects option to use. Choose the option from the drop list to activate
the Bourdon pressure effect. The Bourdon pressure effect causes straight pipes to elongate,
or displace along their axes, and causes curved pipes or bends to elongate along the line
that connects the bends near and far nodes. If the Bourdon effect is not activated, there are
no global displacements due to pressure. The Bourdon effect is always considered when
plastic pipe is used, regardless of the setting of the Activate Bourdon Effects option.
By default, CAESAR II does not include the Bourdon effect in the analysis of steel piping
systems. That is, there are no displacements of the system due to pressure.
As an option, you can include pressure displacement effects. These effects can be
appreciable in long runs of pipe or in high pressure, large diameter bends adjacent to
sensitive equipment.
Bourdon effects are almost always important in fiberglass reinforced plastic piping systems.
For this reason the Bourdon (Translational) is automatically turned on for all FRP pipe runs
and bends.
Two Bourdon options are available:

Use the Translation only option when the elbows in the system are forged or
welded fittings and can reasonably be assumed to have a circular cross section.

Use the Translational & Rotational option when the bends in the system are
fabricated by the hot or cold bending of straight pipe. In these cases the slight
residual ovalization of the bend cross section, after bending, causes the bend to try
to straighten out when pressurized. Fixed end moments are associated with this
opening. These fixed end moments do not exist when the original shape of the bend
cross-section is circular.

CAESAR II User's Guide

299

Piping Input Reference

Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts
Specifies how branch error and coordinate prompts display. You are prompted for two
pieces of information:

The loop closure tolerance.

The global coordinates of the first point of the piping system and each following
piece of the piping system that is not connected to the first.

This data is needed the first time CAESAR II prepares a global geometry calculation. This
calculation is made on three different occasions:

Before preprocessor plots are generated.

Before global coordinate reports are built.

Before error checking is performed.

Alternatively, you can select Edit > Global and specify the global coordinates to avoid any
prompting.
There are several major uses for this flag:

Set the loop closure tolerance.

Define the elevation of the piping system for wind/wave load calculations.

Give the proper east-west or north-south coordinates for dimension checks.

Move parts of the system around in the plotted output for visual checking.

CAESAR II User's Guide

303

Piping Input Reference

Bandwidth Optimizer Options
Orders the set of equations that represent the piping system for both static and dynamic
analyses. The optimizer may be run with a variety of different switch settings. The default
settings were chosen for their combination of ordering efficiency and speed. These settings
should suffice for the majority of piping systems analyzed. For systems having greater than
100 nodes, or that are highly interconnected, the following optimum parameters should be
used.

Optimizer Method = Both

Next Node Selection = Decreasing

Final Ordering = Reversed

Collins Ordering = Band

Degree Determination = Connections

User Control = None

If the User Control is set to Allow User Re-looping, CAESAR II lets you interactively try as
many different combinations of switch settings as needed. When the most efficient ordering
is obtained, you can continue on with the analysis. This interactive prompting for
optimization parameters is done in the analysis level processing.

Include Piping Input Files

Includes other piping models in the current piping model. Piping models added may have a
node offset applied and can optionally be rotated about the Y-axis before being added.

Include Piping Files Dialog Box

File Name - Displays the file to include. Click Browse to browse for the file name. The file need
not reside in the current data directory.
Read Now - Specifies whether or not the file is read immediately. Select Y if the file is to be read
immediately and stored as part of the current input. The file read may be edited as part of the
current job. Select N, if the file is to be read for plotting and fully processed only during error
checking. The file read may not be edited as part of the current job.
RotY - Specifies the angle about the Y axis to rotate the model before including it in the current
job. The rotation applies regardless of the Read Now setting.
Restraints, uniform loads, and concentrated forces are not rotated. Additionally, the
rotation of the model can be accomplished from the List utility For more information, see Rotate
(on page 334).
Inc - Specifies the increment to be added to all of the nodes in the model before including it in
the current job. The node increment applies regardless of the Read Now setting.

CAESAR II User's Guide

304

Piping Input Reference

Including Structural Input Files

Includes existing structural model into the current job. The structural model must have been
built and successfully error checked in the structural steel preprocessor accessed from the
CAESAR II menu. For more information, see Structural Steel Modeler (on page 397).
After a structural model has been built, you can include it into any piping input. You can include
the names of up to 20 different structural models. After this is done, you can plot and analyze
the structural model with the piping model. The structural models need not reside in the current
folder.
Piping systems are usually tied to structural steel models by the use of restraints with
connecting nodes. Make absolutely sure there are no node number conflicts between structure
and pipe models. After you define a restraint with a connecting node between the pipe and
structure, CAESAR II knows where to put the structure in the resulting preprocessor plot. If no
connection between the pipe and the structure is given, the structure is plotted starting from the
origin of the piping system. In this case, the resulting plot may not meet your expectations.

Advanced PCF Import (APCF)

The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) option provides an interactive, customizable way of
importing Piping Component Files (PCFs) to the CAESAR II piping environment.

Provides more control and flexibility over element sequencing and node numbering

Provides the capability to build and verify the model in an incremental way

Provides the capability to selectively update the CAESAR II model

An interactive interface is built directly into the CAESAR II input environment that:

Does everything that the PCF batch process does (See PCF/Intergraph Smart 3D PCF doc
in External Interfaces section)

Builds the piping input model on a line-by-line basis if needed

Provides the ability to define and control node numbering

Uses the Block Operations modeling tools to ease modeling changes.

You can perform the APCF function to create a new model or add to any existing job model. The
CAESAR II input model constructed from the PCFs assumes the Units System of the current
job, plus automatically attach/intersect the piping generated from the PCF to the existing piping,
if appropriate.
The PCF file format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. A PCF is a
flat text file containing detailed information about the piping system components. The
information is extracted from a CAD system. Details on the format of the PCF and its capabilities
can be obtained from Alias.

Converting the PCF

1. Before you begin the conversion, determine:

Which files will be converted

How they should be combined

CAESAR II User's Guide

305

Piping Input Reference

How they should be numbered on the first conversion process.

2. Click Environment > Advanced PCF Import (APCF) to begin the conversion of a PCF(s)
to a CAESAR II Piping Input file.
The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box displays.

3. Click Choose Files.

4. Select the PCF(s) to convert.
A PCF has a file extension of .pcf.

CAESAR II User's Guide

306

Piping Input Reference

PCFs may be selected all at once or each one may be added to the conversion list just prior
to being converted. Only those files with the check box selected are processed.

Files can be arranged in the order you want to process them by dragging-and-dropping the
file names in the conversion list.
In the example, the elements of the header, which includes files TPA-551-0012, 551-00513,
521-90100_BL, 521-90100, and 521-90102, are processed first.
Vents off of that header are processed next (in the example, 521-12101, 521-12113,
521-12112, 521-12111, 521-12138, 521-12137, 521-10103, 521-10104, 521-90461).
Finally, the separate detached section files (551-0012, 551-0041) are processed last.
5. Set the conversion options listed in the lower left-hand pane.

Condense Options

Piping Input Reference

Warnings in [Link] file

During the conversion process, Status Messages display in the Message Area in the lower right
of the dialog box.
These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name [Link], where XXXX
represents the name (less the extension) of the Combined CAESAR II file (in the case where
many PCFs are being combined into a single CAESAR II model) or the first CAESAR II file in
the list (where one or more PCFs are being combined into individual CAESAR II models).
1. Click Save Warnings to save the warnings to a different file.

Topics
PCF Interface Custom Attributes..................................................313
How to Use the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) ............................328

PCF Interface Custom Attributes

PCFs contain custom attributes in the form of component-attribute<n>. Intergraph Smart 3D can
generate PCFs with ISO_STRESS PCF configuration. This configuration assures that a number
of various data fields are passed in specific PCF data fields.

COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 = Design pressure

COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2 = Maximum temperature

COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 = Material name

COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4 = Wall thickness (reducing thickness in the case of reducing

components)

COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE5 = Insulation thickness

COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE6 = Insulation density

COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE7 = Corrosion allowance

COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE8 = Component weight

COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE9 = Fluid density

COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 = Hydro test pressure

The units associated with the values of these attributes are defined by including a descriptive
unit label after the value. For example, the pressure attribute, COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1, can
be specified as COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 15.3 barg. If the unit label chosen (barg) is not
one of the labels recognized by CAESAR II as defined through Tools > Create/Review Units
on the CAESAR II Main menu, then you must include that label in the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT
file in the CAESAR II System folder.

The only PCF SUPPORT attribute that is not ignored is the SUPPORT-DIRECTION
attribute. It must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.

One note on the Material Number setting is that the selected material is applied to a piping
element as the default only if the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not
specified or recognized.

CAESAR II User's Guide

313

Piping Input Reference

You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping files before beginning the
conversion process.
You may use default mapping files if the values fit our model. There are a number of mapping
files that define various values. Locate these files in the CAESAR II System folder.

PCF Unit Mapping

The PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file maps the PCF Units name to the conversion factor used to
convert it to the CAESAR II internal units (English).
This file defines three columns:
CAESAR II Unit

Displays the internal unit used by the software

PCF Unit

Displays the user-supplied unit label

Conversion from CAESAR II -> PCF

Displays the conversion factor used to convert the

user-supplied unit to a CAESAR II internal unit

Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by
spaces and preceded by the "*" character.
All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any
unit specified by the PCF component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit
as defined by the Tools > Create/Review Units dialog box on the CAESAR II Main menu needs
to be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file.
CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for the
attribute that is displayed by the software according to the units specified in the configuration
options (except that temperature from C to F will also add the 32 ).

To Modify the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II System folder.
This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to
make changes to fit your model.
1. Open the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.

CAESAR II User's Guide

314

Piping Input Reference

An example of the CAESAR II default file is shown below.

2. Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed.
3. Save, and close the file.

PCF Material Mapping

The PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file maps PCF material names to a corresponding CAESAR II
material number. Note that the first line is currently reserved to the CAESAR II version number.
The match in this file must be an exact match. If no match is found, then the software searches
the CAESAR II material database to find the "best match" (where the "best match" tries to do an
intelligent match, adjusting for dashes, spaces, "GR", "SA" versus "A", and so forth) for the
material name.
PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 is used by the software to set the material attribute for each
component. If the COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 value is not defined or recognized, the software
applies the default material as specified by the Material Number value in the dialog box.
Any material specified by the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 which is not a standard
CAESAR II material as defined in the Tools > Materials dialog under the Material > Edit
menu must be mapped inside the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file.

To Modify the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT File

This file is located in the CAESAR II System folder.

CAESAR II User's Guide

315

Piping Input Reference

This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to
make changes to fit your model.
1. Open the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.
The CAESAR II default file looks like this.

2. Modify any of the materials definitions.

3. Save and close the file.
PCF Restraint Mapping
The PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II restraint types corresponding to PCF
support/restraint names.
The PCF SUPPORT attribute is used by CAESAR II to apply supports at the specified
coordinates. Only the SUPPORT-DIRECTION identifier is interpreted by the software if no
match is found for a particular support NAME in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file. The
SUPPORT-DIRECTION identifier must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or
SOUTH.
In order to fine-tune the support configuration placed on the imported model by CAESAR II for a
given PCF SUPPORT component, the PCF support NAME identifier value needs to be mapped
in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.

CAESAR II User's Guide

316

Piping Input Reference

The example below shows a typical PCF SUPPORT component, highlighting the support NAME
value which should be used to define CAESAR II support mapping.

To Modify the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT File

Locate the file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to
make changes to fit your model.
This file defines the CAESAR II function corresponding to PCF support/restraint names.
1. Open the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the restraints definitions.
3. Save, and close the file.
In the example, the Support type VG100 corresponds functionally to two CAESAR II supports:

+Vertical support (weight support)

Guide, each with friction coefficients equal to 0.3

This file supports a wide range of support functions, plus the key words MU= (for friction) and
GAP= (to define gaps in the restraint).

CAESAR II User's Guide

317

Piping Input Reference

Syntax for each support type is:
<Support Name>

<N->

<MU=>

Note that it is identical to the VHGR shown in the figure above.

These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward
movement. In CAESAR II, they are typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the
vertical axis is set).

CAESAR II User's Guide

321

Piping Input Reference

side-to-side restraint

If it is always installed vertically, then it is defined as a VERTical and a GUIde. If it is possible

that the restraint may be rotated about the pipe to be installed in any direction, then use the
second definition, which represents restraint along the direction of the support as well as lateral
to the support and pipe.

VERTAXIAL

+VERT

MU=0.3

LIM

MU=0.3

or
VERTAXIAL

+VERT

MU=0.3

This restraint maps to two functions:

+VERT support

An axial restraint. The axial restraint can be defined equally as LIM or A (as A corresponds
to restraint along the direction of the pipe centerline).

SWAYSTRUT

CAESAR II User's Guide

324

Piping Input Reference

These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint along
the line of action of the sway strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to the
direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these restraints is B (restraint along the
support direction).

ANCHOR

ANC
These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be
defined as Anchors ("ANC").

PENETRATION

GAP=aMM

-C

GAP=bMM

CAESAR II User's Guide

325

Piping Input Reference

-VERT

GAP=cMM

+VERT

GAP=dMM

In the example above, the pipe (and the local A-axis) is running into the page. With B up, +C is
to the right.
Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different
directions. It may require trial and error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions
correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases, you may want to model
the restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file.

PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping

The PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II SIF data to be applied at the intersection of
tees and olets. The file also provides support for some SIF keywords.
Stress Intensification Factors (SIF) are not assigned a separate PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE or defined in any other way inside PCFs. In order to tune Stress
Intensification Factor settings of imported PCF components, CAESAR II provides the
PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT mapping file.
The file defines five columns:
SKEYS

PCF components use SKEYS to indicate how their subtype is

used within the general component group.

CAESAR II SIF TYPE

Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as

shown in the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below.

PAD=X.X UNITS

(optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness, including the

applicable unit (for example, PAD=10 MM)

Ii=[Link]

(optional) Should be set to the in-plane SIF of the component.

2. Click the Choose Files button.

A PCF must have a file extension of .pcf.

You can add one or multiple files to be converted.

Remove PCF(s) from the File Name list by pressing Delete on the keyboard.

The selected file(s) displays in the File Name portion of the dialog box.
3. Enter the Start Node and Increment value for each of the file names.
4. Change any of the Conversion Options in the lower left-hand pane as needed.

Condense Rigids (on page 331)

Condense Tees (on page 1162)

Condense Elbows (on page 332)

Use Pipe Materials Only (on page 332)

Combine PCF Files (on page 332)

CAESAR II User's Guide

329

Piping Input Reference

Model Rotation (on page 332)

Diameter Limit (on page 333)

Material Number (on page 333)

Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness (on page 333)

5. Click the Begin Processing button to initiate the conversion process.

During the Conversion Process, Status Messages display in the Message Area in the lower
right of the PCF Interface dialog box.
These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name [Link], where XXXX
represents the name (less the extension) of the Combined CAESAR II file. The log file is
placed in the selected CAESAR II output file folder.
6. View your new CAESAR II input model.
For example, this CAESAR II model was created from the sample file [Link]:

Elements are ordered and nodes are numbered in a logical manner.

The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_UNITS_ MAP_TXT file.

Materials

Diameter and Wall Thickness

Corrosion Allowance and Fluid Density

Operating Conditions (Temperature and Pressures) also are translated.

CAESAR II User's Guide

330

Piping Input Reference

The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.

Restraints

The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file.

Tees convert with the correct SIFs in this case a Welding Tee and a Weldolet.

Besides supports/restraints, boundary conditions such as equipment connections transfer (in

this example, at all three nozzle connections are set). The user can easily change the
thermal displacements.

Weights of in-line components, insulation thickness and density, all material properties, and
Allowable Stress information transfer correctly.

Line numbers are assigned according to the name of the PCF file.

In this example, the output displays the applicable CAESAR II warnings, which are informational
only.

Phantom components (PCF items marked as "CONTINUATION" or "STATUS DOTTED"

or "MATERIAL LIST EXCLUDE") are ignored during the conversion process.

Tee components are modeled using the thickness of the matching pipe.

Node Numbering preferences (start node and increment) are based on the Node
Numbering Increment set in the active CAESAR II Configuration file.

Start Node
Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire
model is renumbered using this value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must
set this option and Increment (on page 331) to zero.
Increment
Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the renumbering
of the model. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node (on page 331) to
zero.
Condense Rigids
Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For
example, a valve with adjacent gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid
element.
If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to (change
of cross section, change of operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so forth).
The default value is TRUE.

CAESAR II User's Guide

331

Piping Input Reference

Condense Elbows
Controls whether the software treats elbows as two designated elements. When set to TRUE,
this directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather, it
is condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels.
The default value is TRUE.
Use Pipe Materials Only
Instructs the software to apply pipe materials only as defined by the PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 identifiers.
Activating this option replaces the material of various components (elbows, valves, flanges,
reducers, tees, and so forth) with the appropriate piping material, where possible, leading to a
much more homogenous CAESAR II model. Matching components to their corresponding piping
material is done by assembling a matrix of Pipe Spec/diameter combinations, based the
available data transmitted in the PCF. Where an exact match is available, the material
substitution is made. Where piping materials are available for the Pipe Spec but not the
diameter, a match is made to the closest diameter. Where no piping material is available for the
Pipe Spec, the component material is retained. For example, A106 Grade B would be applied
but A234 Grade WPB would be ignored.
If you choose to condense Rigids, Tees, or Elbows, set Use Pipe Materials Only to
TRUE.
Combine PCF Files
Converts and combines PCFs in the dialog box into a single CAESAR II model. You are
prompted for the name of the combined CAESAR II file.
When you merge multiple PCFs into a single CAESAR II model using Combine PCF
Files, line numbers are assigned based on the originating PCF name.
Model Rotation
The rotation of the +X-axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis
away from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation.
Select +90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative
90-degrees.
Z can also be vertical based on special execution setting.
Alternatively, you can rotate the model after importing it to CAESAR II. Use the Rotate
command on the Block Operations toolbar.

CAESAR II User's Guide

332

Piping Input Reference

Diameter Limit
Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the
size (nominal diameter) below which pipes will be ignored. Enter a diameter limit of -1.000 to
include all pipe sizes that you want to import into CAESAR II.
Material Number
Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material
attribute explicitly set otherwise.
The default is low carbon steel (material number 1).

Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness

Select the default schedule of the pipe to be used in case the wall thickness of the pipe cannot
be determined from the PCF.

Show Informational Messages

Displays informational messages upon the conversion of nominal to actual diameters, schedule
to wall thickness, and specific gravity to density. Click Environment > Show Informational
Messages.
Clear the check box to suppress these messages.

Reset View on Refresh

Controls the way graphics behave when you add or modify elements. When this option is
turned on, CAESAR II resets the plot to the default view each time you refresh.

CAESAR II Configuration
Opens the configuration file for review and editing. For more information, see Configuration and
Environment (on page 48).

CAESAR II User's Guide

333

Piping Input Reference

Global Menu
Performs actions associated with commands you can perform on a group of elements, such as
the block operations (Rotate, Invert, and so forth).

Rotate
Rotates elements defined in the block.
Displays the Block Rotate dialog box. This dialog box rotates the block through some angle
about the X, Y, or Z axis. For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 377).
Unskew
Returns skewed geometry to an orthogonal orientation.
Setup
Determines what in the block should be rotated, including restraints, displacements,
force/moments, uniform loads, flexible nozzles, flanges, and element characteristics. The
default is for all items that appear in the block to be rotated with the block.
Degrees
Specifies the degrees of the rotation.
Add Bends
Specifies that the software includes bends in the block rotation.

Delete
Deletes the selected block of elements.
A confirmation message displays before the delete action is taken.
For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 377).

Duplicate
Duplicates elements in a block.
Displays the Block Duplicate dialog box. You can make identical copies of the block. You can
also make a mirror image by flipping the chosen elements in one of the orthogonal planes.
Mirror imaging is done on the piping delta dimensions only. That is, restraints are copied but not
mirror imaged. A +Y restraint does not become a -Y restraint when mirrored in the XZ plane.

CAESAR II User's Guide

334

Piping Input Reference

Setup - Restraints, displacements, forces/moments, uniform loads, nozzles, flanges, and

To invert a block of elements

1. Select the block of elements (nodes) you want to invert, either from the Elements dialog box
or from the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line Numbers dialog box.

If you select a block of elements from the Elements dialog box or from the Line
Numbers dialog box, the corresponding elements are selected (highlighted) in the 3D
Graphics panel.

If you select a block of elements in the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line Numbers
dialog box, the corresponding elements are NOT selected (highlighted) in the Elements
dialog box.

2. Click the

Invert icon on the Block Operations tool bar.

Alternatively, right-click in the Elements dialog box to display the menu and click Block
Operation > Invert.
The node numbers are reversed.
Notice that nothing changes in the 3D Graphics pane- only the node numbers are
changed.
3. Review the Elements dialog box to verify the new node number assignments.
The From Node and To Node values are renumbered for the selected elements.
For example:
Element Number

Original node numbers

New node number

95 - 100

115 - 110

100- 105

110 -105

105 - 110

105 - 100

110 - 115

100 - 95

For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 377).

Change Sequence
Changes or rearranges the sequence (order) of elements while preserving the geometry.

CAESAR II User's Guide

338

Piping Input Reference

Why use the Change Sequence command?
Typically, the Elements dialog box displays by the order of elements entered during the input
process. The order in the list is important because when you specify some particular input
values for an element in the list, that value propagates to all the elements in the list following it
UNTIL the value is explicitly changed.
When you import piping model data (in the form of PCFs) from other piping input design
software such as Intergraph Smart3D, CAESAR II imports the elements in one sequence.
However, that sequence may not be what you want. For example, you may want all the high
pressure elements to be listed together. This reduces the number of unique input fields to verify
and can help you to logically organize the model. You can re-organize elements in a way so that
those with similar carry-forward properties are placed consecutively.

To change the sequence of elements

1. Select the block of elements (nodes) whose sequence you want to change, either from the
Elements dialog box, from the 3D Graphics pane, or from Line Numbers dialog box.
2. Click Change Sequence

in the Block Operations tool bar.

Alternately, you can right-click in the Elements dialog box, and then click Block Operations
> Change Sequence.
The Change Sequence dialog box displays.

3. Choose where in the list you want to move the selected block.

To move the selected block after a given element, click Follow.

To move the selected block before a given element, click Precede.

The cursor changes to indicate the operation is in progress.

CAESAR II User's Guide

343

Piping Input Reference

Refractory Thickness
Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the refractory thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.

Refractory Density
Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color. Use this option to see the
refractory density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.

Insulation Thickness
Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different color. Use this option to
see the insulation thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have
been made. Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model.
You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.

Insulation Density
Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color. Use this option to
see the insulation density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.

Cladding Thickness
Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the cladding thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.

Cladding Density
Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color. Use this option to see the
cladding density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.

CAESAR II User's Guide

344

Piping Input Reference

Insul/Cladding Unit Wt.

Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a different color. Use this
option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.

Temperatures
Displays the temperature parameters that you have defined.

Pressures
Displays the pressure parameters that you have defined.

View Menu
Performs actions associated with viewing the model.

Toolbars
Changes the toolbars. The toolbars can be displayed or hidden by clicking View > Toolbars and
checking or unchecking the toolbar.
You can customize where toolbars display and their locations. Click View > Toolbars, or
right-click the toolbar, and then select Customize. You can also customize toolbars by pressing
Shift and dragging buttons to new positions.
Customize Dialog Box
Controls options for customizing the CAESAR II interface.
Click Reset on the Customize dialog box to undo changes.

Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Options Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Keyboard Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Menus Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
The Classic Piping Input and the 3D Model include the following toolbars.

Standard Toolbar (on page 346)

Standard Operators Toolbar (on page 347)

Standard Views Toolbar (on page 348)

Display Options Toolbar (see "Display Options" on page 349)

CAESAR II User's Guide

345

Piping Input Reference

Cutting Planes Toolbar (on page 350)

Markups Toolbar (see "Markups" on page 349)

Plot Tools Toolbar (on page 350)

Legends Toolbar (on page 351)

Edit Mode Toolbar (on page 352)

CAESAR II Tools Toolbar (on page 353)

Navigation Tools Toolbar (on page 353)

Reset and Refresh Tools Toolbar (on page 354)

List Operations Toolbar (on page 354)

Input Tools Toolbar (on page 355)

Block Operations Toolbar (on page 356)

Aux Tools Toolbar (on page 357)

Edit Tools Toolbar (on page 358)

Reference CAD Models Toolbar (on page 359)

Wizards Toolbar (on page 359)

Markups
The Markups toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains the following functions.
Freehand Markup - Draws a line in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the line.
Rectangle Markup - Draws a rectangle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the
rectangle.
Circle Markup - Draws a circle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the circle.
Annotate - Adds a brief description to the model. The annotation may be especially useful
in the output processor. The annotation text box is a single line. Annotation is printed and
saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not saved to HTML.
Annotate w/Leader - Adds a brief description to the model. This annotation includes a
leader line. Drag the annotation box to extend the leader. The annotation text box is a single
line. The annotation with a leader stays with the model when you zoom, pan, rotate, or use
any of the highlight options. Annotation is printed and saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not
saved to HTML.

The markup annotation text box is a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be
changed. The default color is red.

Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.

The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary. They are not saved
with the model. These graphics and disappear from view with any change such as zoom,
rotate, pan, or reset all.

The color, font face, and size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu. For more information, see 3D Graphics Configuration
(see "Configuring 3D Graphics" on page 381).

When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another operator.
(For example, Freehand Markup stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)

CAESAR II User's Guide

349

Piping Input Reference

Cutting Planes Toolbar
The Cutting Planes toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
3D Cutting Plane - Defines the cutting plane for the model. This option is useful when
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers are
not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the model at
a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If cutting
the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom command to
expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command again.
This command can be used along any of the three axes.

Plot Tools Toolbar

The Plot Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains the following functions.
Restraints - Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Restraints.
Anchors - Turns the display of anchors on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Anchors (on page 340).
Hangers - Turns the display of hangers on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Hangers (on page 341).
Displacements - Turns the display of displacements on or off on the current model.
Nozzles - Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off on the current model.
Flanges - Turns the display of flanges on or off on the current model.
Nozzle Limits - Turns nozzle checking on or off on the current model. You can also specify
the size the nozzle limit that displays on the model by clicking the arrow on the icon and
choosing a size.
Expansion Joints & Rigids - Turns the display of expansion joints or rigid elements on or
off on the current model.
Tees - Turns the display of Tees on or off on the current model.
Compass - Turns the display of the orientation compass on or off on the current model. The
compass indicates the X, Y and Z axis direction of the model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

350

Piping Input Reference

CAESAR II User's Guide

358

Piping Input Reference

Reference CAD Models Toolbar
The Reference CAD Models toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input
dialog box or the 3D Model, contains icons that let you import CAD-based models into the piping
input. This toolbar includes the following functions.
CADWorx Model - Opens a CADWorx model for use with this model. If you have already
opened a CADWorx model, click the down arrow on the icon to select Load CWx Model.
For more information, see Open CADWorx Model (on page 231).
S3D/SPR Model - Opens the Load S3D/SPR Model (see "Load an S3D/SPR Model" on
page 390) dialog box. If you have already opened a S3D or SPR model, click the down
arrow on the icon to select other options, including the Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model, Dim
S3D/SPR Model, S3D/SPR Visibility Options. These options only display when you have
a S3D/SPR model already open. For more information, see S3D/SPR Import View (see
"S3D/SPR Model View" on page 390) and S3D/SPR Visibility Options (on page 395).

Wizards Toolbar
The Wizards toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D
Model, contains icons that let you access the most commonly used wizards in piping input. This
toolbar includes the following functions.
Static Seismic Wizard - Opens the Seismic Wizard, which selects a
particular Seismic Code and its associated data. For more information,
see Seismic Wizard (on page 268).
Optimization Wizard - Opens the Optimization Wizard, which assists
with expansion loop design. For more information, see Optimization
Wizard (on page 275).

Import Model Toolbar

The Import Model toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
the 3D Model, contains functions that let you access various import dialog boxes used in piping
input. This toolbar includes the following functions.
Include Piping Files - Opens the Include Piping Files dialog box, which lets you include
other piping models into the current piping model. For more information, see Include Piping
Input Files (on page 304).

CAESAR II User's Guide

359

Piping Input Reference

Include Structural Files - Opens the Include Structural Files dialog box, , which lets you
include structural models into the current job. For more information, see Including
Structural Input Files (on page 305).
APCF - Opens the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box, which provides an
interactive, customizable way to import Piping Component Files (PCFs) into the CAESAR II
piping environment. For more information, see Advanced PCF Import (APCF) (on page
305).

Organization Tools Toolbar

The Organization Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog
box or the 3D Model, contains functions let you organize or move the elements on a model. This
toolbar includes the following functions.
Move Geometry - Selects or moves nodes or node groups on the model.
Move Geometry (X-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the X axis.
Move Geometry (Y-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the Y axis.
Move Geometry (Z-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the Z axis.

Input Card Toolbar

The Input Card toolbar, which you can access from the Structural Modeler, contains the
following functions.
Copy the selected card - Copies the selected card from current card stack.
Paste the previously copied card - Pastes the card you previously copied into the card
stack.
Delete selected card - Deletes the selected card from the current card stack.

CAESAR II User's Guide

360

Piping Input Reference

Limiting the Display

Sometimes it is necessary to limit the amount of information displayed on the screen. This may
be useful when the model is large, or if it has many similar looking branches.
Find - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box
that allows you to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You
can enter the node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only
the From node number, the software searches for the first available element that
starts with that node number. If you enter only the To node number, the software
searches for an element ending with that node number. When the software locates
the element it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can zoom out to better
identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.
3D Cutting Plane - Defines the cutting plane for the model. This option is useful when
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers
are not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the
model at a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If
cutting the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom
command to expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command
again.
This command can be used along any of the three axes.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful
when you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large
model. This command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
For more information, see Range (on page 340).
Line Numbers - Displays the Line Numbers pane which allows graphical editing of
line numbers. You can do the following from this pane.

Assign a new line number to the block of elements that have been selected on the
3D graphical display.

Remove an existing line number.

Set and reset visibility options to hide and unhide elements.

Assign a color to an individual line number.

To reassign one or more elements from one line number to another existing line
number, simply drag-and-drop (move) the elements between existing Line Numbers in
the Line Numbers pane.
When you click the Line Number name in the Line Number pane, the
corresponding elements are highlighted in the 3D pane and are selected to perform
Block operations.

CAESAR II User's Guide

361

Piping Input Reference

Reset
Resets the view to the default settings.

Toggle Graphics Update

Turns graphics updating on or off.

Front View
Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.

Back View
Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.

Top View
Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.

Bottom View
Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.

Left-side View
Displays the model from the left side. Alternatively, press X.

Right-side View
Displays the model from the right side. Alternatively, press Shift + R.

Southeast ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively, press F10.

Southwest ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the southwest.

CAESAR II User's Guide

362

Piping Input Reference

Northeast ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the northeast.

Northwest ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the northwest.

4 View
Displays the model in four windows.
This command automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers, or splitter bars, and
changes the cursor to a four-way arrow. You can change the position of the splitter bars by
moving the mouse. Click to fix the position.
Drag the splitter bars to change the size of the windows. Drag the splitter bars out of the view to
remove those views. You can drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bar to add views.
You can manipulate the image in any of these panes individually.

Review Error Report

Displays the Errors and Warnings dialog box. This option is only available if you have run the
File > Error Check command. For more information, see Error Check (on page 232).
Errors and Warnings Dialog Box

Review Static Results

Displays the results of the static load analysis. This option is only available if you have run
the Edit > Edit Static Load Cases command. For more information, see Edit Static Load
Cases.

Tools Menu
Performs actions associated with toolbars, mini-windows, and importing and exporting
displacements.

CAESAR II User's Guide

363

Piping Input Reference

Reset Toolbar Layout

Sets toolbars to the default layout.

Mini-windows
Displays a list of mini-windows that you can display. Mini-windows provide a quick way to
provide specific types of data.
Node Numbers - Displays the Edit Node Numbers dialog box.
Edit Deltas - Displays the Edit Deltas dialog box.
Pipe Sizes - Displays the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box.
Temps & Pressures - Displays the Edit Operating Conditions
dialog box.
Materials - Displays the Edit Materials dialog box.
Elastic Properties - Displays the Edit Elastic Properties dialog
box.
Densities - Displays the Edit Densities dialog box.
Auxiliary Data - Displays the Auxiliary Data dialog box.
Classic Input - Displays the Classic Piping Input dialog box.

Import/Export Displacements from File

Imports or exports nodal displacements from a file.
CAESAR II Versions 5.10 and later enables you to import and export displacements to and from
a text file. This feature is very useful in situations where you need to define several
displacements in a CAESAR II model. You can import the displacements into a CAESAR II
model with a few mouse clicks instead of manually typing all the displacements in the Classic
Piping Input. A displacements file in the specified format must exist.
This feature works only on From and To nodes using a fixed file (.disp) format for
versions 5.10 and 5.20.
In CAESAR II Version 2016 (8.0) , this feature works on the From and To nodes, CNodes, and
Bend middle nodes in either the fixed file format (.disp), or the comma separated value (.csv)
format. You can easily generate and maintain a displacement file in .csv format using Microsoft
Excel.

CAESAR II User's Guide

364

Piping Input Reference

Import/Export Displacements Dialog Box
Controls parameters for importing and exporting nodal displacements.
Export Displacements To a File
Specifies the file name for the export. Type the full path to the file, or use the browse button
to browse to the file.
Export
Exports the nodal displacements to the specified file.
Import Displacements From a File
Specifies the file name for the import. Type the full path to the file, or use the browse button
to browse to the file.
Import
Imports the specified nodal displacement file.

Displacement File Formats

A displacement file is a flat text file in (versions 5.10 and 5.20), which can be created and edited
by any text editor such as Notepad.
In CAESAR II Version 2016 (8.0) a displacement file can be in either fixed format .disp or
comma separated value format .csv.
For both formats, use * to indicate a comment line in the displacement file. You can type
anything on the line following the *.
Displacement files can have as many comment lines as necessary.
The comment line is not counted in line numbering in the file format descriptions.

Fixed Format
A fixed format displacement file has the .disp extension and this format:
1. The first line has only one the conversion factor value, which is used to divide the
translational displacements (DX, DY, and DZ) to convert them to the internal unit of inches.
2. The second line is either Y axis up or Z axis up to indicate the CAESAR II Coordinate
System that the following displacement data corresponds to.
3. All the remaining lines are displacement data lines:
a. Each line must have 58 values: Node X, Y, Z and 54 displacements for the nodes (6
degrees of freedom times 9 vectors is 54).
b. The first value is a node number.
c.

The following three values, the three coordinates of a node, are ignored.

d. The final 54 values are displacements of the node, in the order: DX1, DY1, DZ1, RX1,
RY1, RZ1... DX9, DY9, DZ9, RX9, RY9, RZ9.

CAESAR II User's Guide

365

Piping Input Reference

e. The first character space is reserved for the comment "*", each of the 58 values must be
12 characters long so the total length of a displacement data line should be 697
(1+58x12) characters long.
f.

The position of each of the 54 displacement values is used to determine its location in a
CAESAR II model. For example, values at position 5, 8, 55 and 58 correspond to DX1,
and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in the model.

g. A value must occupy a 12 character field. When a value has fewer than 12 characters,
you must pad either to the left or right of the blanks to make it 12 characters in length. If
there is no displacement value, a 12 character blank field must be reserved for it.
When creating the blank space use the Space Bar. Do not use the Tab key.

Comma Separated Value Format

A comma separated value format displacement file has the .csv extension and follows this
format:
1. The first line has only the conversion factor value, which is used to divide the translational
displacements (DX, DY, and DZ) to convert them to the internal unit of inches.
2. The second line is either Y axis up or Z axis up to indicate the CAESAR II Coordinate
System that the following displacement data corresponds to.
3. All the remaining lines are displacement data lines:
a. Each line could have 58 values: Nodes X, Y, Z and the 54 displacements for the node (6
degrees-of-freedom times 9 vectors is 54).
b. The first value is a node number, which is required.
c.

The following three values, the three coordinates of the node, are ignored.

d. The final 54 values are displacements of the node, in the order: DX1, DY1, DZ1, RX1,
RY1, RZ1... DX9, DY9, DZ9, RX9, RY9, RZ9. They are optional. You can specify all 54
values, or not a single value, or any number of values in between.
e. Values are separated by commas. The length of a displacement data line is not fixed.
f.

Because each value is followed by a comma, a comma counter is used to determine the
placement of the value in a CAESAR II model. For example, values at positions 5, 8, 55
and 58 correspond to DX1, and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in the model,
respectively.

g. A value can be any number of characters in length. When there is no displacement

value, you can use a zero length or blank field. For example, if a comma is followed by a
comma, or if a comma is followed by blank spaces and then a comma, it means that its
corresponding location in a CAESAR II model has no displacement value.
Generally, the csv format is recommended for a displacement file because it is relatively easy to
generate and maintain in Microsoft Excel. The fixed format of a displacement file is more
difficult to maintain.
A displacement file from version 5.10 or 5.20 cannot be used directly in CAESAR II
Version 2016 (8.0) because the formats are different.

CAESAR II User's Guide

366

Piping Input Reference

Warning Messages
There are three kinds of warning messages:
1. Node xxx is not in the model - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does not exist in
the CAESAR II model.
2. Node xxx could not find an empty location - Indicates that a node in the displacement file
exists in the CAESAR II model but that the software thinks that all displacement slots in the
model have already been occupied by other nodes. In this case, it is still possible for you to
input displacements for the node through the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box.
3. Node xxx does not have displacements - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does
not have a displacement value.
where xxx denotes a node number such as 100.
Generally, when a warning message is issued it indicates that an error exists either in the
displacement file or in the corresponding CAESAR II model. Carefully examine the offending
node in the displacement file or in the corresponding model and correct the error.

Summary Report
The Import and Export Summary reports are generated in the import and export operations.
The reports provide information about the nodes in a displacement file just imported into a
CAESAR II Import model:
1. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import.
2. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import.
3. The number of displacement nodes that have been read in.
4. The number of displacement nodes that are not in the model.
5. The number of displacement nodes that cannot find empty locations in the model.
6. The number of displacement nodes that do not have displacements.
7. The number of displacement nodes that have stored displacements in the model.
8. The number of displacement nodes that are replacing values in the model.
9. The number of displacement nodes that are new in the model.
Similar in operation to the warning messages, the summary report can help you identify potential
problems in a displacement file. However, you should remember the following points:
1. Because every displacement data line in a displacement file has a node number, the total
number of nodes processed is equal to the total number of displacement data lines in the
file.
2. Each displacement data line should have a unique node number. However, if the same
node number appears in many data lines, it would be counted many times. In this case, the
displacement values in the last data line are used in the model, overwriting the previous
values.
3. If no node number appears in a displacement data line, CAESAR II indicates the
corresponding data line number and stops the import process.

CAESAR II User's Guide

367

Piping Input Reference

4. If there is a node in a displacement file that is not in the model, or cannot find a slot in the
model, or does not have a displacement, the displacement file or the model should be
checked carefully to understand the reasons behind it.
5. If a displacement node exists both in the model and the displacement file, the displacement
values from the file are used to overwrite the ones in the model, and this node is counted as
a replacement node.
6. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import should be equal to the
number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import, plus the number of new
displacement nodes.
7. The number of displacement nodes that have stored displacements in the model should be
equal to the number of replacement nodes, plus the number of new displacement nodes.

Exporting Displacements to a File

1. Click Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File.
The Import/Export Displacements dialog box displays.
2. Type the path and name of a displacement file in the Export Displacements To a File box,
or click ... to browse to the file.
3. Click Export to send the nodal displacements to the selected file.
4. Click Done to exit the Import/Export Displacements dialog.
If there are no displacements in a CAESAR II job, an export operation creates a
displacement template file in which all nodes are listed according to the element list.

Importing Displacements from a File

1. Click Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File.
The Import/Export Displacements dialog box displays.
2. Type the path and name of the displacement file in the Import Displacements From a File
box, or click ... to browse to the file.
The Open dialog box displays.

CAESAR II User's Guide

368

Piping Input Reference

Two file formats can be used to create a displacement file:

Fixed format with a .disp file extension.
Commas Separated Value format with a .csv file extension.
By default, displacement files display in comma separated values format(.csv).
You can also choose displacement files with the fixed format (.disp) by clicking
Displacement Import File (*.dsp) from the Files of type list.

371

Piping Input Reference

Excel Example (*.csv) format Displacement File Template

3D Modeler
When you start CAESAR II and start the piping input processor, the software automatically
displays a graphic representation of the model to the right of the Classic Piping Input dialog
box. To increase the window space available for graphics you can hide the Classic Piping
Input dialog box by clicking . The initial view for a job that has never been plotted displays
according to the configuration defaults. These defaults include:

A rendered view - restraints shown

XYZ compass - isometric view

Tees and nozzles highlighted - orthographic projection

The plotting begins by displaying the model in centerline/single line mode to speed up the
process. Then all the elements are rendered one-by-one. Later, the restraints and other relevant
items are added.
The model is fully operational while it is being drawn. You can apply any available option
to the model at any time. The status bar at the bottom displays the drawing progress in the form

CAESAR II User's Guide

372

Piping Input Reference

of Drawing element X of Y. When the plot operation is complete the status message changes
to Ready.

375

Piping Input Reference

Building Models Quickly

CAESAR II has several features that help you build models more quickly from the 3D model.

Select one or groups of elements and right-click the model to access context menus so you
can quickly perform some of your most common tasks. See Performing Single-Element
Operations (on page 376) and Performing Block Operations (on page 377) for more
information.

Limit the items you display on the model to simplify the functions you need to use. See
Limiting the Display (on page 360) for more information.

Use legends to update properties across the current model. See Updating Properties from
the 3D Model (on page 380) for more information.

Performing Single-Element Operations

Access the most frequently used commands through a right-click Element context menu, all
without ever leaving your 3D model. These commands include:

Insert, break, or delete elements

Insert, delete, and edit restraints

Look up valve and flange data from the Valve and Flange Database

Insert or delete rigid elements (such as valves and flanges)

To quickly access single element commands from the 3D model

1. Select any element on the model and right-click the element to see the commands available
from the context menu.

You must unlock the 3D model to access the right-click menu. You must also
right-click directly on the element selected to access the Element context menu.
1. Select the element command that you want to perform.
The software completes the action and moves the cursor to the next logical box on the
piping input.

CAESAR II User's Guide

376

Piping Input Reference

Performing Block Operations

Perform block (global) operations to elements in the model using one of the following methods:

To access Block Operations commands from the 3D model

1. Access the Block Operations commands from one of the following options:
a. Click the Block Operations toolbar, or

b. Select more than one element on the model and right-click to see the block operations
available from the context menu.

You must unlock the 3D model to access the right-click element context menu.
2. Select one of the following options:

Rotate

Duplicate

Delete

Renumber

Invert

Change Sequence
You can also access block operation commands from the Global menu in piping input.

To access Block Operations commands from the Elements dialog box

1. Right-click in the Elements dialog box to display the menu.
2. Click Block Operation.
3. Select one of the sub-menu items to perform the indicated operation.

Rotate

Delete

Duplicate

Nodes

CAESAR II User's Guide

377

Piping Input Reference

Invert

Change Sequence

Status
You can also access block operation commands from the Global menu in piping input.

To define a block of elements in the 3D model

1. Click Select Element
the 3D model.

on the Standard Operators toolbar and select a single element on

The selected element highlights.

To select more than one element, press the Shift key while clicking the additional
elements.
The entire group (block) of elements highlights.
Alternatively, you can click Select Group
box around the items you want to select.

on the Standard Operators toolbar and draw a

The highlighted elements define the set that any Block Operations command affects. A block
can contain any number of elements, from a single element to every element in the model.

To define a block of elements from the Elements dialog box

1. Move the cursor to the first element in the group (block) to be operated on and click the row
number for that item on the far left of the dialog box.
The software highlights the row for the element highlights in the Element dialog box and in
the 3D Graphics pane.
2. Move the cursor to the last element in the group (block) to be operated on, press Shift and
click the corresponding row number.
3. Alternatively, you can Select Group
around the items you want to select.

in the Standard Operators toolbar and draw a box

The entire group (block) of elements highlights.

The highlighted rows define the elements that any block operations affect. A block may contain
any number of elements from a single element to every element in the model.

To define a block of elements by selecting by Line Number

1. Display the Line Numbers dialog box.
2. Select the element or block of elements for which you want to perform a block operation.
The corresponding element(s) highlight in the 3D Graphics pane.
The highlighted rows define the elements that any block operations change. A block may
contain any number of elements from a single element to every element in the model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

378

Piping Input Reference

Limiting the Display

Assign a new line number to the block of elements that have been selected on the
3D graphical display.

Remove an existing line number.

Set and reset visibility options to hide and unhide elements.

Assign a color to an individual line number.

CAESAR II User's Guide

379

Piping Input Reference

Updating Properties from the 3D Model

You can update many of the piping input properties globally from within the Legends dialog box
in the 3D model.

To update a piping input property from the 3D model

1. Select the property you want to update using the Legends toolbar in 3D model.
You can also update many of these properties by right-clicking, selecting Highlights from
the context menu, and then specifying the property that you want to edit.
The Legend dialog box opens with the selected property displayed.
2. Double-click on the property value in the left column to open the Edit box.

3. Type a new value in the Edit box and press ENTER or click anywhere in the dialog box.
The software updates all elements that have the same property value, represented in the
Legend dialog box, on the 3D model, and in the List dialog box.
Currently, the software does not include global update functionality for the following
piping input properties:

Materials

Piping Codes

Forces

Uniform Loads

Wind/Wave Data

Displacements

Pipe Density

CAESAR II User's Guide

380

Piping Input Reference

Configuring 3D Graphics
The CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine remembers the state of the model between sessions.
When you exit and return, the model displays in the same state in which it was last viewed.
To obtain a more uniform look for the graphics, change the color and font options:
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup on the main menu to display the CAESAR II Configuration
Editor dialog box.
2. Open the Graphics Settings category.
3. Set the Always Use System Fonts and Always Use System Colors options to True under
the Visual Options section.
These settings are stored in the computer's registry and CAESAR II always displays the
graphics according to these settings.

If the settings are set to False, then the state of each model is maintained individually as an
XML data file (job- [Link]) in the current data folder. After starting another input session,
CAESAR II reads this XML file and restores the 3D graphics to its previous state. This includes
the rotation and zoom level of the model; color settings, data display, and the current graphics
operator.

CAESAR II User's Guide

381

Piping Input Reference

Option

Description

Colors

Select any color item in the list, then click

to display a Windows color selection
tool. Select the new color. Click Reset All to return all of the settings to CAESAR II
defaults, as defined in configuration,.

Fonts

Selecting any font item in the list, then click

to display the standard Windows
font selection tool. Set the options to meet your requirements and click OK.

Changing the Model Display

You can specify the way the model displays when you open a file. The session can start with a
preset command active (such as Zoom), or start with the last command still active. Similarly, the
graphics can start in a preset view (such as isometric), or in the last rotated zoomed position.

Option

Description

Show Bounding Box

Determines if rotations using the mouse include an outline box

surrounding the model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

382

Piping Input Reference

Hide Overlapped
Text

Prevents text from appearing on top of other text items.

Restore Previous
Operator

Determines whether the software remembers your last command

(operator) between sessions or always defaults to a specified
command.

Restore Previous
View

Determines whether the graphics engine remembers the last displayed

view of the model, or defaults to a specified view.

Default Projection
Mode

Determines the initial projection style of the model.

Visibility

Alters the degree of transparency when translucent pipe is activated.

Increasing this value makes it easier to see through the pipe elements.
The Visibility option is only effective when viewing the model in
rendered mode.

Markers

Displays a symbol denoting the elements end points.

Highlighting Graphics
You can review the piping model in the context of certain data such as by diameter, wall
thickness, temperature, or pressure.
You can make changes to some piping input properties from the Legends dialog box. The
software updates all elements that have the same property value in the model. For more
information, see Updating Properties from the 3D Model (on page 380).
Command

Description

Diameters

Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this
option to see the diameter variations throughout the system or to verify
that diameter changes have been made. Alternatively, press D. A color
key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.

Wall Thickness

Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color.

Use this option to see the wall thickness variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. Alternatively, press
W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.

Insulation
Thickness

CAESAR II User's Guide

Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different

color. Use this option to see the insulation thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in
the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.

383

Piping Input Reference

You can change the display to cladding thickness or refractory
thickness by selecting that option from the list.

Cladding Thickness

Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different

color. Use this option to see the cladding thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation thickness or refractory
thickness by selecting that option from the list.

Refractory Thickness

Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different

color. Use this option to see the refractory thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation thickness or cladding
thickness by selecting that option from the list.

Material

Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this
option to see the material variations throughout the system or to verify
that changes have been made. Alternatively, press M. A color key
displays the materials defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.

Piping Codes

Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use
this option to see the piping code variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made.

Corrosion

Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different

color. Use this option to see the corrosion variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.

Pipe Density

Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use
this option to see the pipe density variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays the pipe
densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.

Fluid Density

Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use
this option to see the fluid density variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays the fluid
densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.

CAESAR II User's Guide

384

Piping Input Reference

Insulation Density

Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color.

Use this option to see the insulation density variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to cladding density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or refractory density by selecting that option from the list.

Cladding Density

Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color.

Use this option to see the cladding density variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or refractory density by selecting that option from the list.

Insul/Cladding Unit Wt. Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a
different color. Use this option to see the variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation density, cladding density, or
refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Refractory Density

Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color.

Use this option to see the refractory density variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
You can change the display to insulation density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or insulation density by selecting that option from the list.

The Legend dialog box can be resized, docked, or removed from view.

You can still zoom, pan, or rotate the model while in highlight mode. You can also use any of
orthographic projections and single line or volume modes without affecting the model
highlighted state.

Clicking one of the highlight commands a second time cancels the coloring effect.

If you print the model while it is in highlight mode, the color key legend displays in the upper
left corner of the page, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the
view.

CAESAR II User's Guide

385

Piping Input Reference

Manipulating the Toolbar

You can rearrange or remove buttons on toolbars. There are two methods to make these
adjustments.

Right-click the toolbar, and click Customize.

Remove or reposition the button using drag and drop.

To remove buttons from the toolbar click the down arrow located at the end of each toolbar and
then click Add or Remove Buttons. Turn on the check box to add buttons to the toolbar. Clear
the check box to remove buttons. To rearrange buttons, press ALT and then drag the button to
a different location. To restore the CAESAR II default toolbar configuration, click Reset .
For more information, see Toolbars (on page 345).

Displaying Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, and

To move elements on the 3D model

1. Click Move Geometry
to display marker control points at all nodes and tangent points.
On bends, the marker control points display on the far weld-line.
2. Click and drag the cursor to select the nodes to move.
3. Click any of the selected nodes.
The mouse is in move mode. The mouse movement is clamped to either the x, y, or z axis.
4. To change the axis, press Tab or click one of the Axis commands on the Edit Mode
toolbar.
5. Click to specify the new location.
The model geometry is updates.
6. Alternatively, you can type the magnitude of the movement. If you type a single number, the
movement is applied to the currently selected axis. You can move in multiple directions at
once by typing <x-value>, <y-value>, <z-value>.

CAESAR II User's Guide

389

SECTION 5

S3D/SPR Model View

CAESAR II provides functionality to load Smart 3D (S3D) or SmartPlant Review (SPR)
reference models either partially or in full. You can then rotate and/or filter the loaded S3D/SPR
graphic models to adjust the visibility or isolate specific component classes. This functionality
allows you to interpret the design environment surrounding the piping system and use this
knowledge to readily identify optimal support point and expansion loop locations, judge available
clearances, and so forth. Generally, this functionality provides a more seamless means of
communication across all disciplines involved in the design process when Smart 3D is used as
the overall design platform.
Click S3D/SPR Model
in the Reference CAD Models toolbar in the Classic Piping Input
and select one of the following drop-down menu options:

Load S3D/SPR Model

Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model

Dim S3D/SPR Model

S3D/SPR Visibility Options

Load an S3D/SPR Model

To Load a Full Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review model from a VUE or HSF file
1. From the piping input, click S3D/SPR Model

The software opens the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box.

2. Click Browse and navigate to the location of the VUE or HSF file you want to display and
click Open.
Alternatively, you can type the path name in the field.
3. Select Full Load.
4. Select the degree to rotate the model, if necessary, from the Model Rotation.
The software rotates the model to the angle you specify based on the original angle
of the model when you loaded it.
5. Click Load File to display the graphic file in the CAESAR II 3D Graphics pane.
You can return to the dialog box and select another angle from the Model Rotation.
The software displays the rotation immediately on the 3D graphics pane so that you can
review the rotation before you click Load File.

To Load a Partial Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review model using the Bounding Box
The bounding box functionality allows you to specify which portion of the graphic model to
import into your CAESAR II model.
You can either define the bounding box to the boundaries of the existing CAESAR II model or
select part of the existing CAESAR II model using the Select Group option on the Standard

CAESAR II User's Guide

390

Piping Input Reference

Operators toolbar. Then, click Draw Cube at the bottom of the dialog box, and adjust as
needed.
1. From the piping input, click S3D/SPR Model

The software opens the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box.

2. Click Browse and navigate to the location of the VUE or HSF file you want to display and
click Open.
3. Select Partial Load.
Select Re-Import if you need to refresh or change your visibility settings.
4. Select the degree to rotate the model, if necessary, from the Model Rotation.
The software rotates the model to the angle you specify based on the original angle
of the model when you loaded it.
5. Select the Use Model Bounding-Box option.

Alternatively, select elements in the area of interest by drawing a selection window

around them using the Selection Group option in the Standard Operators toolbar. Then,
select Bounding Box from Selection in the Bounding Box Coordinates.
6. Click Draw Cube at the bottom of the dialog box.
You can then resize or pan the cube in all six dimensions (up, down, left, right, front, back)
until you have enclosed all the parts of the graphic model you want to load into a CAESAR II
model.
As shown in the figure above, the bounding box has six markers:

Anchor Marker - Indicates the starting point of the bounding box (shown in red). You
cannot resize the model using this marker.

CAESAR II User's Guide

391

Piping Input Reference

The three faces to which the anchor marker is connected are fixed (cannot be moved
via any of the markers). You can move the whole bounding box by panning it.

Top Face Marker - Moves the top face (for example, the face that is perpendicular to
top-view-axis of the model, such as Y_Up, Z_Up).

Base Markers - Allows you to re-size the bounding box by selecting any one of three
markers and dragging the mouse.

Base Marker 1 - Moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 3.

Base Marker 2 - Moves these two faces simultaneously.

Base Marker 3 - Moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 1.

Centroid Marker - Sits at the center of the bounding box volume and moves the whole
bounding box from one position to another.

The values for the X, Y, and Z axes display in the Starting Point boxes, depending
on how you manipulate the size and shape of the cube with the graphics markers. The
Starting Point boxes are view-only boxes that are for informational purposes only.
7. Click Load File.
The software loads all components that are inside the bounding box into your model. A
component that originates within the bounding box and extends beyond the boundaries of
the bounding box displays in its entirety. A component that lies completely outside of the
bounding box is totally excluded from the view.

Load S3D/SPR Model Dialog Box

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar of piping input, click S3D/SPR Model

CAESAR II User's Guide

392

Piping Input Reference

The Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box displays.

You can load a partial or a full VUE or HSF model. From the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box,
you can specify to rotate the model upon import into CAESAR II, if needed. You can also specify
a bounding box area, which indicates a section of the model that you want to load into CAESAR
II.

Select a File
Select a Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review VUE or a HOOPS Stream File (HSF) file from your
hard drive.
Alternatively, you can type the path name to the location of your graphics file.

Full Load
Select to load the entire S3D or SPR model from the selected VUE file or HSF.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.

CAESAR II User's Guide

393

Piping Input Reference

Partial Load
Select if you want to load a specified portion of the S3D or SPR model from the selected
VUE file or HSF. This option allows you to use the bounding box to specify the section of the
graphic model to load into your CAESAR II model.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.

Re-Import
Select to re-import the VUE file or HSF.

Model Rotation
Specifies the degree to which the software rotates a graphics model before loading it into the
current CAESAR II model.
The software rotates the model to the specified angle from its original state. In other
words, if you return to the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box and select a new angle of rotation,
the software rotates based on the original angle in which the model was loaded.

Use Model Bounding Box

Select to use the boundaries of your existing CAESAR II model for the graphic model you
are loading.

Bounding Box from Selection

Select to define a bounding box for a selected part of the graphic model in which you are
loading.

Starting Point X
Displays the values for the X, Y, and Z axes, depending on how you manipulate the size and
shape of the cube with the graphics tools. Starting Point boxes are for informational
purposes only and are not editable.

Starting Point Y
Displays the values for the X, Y, and Z axes, depending on how you manipulate the size and
shape of the cube with the graphics tools. Starting Point boxes are for informational
purposes only and are not editable.

CAESAR II User's Guide

394

Piping Input Reference

Starting Point Z
Displays the values for the X, Y, and Z axes, depending on how you manipulate the size and
shape of the cube with the graphics tools. Starting Point boxes are for informational
purposes only and are not editable.

Bounding Volume - Width

Specifies the width of the bounding box volume.

Bounding Volume - Height

Specifies the height of the bounding box volume.

Bounding Volume - Depth

Specifies the depth of the bounding box volume.

Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar, click S3D/SPR Model
from the drop-down list.

and select Show 3D Model

This option is available if there is a S3D model to display.

Dim S3D/SPR Model

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar, click S3D/SPR Model
from the drop-down list.

and select Dim 3D Model

This option is available if there is a S3D model to display.

S3D/SPR Visibility Options

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar, click S3D/SPR Model
Visibility Options from the drop-down list.

and select S3D/SPR

This option is available if there is a S3D/SPR model to display. You can then modify the
graphics to display/hide types of components from the S3D/SPR graphic model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

395

Piping Input Reference

S3D Graphics Environment Dialog Box

Allows you to hide details of the S3D/SPR graphic model that are not needed or could be
distracting while you are working with the model in CAESAR II. For example, if you import a
Smart 3D model using the CAESAR II APCF or PCF import functions and want to reference the
S3D/SPR graphic model for context, the piping elements in the CAESAR II model and the
S3D/SPR graphic reference model can overlap and cause confusion. You can turn off the
display of piping elements from the S3D/SPR Visibility Options, which enables you to compare
the changes more easily.

To Edit S3D/SPR Visibility Options for a loaded VUE file or HSF model:
1. Select S3D/SPR Visibility Options from the S3D/SPR Model
piping input.

drop-down list in the

The S3D/SPR Visibility Options dialog box displays.

2. Select a Visibility percentage from 0% to 100% for each of the five categories of
components in a S3D or SPR model.
The Visibility percentage indicates the percentage of light allowed to pass through the
object. For example, a low percentage value indicates the graphics elements are nearly
invisible.
3. Check the corresponding check box(es) to display the elements for a given category or
select the top check box to display all the categories.
The graphic on the loaded model display based on the specified visibility values.
4. Click the

Hide/show icon to hide or display the S3D/SPR model graphic.

5. Click the
refresh visibility icon to refresh the S3D/SPR model graphic and display the
revised visibility settings.

CAESAR II User's Guide

396

SECTION 6

Structural Steel Modeler

Structural Input or Input > Structural Steel adds structural elements to a model. Using the
modeler, you can perform the following functions:

Open and view structural files.

Enter command and parameter data to build structural models.

In This Section
Structural Steel Model Basics ......................................................397
Structural Steel Graphics .............................................................402
CAESAR II Structural Input ..........................................................403
Structural Steel Input Examples ...................................................406
Insert Menu .................................................................................433
Commands Menu ........................................................................433
Structural Databases ...................................................................474

Structural Steel Model Basics

CAESAR II User's Guide

397

400

Structural Steel Modeler

4. Click File > Save to exit the model.
5. Click Yes.
The software saves, error checks, and builds the CAESAR II modules automatically, and
then opens the Model Generation Status dialog box.
6. Click OK, and close the CAESAR II Structural Steel dialog box to return to the main menu.
7. Click Analysis > Statics to start CAESAR II at the analysis level.
8. Select the load cases you want to analyze.
CAESAR II recommends the weight only (W) load case. If needed, create additional load
cases to address other input loads or concentrated forces.
9. Click Run Analysis

to begin the analysis, and then click OK.

When the analysis finishes, the software opens the Static Output Processor. You can also
click
Static Output to view or print output reports.
10. Close the Static Output Processor.
If needed, click Analysis > AISC to open and independently run a Unity Check (stress
evaluation) for the most heavily loaded elements, as defined by the American Institute of Steel
Construction (AISC). Displacements, forces, and moments are available for each structural
element.

Define job parameters for a new model using the Structural Steel Wizard.

Create a new job file

1. Click File > New.
The New Job Name Specification dialog box appears.
2. In the Enter the name for the NEW job file box, type the name of the structural steel file
you want to create.
You must give files a different name than any piping files, even if you plan to
combine the files for analysis.
3. Select Structural Input.
4. In the Enter the data directory box, type the directory name or browse for a directory.
5. Click OK.
The software displays the Units Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.

Select a units file

Use the Units Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to view the units file the software
uses with your new model. For more information, see Unit (on page 473).
The software automatically selects the units based on the units you specified in the
CAESAR II Configuration Editor.
Select Accept defaults and finish to use all structural options previously selected in Tools
> Configure/Setup.
1. Click Next.
The software displays the Vertical Axis Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.

Select a vertical axis

Use the Vertical Axis Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to specify which is the
veritical axis for your model.
1. In the Select which axis is vertical for this box, select Y or Z.
2. Click Next.

CAESAR II User's Guide

404

Structural Steel Modeler

The software displays the Material Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.

Select material properties

Use the Material Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to specify material properties
for the structural steel models.
1. Type values for Density, Yield Strength, Young's (Young's Modulus), Poisson's Ratio,
and Shear Modulus.
2. Optionally, type one or more thermal expansion coefficient values for Expansion
Coefficients.
You can have up to nine Expansion Coefficient values and use a separate Material
ID for each coefficient.
3. Click Add Another Material if you need to define additional material properties.
The software automatically increases the value of the Material ID by one.
4. Click Next.
The software displays the Cross Section Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.
Use the up and down arrows next to Add Another Material to scroll through all
materials.

Define a cross-section
Use the Cross Section Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to specify the
cross-sections in the model.
1. Click Select Section ID.
The Section ID Selection dialog box appears.
The software defaults the Section ID to 1, but you can type a new ID.
2. Expand the hierarchy as needed, select a cross section and click OK.
You can also type a cross section name in the NAME box. For more information, see
Structural Databases (on page 474) for cross section names in the CAESAR II databases.
3. Optionally, select User Defined? to create a custom cross section. Type values for Area,
Ixx (moment of inertia about the strong axis), Iyy (moment of inertia about the weak axis), J
(torsion) (torsional resistivity constant), BoxH (overall height) and BoxW (overall width).
4. Click Add Another Section if you need to define additional cross-sections.
The value for the Section ID increases by one.
Use the up and down arrows next to Add Another Section to scroll through all
sections.
5. Click Next.
The software displays the Model Definition Method Selection page of the Structural
Steel Wizard.

CAESAR II User's Guide

405

Structural Steel Modeler

The output from a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments. The
results from the analysis of the SUPP model show the displacements at Node 20.

These displacements are excessive for a support, which is to be assumed rigid in another
analysis. The translational stiffness for the support can be computed as follows:
Kx = 39 lb. / 10.125 in. = 3.85 lb./in
Ky = 1975 lb. / 0.4228 in. = 4671 lb./in.
Kz = 1350 lb. / 0.8444 in. = 1599 lb./in.

Structural Steel Example #2

Design a support to limit the loads on the waste heat boilers flue gas nozzle connection. The
maximum allowable loads on the nozzle are as follows:
Faxial =
Fshear =
Mtorsion
Mbending

1500 lb.
500 lb.
= 10000 ft. lb.
= 5000 ft. lb.

In this example, create the structural steel input file, [Link], from a text file. The structural
steel preprocessor converts this file to the CAESAR II model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

416

Structural Steel Modeler

Check the piping and structure shown in the following four figures:

CAESAR II User's Guide

417

Structural Steel Modeler

Structural Steel Modeler

Kx = 10,000 lb. / 7.0909 in. = 1410 lb./in
Ky = 10,000 lb. / 0.2828 in. = 35360 lb./in.
Kz = 10,000 lb. / 25.7434 in. = 388 lb./in.

Insert Menu
Use the Insert menu to specify where to place a command from the Command menu in the
Card Stock pane.

Before Current Element

Places a new card above the selected card in the Card Stack.

After the Current Element

Places a new card below the selected command in the Card Stack.

At End of Model
Places a new card at the end of the model (that is, at the bottom of the Card Stack).

Commands Menu
Use the Commands Menu to add cards in the Card Stack pane. The cards define parameters
used in the structural model.

Node
Node or Commands > Node defines the coordinates of a point in global X, Y, and Z space
and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

Define the coordinates

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NODE command in the
needed position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Node

The NODE card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click

to expand the NODE card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the NODE properties.

CAESAR II User's Guide

433

Structural Steel Modeler

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

node number
Specifies the node number.

x, y, z
Specifies the global coordinates.

NFill
NFill or Commands > NFill defines evenly spaced nodes between two end points and
places the following card in the Card Stack:

Add a node between defined end points

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NFILL card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Nfill

The NFILL card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click

to expand the NFILL card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the NFILL properties.

6. Click

Save if you are finished.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

from
Specifies the from node number.

CAESAR II User's Guide

434

Structural Steel Modeler

to
Specifies the to node number.

by
Specifies the increment in the range.

NGen
NGen or Commands > NGen duplicates patterns of nodes and places the following card in
the Card Stack pane:

The first and last node in the base node pattern must exist before you can use NGen. Other
nodes not previously defined in the base node pattern are evenly spaced by a defined increment
between the first and last node. Subsequent nodal patterns start from the base pattern. DX, DY,
and DZ offsets define nodes duplicated from the base pattern of nodes.

Duplicate node
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NGEN card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click NGen

The NGEN card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click to

expand the NGEN card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the NGEN properties.

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

CAESAR II User's Guide

435

Structural Steel Modeler

from
Specifies the first node in the base node pattern. You must enter a value for an existing node
before you can use NGen.

to
Specifies the last node in the base node pattern. You must enter a value for an existing node
before you can use NGen.

inc
Specifies a value for the increment you want to use in the base node pattern between the first
node and the last node. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.

last
Specifies the number of times to duplicate the base node pattern. If you do not enter a value,
single pattern duplication occurs.

nodeInc
Specifies a value for the increment that you want to use in the base node pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern and so forth.

dx, dy, dz
Specifies the global coordinate offsets to get from the nodes in the base pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern, and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern, and so forth.

Example
The nodes from 1100 to 2000 with an increment of 100 are duplicated twice. Each new pattern
is offset by 10 ft. in the Z-direction. The new nodes created are from 2100 to 3000 and also from
3100 to 4000.

CAESAR II User's Guide

436

Structural Steel Modeler

Fix
Fix or Commands > Fix defines the restraint boundary conditions at the structural member
end points and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

Define restraint boundary conditions

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the FIX card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Fix

The FIX card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click

to expand the FIX card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the FIX properties.

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically begins to check the model for errors.
If needed you can enter the stiffness in the field following the fixity indicator. If you omit the
stiffness value, the fixity is considered to be rigid.

CAESAR II User's Guide

437

Structural Steel Modeler

from
Specifies the first node number in the range.
If you are using FIX to define a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.

to
Specifies the last node number in the range.
If you are using FIX to define a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.

by
Specifies the increment in the range.
If you are using FIX to define a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.

all
Specifies that all six degrees of freedom (DOF) are Free or Fixed.
This parameter is the equivalent of an anchor.

all stiffness
Specifies the same stiffness value for all six degrees of freedom (DOF).

x
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the x direction.

x stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the x direction.

y
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the y direction.

CAESAR II User's Guide

438

Structural Steel Modeler

y stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the y direction.

z
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the z direction.

z stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the z direction.

rx
Specifies the value for the rotation in the x direction.

rx stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the x direction.

ry
Specifies the value for the rotation in the y direction.

ry stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the y direction.

rz
Specifies the value for the rotation in the z direction.

rz stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the z direction.

CAESAR II User's Guide

439

Structural Steel Modeler

Example
1. FIX 1 ALL. Fix all degrees of freedom at node #1.
2. FIX 5 X1000 Y1000 Z1000. Fix X, Y and Z degrees of freedom at node #5, and use 1,000
lb./in. springs.
3. FIX 100 TO 110. ALL Fix rigidly all degrees of freedom for the nodes from 100 to 110. The
increment between 100 and 110 defaults to 1. Eleven nodes have their fixities defined here.
4. FIX 105 TO 125 BY 5 X1000,1000,1000 Fix X, Y, and Z degrees of freedom for the nodes:
105, 110, 115, 120, and 125, and use 1,000 lb./in. springs.
5. FIX (1) to (10) ALL Fix all degrees of freedom for the first 10 nodes in the node list.

Elem
Elem or Commands > Elem defines a single element between two nodes and places the
following card in the Card Stack pane:

You can use a section identifier and a material identifier for the element. If you omit the section
and/or material IDs the program uses the current default.

Define an element between two elements

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the ELEM card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click ELEM

The ELEM command is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click

to expand the ELEM card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the ELEM properties.

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

CAESAR II User's Guide

440

Structural Steel Modeler

from
Specifies the from node number.

to
Specifies the to node number.

secId
Specifies the Section ID for the first element generated.

matId
Specifies the Material ID for the first element generated.

EFill
EFill generates a consecutive string of elements and places the following card in the Card
Stack pane:

You can use the EFill command at any time, none of the elements generated need to exist
prior to adding the EFill command.

Add consecutive elements

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EFILL card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click EFill

The EFILL card is added to the card stack.

4. Click

to expand the EFILL card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the EFILL properties.

6. Click Save

to finish adding cards to the Card Stack.

The stack is saved and the Error Checker checks your model for errors

CAESAR II User's Guide

441

Structural Steel Modeler

from
Specifies the from node number on the first element generated.

to
Specifies the to node number on the first element generated.

inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.

incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.

last
Specifies the to node on the last element generated.

secId
Specifies the Section ID for the first element generated.

matId
Specifies the Material ID for the first element generated.

insecid
Specifies the increment to use to get from the Section ID for the first element to the Section ID
for the second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.

incMatId
Specifies the increment to get from the Material ID for the first element to the Material ID for the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.

CAESAR II User's Guide

442

Structural Steel Modeler

Example
Elements are generated between each pair of nodes between nodes 1200 and 2000. The
increment between From nodes and To nodes is 100. Nine elements are created in this
example.
Elem was not necessary here. Create all nine elements using EFill and by substituting node
1100 in place of node 1200 in the from field.

EGen
EGen or Commands EGen duplicates patterns of elements and places the following card in
the Card Stack pane:

Existing elements in the base pattern are redefined during generation.

Duplicate elements
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EGEN card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click EGen

The EGEN card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click

to expand the EGEN card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the EGEN properties.

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker checks the model for errors.

CAESAR II User's Guide

443

Structural Steel Modeler

from
Specifies the from node on the first element in the base pattern.

to
Specifies the to node on the first element in the base pattern.

inc
Specifies the increment to use to get from the from node on the first element in the base pattern
to the from node on the second element in base pattern. If you do not enter a value, the default
is 1.

incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.

last
Specifies the to node on the last element in the base pattern. The software generates multiple
copies from the base pattern of elements.

genInc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element in the base pat\-tern to
the from node on the first element in the first duplicate pattern.

genIncTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node on the first element in the base pattern to
the to node on the first element in the first duplicate pattern. If you do not enter a value, the
value of genInc is used.

genLast
Specifies the to node on the last element in the last pattern to be duplicated from the base
pattern.

CAESAR II User's Guide

444

Structural Steel Modeler

secId
Specifies the Section ID to use for the elements in the base pattern. If you do not enter a value,
the value from the Default card is used. For more information, see Default (on page 471).

matId
Specifies the Material ID to use for the elements in the base pattern. If you do not enter a value,
the value from the Default card is used. For more information, see Default (on page 471).

inSecId
Specifies the Section ID increment to use between patterns. For example, the first pattern of
elements generated from the base pattern of elements has a Section ID of SECID + INCSECID.
If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.

incMatId
Specifies the Material ID increment to use between patterns. If you do not enter a value, the
default is 0.

CAESAR II User's Guide

445

Structural Steel Modeler

Example
Building on the Example for EFill (see "Example" on page 443). The base element pattern from
1100 to 2000 is reproduced two additional times, from 2100 to 3000 and from 3100 to 4000.
Each element has nodal increments of 100. The increment between the Base Element and the
Next Element is 1000 and the last node in the last pattern is 4000. The cross members are
created using the base pattern from 1100 to 2100 and reproducing it in nodal increments of 100
until node 4000 is reached.

CAESAR II User's Guide

446

Structural Steel Modeler

EDim
EDim or Commands > EDim defines elements using the dimensions of the element instead
of references to nodes and places the following card in the Card Stock pane:

Any existing elements encountered are redefined. If you are defining a single element, do not
enter values for inc, incto, and last.

Define elements using element dimensions

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EDIM card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click EDim

The EDIM card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click

to expand the EDIM card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the EDIM properties.

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker checks the model for errors.

from
Specifies the from node on the first element to be defined.

CAESAR II User's Guide

447

Structural Steel Modeler

to
Specifies the to node on the last element to be defined.

inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.

incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.

last
Specifies the to node on the last element to be defined.

secID
Specifies the Section ID for the first element. If you do not enter a value, the current default is
used.

matID
Specifies the Material ID for the first element. If you do not enter a value, the current default is
used.

incSecId
Specifies the Section ID increment to use to get from the Section ID of the first element to the
Section ID of the second element.

CAESAR II User's Guide

448

Structural Steel Modeler

incmatId
Specifies the Material ID increment to get from the Material ID of the first element to the
Material ID of the second element.

Example
1. EDIM 5 to 10 DY = 12-3 SECID=2. Column 12-3 high from 5 to 10.
2. EDIM 5,10 DY=12-3,2. Same column
3. EDIM 2 TO 3 LAST=8 DX=13-3. Defining beams 13-3 long and elements 2-3, 3-4, 4-5, 5-6,
6-7, and 7-8. INC defaults to 1.

Angle
Angle or Commands > Angle defines the default element strong axis orientation and
places the following card in in the Card Stack pane:

Define the element strong axis

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the ANGLE card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Angle

The ANGLE card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click

to expand the ANGLE card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the ANGLE properties.

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

Define structural columns when the strong axis is not parallel to the global X-axis
Use Angle
with a structural column when the strong axis of the column is not parallel to the
global X-axis. When the strong axis of the column is parallel to the global Z-axis, redefine the
default orientation to ANGLE=90. Define the column elements then use ANGLE again to reset
the default orientation to its original value of ANGLE=0.0.

Define the angle of rotation

Orient
and Angle
both define the angle of rotation in degrees about the element center
line from the standard orientation to the element strong axis. Use Orient
to define this angle
for a single element or for a group of elements, and Angle
to define the default orientation
to its original value, such as, ANGLE=0.0.
The default orientation angle is 0.

CAESAR II User's Guide

449

Structural Steel Modeler

Find the positive angular rotation
Use the right hand rule to find positive angular rotation. Extend the thumb along the element in
the direction of the to node. The fingers of the right hand circle in the direction of a positive
orientation angle.

Determine the default element orientation

If the member is vertical, then the default strong axis is along the global-X axis.

If the member is non-vertical then the default strong axis is perpendicular to the center line
of the member and in the horizontal plane of the member.

The strong axis for the WF shape is:

angle
Specifies a value for the default Strong Axis Orientation Angle to use for all subsequent
defined elements.

Unif
Unif or Commands > Unif defines a constant uniform load that acts over the full length of
the member and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

Uniform loads can have special meanings when used in CAESAR II Piping runs.
If you are defining a uniform load that acts on a single element only, do not enter values for
inc, incTo, and last.

Define a uniform load

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the UNIF command in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).

CAESAR II User's Guide

450

Structural Steel Modeler

3. Click Unif

The UNIF card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click

to expand the UNIF card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the UNIF properties.

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

from
Specifies the from node on the first element this uniform load is to act on.

to
Specifies the to node on the first element this uniform load is to act on.

inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.

incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.

last
Specifies the to node on the last element this uniform load is to act on.

ux, uy, uz
Specifies the magnitude of the uniform load in the global X, Y, and Z directions. Unless used in
a piping analysis using G loads, use uniform loads in units of force per unit length of member.
When used in a piping analysis with G loads the uniform loads are in units of gravitational
acceleration, for example, uy=-1 would define a uniform load identical to the member weight
load.

CAESAR II User's Guide

451

Structural Steel Modeler

Examples
1. UNIF 1 TO 2 UY=-2.3 On the element from 1 to 2 a uniform load with a magnitude of 2.3
lbs. per inch acts in the -Y direction.
2. UNIF 1, 2, UY -2, 3 Same
3. UNIF 100 TO 200 INC=2 INCTO=3
4. LAST=500 UX=0.03, -1, 0.03 There are uniform loads acting on elements 100-200,
102-203,...,300-500 with a small horizontal component and a -1 load in the Y. It looks like
you have G load input for the piping problem.
5. UNIF (1) to (30) UY=-2.3 The first thirty elements in the element list have a uniform load of
-2.3 pounds per inch acting in the -Y direction.

Orient
Orient or Commands > Orient defines the element strong axis orientation and places the
following card in the Card Stack pane:

Define the element strong axis orientation

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the ORIENT card in the needed
position in the Card Stack. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Orient

The ORIENT card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click

to expand the ORIENT card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the ORIENT properties.

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

CAESAR II User's Guide

452

Structural Steel Modeler

from
Specifies the from node on the first element.
You can use node numbers or element indices as values for from.

to
Specifies the to node on the first element.
You can use node numbers or element indices as values for to.

inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.

incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.

last
Specifies the to node on the last element to have its orientation angle defined.

angle
Specifies the rotation in degrees from the default position to the actual position of the member
strong axis.

Examples
1. ORIENT 1 TO 2 ANGLE=90. The strong axis for the element from 1 to 2 is 90 away from
the default position.
2. ORIENT 5 TO 10 INC=5 LAST=30 ANGLE=90. The vertical column elements: 5-10, 10-15,
15-20, 20-25, and 25-30 have their strong axes 90 away from the default position. Their
new strong axis is along the Z axis. With their new orientation, the columns are better suited
to take X direction forces.
3. ORIENT 1 TO (20) ANGLE=90. The first twenty elements in the element list have their
strong axes 90 away from the default position.

CAESAR II User's Guide

453

Structural Steel Modeler

Load
Load or Commands > Load defines concentrated forces and moments that act at
structural member end points. It places the following card in the Card Stock pane:

Define concentrated forces and moments

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the LOAD card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Load

The LOAD command is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click

to expand the LOAD card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the LOAD properties.

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

from
Specifies the from node on the first element the load is to act on.
If you are defining a load for a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.

to
Specifies the to node on the first element the load is to act on.
If you are defining a load for a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.

CAESAR II User's Guide

454

Structural Steel Modeler

by
Specifies the increment in the range.
If you are defining a load for a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.

fx, fy, fz
Specifies the magnitude of concentrated forces in the global X, Y, and Z directions.

mx, my, mz
Specifies the magnitude of the moments in the global X, Y, and Z directions.

Examples
1. LOAD 305 FY-1000. Have a minus 1,000 lb. Y direction load acting at the structural node
#305.
2. LOAD 10 TO 18 BY=1 FX=707, FZ=707. Have skewed loads in the horizontal plane acting
at each of the nodes 10, 11,...,17, 18. You do not have to use by here, the default is 1.
3. LOAD (15) to (25) FY=-383. A load of 383 pounds acts in the -Y direction on the 15th
through the 25th nodes in the Node list.

Wind Loads
Wind or Commands > Wind defines the magnitude of the wind shape factor for the
structural elements and places a card in the Card Stack pane:

Define wind shape factor

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the WIND card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Wind

The Wind card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click

to expand the WIND card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the WIND properties.

CAESAR II User's Guide

455

Structural Steel Modeler

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker checks the model for errors.

from
Specifies the from node on the first element the wind load is to act on.

to
Specifies the to node on the first element the wind load is to act on.

inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.

incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.

last
Specifies the to node of the last element the wind load is to act on.

shape
Specifies a value for the magnitude of the wind shape factor. For structural steel members this
value is usually 2.0. For elements not exposed to the wind, disable wind loading on the structure
by resetting this value to 0. This value populates to all subsequently defined elements. If you do
not enter a value, the default is 2.0.

Examples
1. WIND 1 TO 2 SHAPE=2.0. The element from 1 to 2 has a shape factor with a magnitude of
2.0 applied. This value is applied to all the following elements.
2. WIND 1, 2, SHAPE 2.0. Same
3. WIND 100 TO 200 INC=2 INCTO=3
4. LAST=500 SHAPE=1.8 There is a wind shape factor of 1.8 on elements 100-200,
102-203,...,300-500.

CAESAR II User's Guide

456

Structural Steel Modeler

GLoads
GLoad or Commands > GLoad processes all specified uniform loads as G loads instead of
force/length loads and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

You cannot use this command with any other parameters.

If structural and piping models are mixed, the GLOADS cards must match. For example,
uniform loads in the piping model must be designed as G loads in the special execution
parameters.

Specify GLoads
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the GLOADS card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click GLoad .
The GLOADS card is added to the card stack.
4. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

MatId
MatId or Commands > MatId specifies material properties that correspond to a Material ID
number and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

You must have at least one valid material specification in the input file. For more information,
see Material Properties (on page 223).

CAESAR II User's Guide

457

Structural Steel Modeler

Add material properties
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the MATID card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click MatId

The MATID card is added to the Card Stack.

You can use one Matid for a group of elements that has many Section IDs (Secid).
4. Click

to expand the Matid card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the Matid properties.

Use Matid 1 for default A-36 structural steel properties.
6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

matId
Specifies a Material ID number. This number is usually 1, and numbered sequentially for
additional materials.
You can change the value assigned by the model input file.

ym
Specifies a value for Youngs Modulus of Elasticity. The default value is 30,000,000 (30x106) psi
for A-36 structural steel.

pois
Specifies a value for Poissons Ratio. The default value is 0.3 for A-36 structural steel.

g
Specifies a value for the shear modulus. The default value is 11,000,000 (11x106) psi for A-36
structural steel and is typically about one-third the value of Young's Modulus.

CAESAR II User's Guide

458

Structural Steel Modeler

ys
Specifies a value for the yield strength. The default value is 36,000 (36x103) psi for A-36
structural steel. This property is currently not used.

dens
Specifies a value for the material density. The default value is 0.283 for A-36 structural steel.

Alpha [x]
Specifies from one to nine values for the coefficients of thermal expansion.
Enter values for Alpha after entering a value for dens.

SecId
SecId or Commands > SecId assigns member cross-section properties to the Section ID
numbers and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

Add cross-section properties

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the SECID card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click SecId

The SECID card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click

to expand the SECID card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the SECID properties.

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

CAESAR II User's Guide

459

Structural Steel Modeler

section Id
Specifies a user-defined Section ID for this set of cross-section properties. Section IDs usually
start at 1 and increase incrementally by one, but you can assign values in any order.

name
Specifies an American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) shape name. For a user-defined
shape, type USER. You must enter the AISC names exactly as shown in the AISC handbook
with the exceptions:

Enter fractions as decimals. For example, type LX6X3-1/2X1/2 as L6X3.5X0.5

Omit all leading or trailing zeros.

You can select the section name from the window after clicking the Select Section ID
button.

User-Defined
Specifies a user-defined shape. You must enter values for the additional parameters to define a
user-defined cross-section.

area
Specifies the cross-section area (in length 2 units).

lxx
Specifies the strong axis moment of inertia (in length 4 units).

lyy
Specifies the weak axis moment of inertia (in length4 units).

torsion
Specifies the torsional resistivity constant (in length 4 units).

CAESAR II User's Guide

460

Structural Steel Modeler

boxH
Specifies the height (along the weak axis) of a rectangular box for plotting.

boxW
Specifies the width (along the strong axis) of a rectangular box for plotting.

Free End Connections - FREE

Free or Commands > Free defines the free element end connection types and places the
following card in the Card Stack pane:

For example, use Free

to describe the element ends in a structure that has pinned-only
beam-to-column connections.
You can also use Beams , Braces , and Columns to set the free end connection
defaults for certain types of members. For more information, see Beams (on page 463), Braces
(on page 466), and Columns (on page 468).
After you define each element and set the defaults, the program automatically adds a card
to the Card Stack and adds values to FREE parameters. Use this to help keep track of the
connections and nodes that define the element.

Define Free End connection types

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the FREE card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Free

CAESAR II User's Guide

461

Structural Steel Modeler

The Free command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click

to expand the FREE card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the FREE properties.

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

from
Specifies the from node on the first element that this FREE command is to apply to.

to
Specifies the to node on the first element that this FREE command is to apply to.

inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.

incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.

last
Specifies a value for the to node on the last element this FREE command is to apply to. You
can omit last, inc, and incTo if the FREE command is only to apply to a single element.

Parameters for Degrees of Freedom

The following parameters define the degrees of freedom (DOF) at the element end that is free.
Any combination can be used.

At the from node

FAXIAL

Axial translational DOF

FSHRSTR

Strong axis shear translational DOF

FSHRWEAK

Weak axis shear translational DOF

FTORS

Torsional DOF

FBNDSTR

Strong axis bending DOF

FBNDWEAK

Weak axis bending DOF

CAESAR II User's Guide

462

Structural Steel Modeler

At the to node
TAXIAL

Axial translational DOF

TSHRSTR

Strong axis shear translational DOF

TSHRWEAK

Weak axis shear translational DOF

TTORS

Torsional DOF

TBNDSTR

Strong axis bending DOF

TBNDWEAK

Weak axis bending DOF

Examples
1. A small WF shape has a pinned connection to a large I-beam. The weak axis bending of the
WF shape is not transmitted to the web of the I-beam. If the element defining the WF shape
uses nodes 1040 to 1045 then the FREE card for this element has the following format:
FREE 1040 TO 1045 fbndweak, tbndweak
2. The westward side of a building has a row of beams on the ground floor that are attached
rigidly to columns at the other end. The beams are identified by the pattern of nodes:
610-710, 620-720, 630-730, ..., 690-790. There are eight beams in this group. The 600 end
is pinned. The FREE cards for this group have the following format:
FREE 610 TO 710 INC=10 LAST=790 ftors, fbndstr, fbndweak

Beams
Beams or Commands > Beams defines default end connection types for members identified
by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

CAESAR II User's Guide

463

Structural Steel Modeler

A beam is any member whose center line lies completely along either the global X or global Z
axis. After you use Beams to define the element end connections, any element subsequently
defined inherits those end connection conditions.
Use the standard structural element connections Beams , Braces , and Columns
to define default end connection types for members identified by the orientation of their center
line. For more information, see Braces (on page 466), and Columns (on page 468).

Add beam element connections

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the BEAMS card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Beams .
The BEAMS card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click

to expand the BEAMS card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the BEAMS properties.

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Beams, then all degrees of freedom for the beam
are fixed.

mode
Defines the beams end connection type:

Free - Releases end connections.

Fix - Resets released end connections.

If fix is the only parameter defined for Beams, then all degrees of freedom for the beam
are fixed.

Parameters for Degrees of Freedom

The following parameters define the degrees of freedom (DOF) at each element end. Any
combination can be used. By default, each end is fixed in all six degrees of freedom.

At the from node

FAXIAL

Axial translational DOF

FSHRSTR

Strong axis shear translational DOF

FSHRWEAK

Weak axis shear translational DOF

FTORS

Torsional DOF

FBNDSTR

Strong axis bending DOF

CAESAR II User's Guide

464

Structural Steel Modeler

FBNDWEAK

Weak axis bending DOF

At the to node
TAXIAL

Axial translational DOF

TSHRSTR

Strong axis shear translational DOF

TSHRWEAK

Weak axis shear translational DOF

TTORS

Torsional DOF

TBNDSTR

Strong axis bending DOF

TBNDWEAK

Weak axis bending DOF

Examples
1. A group of beams that has both ends pinned must use the Free command. The BEAMS
card for this group has the following format:
Beams FREE

ftors

fbndstr

fbndweak

tbndstr

tbndweak

2. Pinned-end beams must be returned to end connection default values. The BEAMS card for
this group has the following format:
Beams FIX

ftors

fbndstr

fbndweak

tbndstr

tbndweak

CAESAR II User's Guide

465

Structural Steel Modeler

Braces
Braces or Commands > Braces defines default end connection types for members
identified by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack
pane:

A brace is any member whose center line does not completely lie along any of the global axes.
After you use Braces
to define element end connections, any brace element subsequently
defined inherits those end connection conditions.
Use the standard structural element connections Beams , Braces , and Columns
to define default end connection types for members identified by the orientation of their center
line. For more information, see Beams (on page 463) and Columns (on page 468).

Add Braces
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the BRACES card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Braces

The BRACES command is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click

to expand the BRACES card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the BRACES properties.

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Braces, then all degrees of freedom for the brace
are fixed.

CAESAR II User's Guide

466

Structural Steel Modeler

mode
Defines the braces end connection type:

Free - Releases end connections.

Fix - Resets released end connections.

If fix is the only parameter defined for Braces, then all degrees of freedom for the brace
are fixed.

Parameters for Degrees of Freedom

The following parameters define the degrees of freedom (DOF) at each element end. Any
combination can be used. By default, each end is fixed in all six degrees of freedom.

At the from node

FAXIAL

Axial translational DOF

FSHRSTR

Strong axis shear translational DOF

FSHRWEAK

Weak axis shear translational DOF

FTORS

Torsional DOF

FBNDSTR

Strong axis bending DOF

FBNDWEAK

Weak axis bending DOF

At the to node
TAXIAL

Axial translational DOF

TSHRSTR

Strong axis shear translational DOF

TSHRWEAK

Weak axis shear translational DOF

TTORS

Torsional DOF

TBNDSTR

Strong axis bending DOF

TBNDWEAK

Weak axis bending DOF

CAESAR II User's Guide

467

Structural Steel Modeler

Examples
1. A group of braces that has both ends pinned to adjoining columns must use the Free
command. The BRACES card for this group has the following format:
Braces FREE

ftors

fbndstr

fbndweak

tbndstr

tbndweak

2. Pinned-end braces must be returned to end connection default values. The BRACES card
for this group has the following format:
Braces FIX

ftors

fbndstr

fbndweak

tbndstr

tbndweak
If Fix appears on the line following Braces then all end connections for the brace are

fixed.

Columns
Columns or Commands > Columns defines default end connection types for members
identified by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack
pane:

CAESAR II User's Guide

468

Structural Steel Modeler

A column is any member whose centerline is completely vertical. After you use Columns
define the element end connections, any element subsequently defined inherits those end
connection freedoms.

Use the standard structural element connections Beams , Braces , and Columns
to define default end connections types for members identified by the orientation of their center
line. For more information, see Beams (on page 463) and Braces (on page 466).

Add columns
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the COLUMNS card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Columns .
The Columns command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click

to expand the COLUMNS card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the COLUMNS properties.

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Columns, then all degrees of freedom for the
column are fixed.

mode
Defines the columns end connection type:

Free - Releases end connections.

Fix - Resets released end connections.

If fix is the only parameter defined for Columns, then all degrees of freedom for the column are
fixed.

Parameters for Degrees of Freedom

The following parameters define the degrees of freedom (DOF) at each element end. Any
combination can be used. By default, each end is fixed in all six degrees of freedom.

At the from node

FAXIAL

Axial translational DOF

FSHRSTR

Strong axis shear translational DOF

FSHRWEAK

Weak axis shear translational DOF

FTORS

Torsional DOF

CAESAR II User's Guide

469

Structural Steel Modeler

FBNDSTR

Strong axis bending DOF

FBNDWEAK

Weak axis bending DOF

At the to node
TAXIAL

Axial translational DOF

TSHRSTR

Strong axis shear translational DOF

TSHRWEAK

Weak axis shear translational DOF

TTORS

Torsional DOF

TBNDSTR

Strong axis bending DOF

TBNDWEAK

Weak axis bending DOF

Examples
1. A group of corner columns that are pinned at their to ends must use the Free command.
The COLUMNS card for this group has the following format:
Columns FREE

ftors

fbndstr

fbndweak

tbndstr

tbndweak

2. Pinned-end columns must be returned to end connection default values. The COLUMNS
card for this group has the following format:
Columns FIX

ftors

fbndstr

fbndweak

tbndstr

tbndweak

If Fix is all that appears on the line following Columns, then all end connections for the
column are fixed.
As a general rule an element cannot undergo rigid body motion. Therefore, an element cannot
have both ttors and ftors released at the same time. Additionally beams typically have moment
releases only at their ends, not at intermediate nodes used to apply loads or connect bracing.

CAESAR II User's Guide

470

Structural Steel Modeler

Default
Default or Commands > Default specifies the default values of the Section ID and the
Material ID and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

If you create an element without a Section ID or Material ID, the default values defined here are
used.

Set the default Section ID or Material ID

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the DEFAULT card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Default

The DEFAULT card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click

to expand the DEFAULT card and view the properties.

5. Add values to the DEFAULT properties.

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

Comment
Comment or Commands > Comment adds a comment card to the Card Stack pane:

Add a comment
1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the COMMENT card in the
needed position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Comment

The COMMENT card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click

to expand the COMMENT card.

5. Type the information to add.

6. Click Save

to finish.

The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.

CAESAR II User's Guide

471

Structural Steel Modeler

Vertical
Vertical or Commands > Vertical specifies the axis orientation of a new or existing model
and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:

The axis orientation of the Static Load Case Builder, (for example in wind and wave loads),
the Static Output Processor, the Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic Output
Processor is specified only by the orientation in the input file. For more information, see
Select a Vertical Axis (on page 404).

Unlike the piping and equipment files elsewhere in CAESAR II, changing this command
does not change the orientation of the structural input file. It rotates the model into the new
coordinate system.

When you include the structural files in a piping model, the axis orientations of the structural
files do not have to match the orientation of the piping model. The software translates the
orientation.

Specify the axis orientation

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane and use the needed command from the
Insert menu to place the VERTICAL card in the needed position. For more information, see
the Insert Menu (on page 433).
2. Click Vertical

The Vertical command is added to the Card Stack.

3. Select Y or Z as the vertical axis.

Find the axis orientation of a new model

In the main CAESAR II window, click Tools > Configure/Setup to determine the axis
orientation of a new structural model based on the selected setting.

Find the axis orientation of an existing model

Open an existing model and check the last saved axis orientation to visually determine the axis
orientation.

CAESAR II User's Guide

472

Structural Steel Modeler

Unit
Unit displays the units file you specified in the Units Selection page of the Structural Steel
Wizard in the Card Stack pane:

You cannot change the units from the Card Stack pane. The structural file uses the units file
specified in the wizard as the unit of measure.
You do not have to choose the same file selected in configuration setup. For more
information, see Select a units file (on page 404).

List Options
List Options displays node and coordinate data, specifies node ranges, and selects reports.
Click ALL to display a copy of each report.

View reports
1. Click the List Options tab located at the bottom of the Card Stock.
The List Options pane appears.
2. Select the report you want to see.
The selected report appears in the Report pane.

CAESAR II User's Guide

473

Structural Steel Modeler

Structural Databases
The CAESAR II Structural databases contain over 20 different properties for each crosssection. For the finite element solution, only six of these items are employed:

Area

Strong axis moment of inertia

Weak axis moment of inertia

Torsional resistivity constant

Member section height

Member section depth

There are seven different structural databases included in CAESAR II

AISC 1977

AISC 1989

German 1991

Australian 1990

South African 1992

Korean 1990

UK 1993

AISC 1977 Database

W36X300 W36X280 W36X260

W36X245 W36X230

W36X210

W36X194 W36X182 W36X170

W36X160 W36X150

W36X135

W33X241 W33X221 W33X201

W33X152 W33X141

W33X130

W33X118 W30X211 W30X191

W30X173 W30X132

W30X124

W30X116 W30X108 W30X99

W27X178 W27X161

W27X146

W27X114 W27X102 W27X94

W27X84

W24X162

W24X146

W24X131 W24X117 W24X104

W24X94

W24X84

W24X76

W24X68

W21X147 W21X132

W21X122

W21X111 W21X101 W21X93

W21X83

W21X73

W21X68

W21X62

W21X44

W18X119

W18X106

W24X62

W21X57

CAESAR II User's Guide

W24X55

W21X50

474

Structural Steel Modeler

W18X97

W18X86

W18X76

W18X71

W18X65

W18X60

W18X55

W18X50

W18X46

W18X40

W18X35

W16X100

W16X89

W16X77

W16X67

W16X57

W16X50

W16X45

W16X40

W16X36

W16X31

W16X26

W14X730

W14X665

W14X605 W14X550 W14X500

W14X455 W14X426

W14X398

W14X370 W14X342 W14X311

W14X283 W14X257

W14X233

W14X211 W14X193 W14X176

W14X159 W14X145

W14X132

W14X120 W14X109 W14X99

W14X90

W14X82

W14X74

W14X68

W14X61

W14X53

W14X48

W14X43

W14X38

W14X34

W14X30

W14X26

W14X22

W12X336

W12X305

W12X279 W12X252 W12X230

W12X210 W12X190

W12X170

W12X152 W12X136 W12X120

W12X106 W12X96

W12X87

W12X79

W12X72

W12X65

W12X58

W12X53

W12X50

W12X45

W12X40

W12X35

W12X30

W12X26

W12X22

W12X19

W12X16

W12X14

W10X112 W10X100

W10X88

W10X77

W10X68

W10X60

W10X54

W10X49

W10X45

W10X39

W10X33

W10X30

W10X26

W10X22

W10X19

W10X17

W10X15

W10X12

W8X67

W8X58

W8X48

W8X40

W8X35

W8X31

W8X28

W8X24

W8X21

W8X18

W8X15

W8X13

W8X10

W6X25

W6X20

W6X16

W6X15

W6X12

W6X9

W5X19

W5X16

M8X6.5

M6X20

M6X4.4

W4X13

M14X18

M12X11.8 M10X9

M5X18.9

M4X13

CAESAR II User's Guide

475

Structural Steel Modeler

S24X121

S24X106 S24X100

S24X90 S24X80

S20X86

S20X75

S18X70 S18X54.7 S15X50

S20X66

S20X96

S15X42.9 S12X50

S12X40.8 S12X35 S12X31.8 S10X35

S10X25.4 S8X23

S8X18.4

S7X20

S7X15.3

S6X17.2

S6X12.5

S5X10

S4X9.5

S4X7.7

S3X7.5

S5X14.7

S3X5.7

C15X50

C15X40

C15X33.9

C12X30

C12X25

C12X20.7

C10X30

C10X25

C10X20

C10X15.3

C9X20

C9X15

C9X13.4

C8X18.7

C8X13.7

C8X11.5

C7X14.7

C7X12.2

C7X9.8

C6X13

C6X10.5

C6X8.2

C5X9

C5X6.7

C4X7.25

C4X5.4

C3X6

C3X5

C3X4.1

MC18X58

MC18X51.9

MC18X45.8

MC18X42.7 MC13X50

MC13X40

MC13X35

MC13X31.8

MC12X50

MC12X40

MC12X35

MC12X37

MC12X32.9 MC12X30.9

MC12X10.6

MC10X41.1

MC10X33.6

MC10X28.5 MC10X28.3

MC10X25.3

MC10X24.9

MC10X21.9

MC10X8.4

MC10X6.5

MC9X25.4

MC9X23.9

MC8X22.8

MC8X21.4

MC8X20

MC8X18.7

MC8X8.5

MC7X22.7

MC7X19.1

MC7X17.6

MC6X18

MC6X15.3

MC6X16.3

MC6X15.1

MC6X12

MC12X45

WT18X150

WT18X140

WT18X130

WT18X122.5

WT18X115

WT18X105

WT18X97

WT18X91

CAESAR II User's Guide

476

Structural Steel Modeler

WT18X85

WT18X80

WT18X75

WT18X67.5

WT16.5X120.5

WT16.6X110.5

WT16.5X100.5 WT16.5X76

WT16.5X70.5

WT16.5X65

WT16.5X59

WT15X105.5

WT15X95.5

WT15X86.5

WT15X66

WT15X62

WT15X58

WT15X54

WT15X49.5

WT13.5X89

WT13.5X80.5

WT13.5X73

WT13.5X57

WT13.5X51

WT13.5X47

WT13.5X42

WT12X81

WT12X73

WT12X65.5

WT12X58.5

WT12X52

WT12X47

WT12X42

WT12X38

WT12X34

WT12X31

WT12X27.5

WT10.5X73.5

WT10.5X66

WT10.5X61

WT10.5X55.5

WT10.5X50.5

WT10.5X46.5

WT10.5X41.5

WT10.5X36.5

WT10.5X34

WT10.5X31

WT10.5X28.5

WT10.5X25

WT10.5X22

WT9X59.5

WT9X53

WT9X48.5

WT9X43

WT9X38

WT9X35.5

WT9X32.5

WT9X30

WT9X27.5

WT9X25

WT9X23

WT9X20

WT9X17.5

WT8X50

WT8X44.5

WT8X38.5

WT8X33.5

WT8X28.5

WT8X25

WT8X22.5

WT8X20

WT8X18

WT8X15.5

WT8X13

WT7X365

WT7X332.5

WT7X302.5

WT7X275

WT7X250

WT7X227.5

WT7X213

WT7X199

WT7X185

WT7X171

WT7X155.5

WT7X141.5

WT7X128.5

WT7X116.5

WT7X105.5

WT7X96.5

WT7X88

WT7X79.5

WT7X72.5

WT7X66

WT7X60

WT7X54.5

WT7X49.5

WT7X45

WT7X41

WT7X37

WT7X34

WT7X30.5

WT7X26.5

WT7X24

WT7X21.5

WT7X19

WT7X17

WT7X15

WT7X13

WT7X11

WT6X168

CAESAR II User's Guide

477

Structural Steel Modeler

WT6X152.5

WT6X139.5

WT6X126

WT6X115

WT6X105

WT6X95

WT6X85

WT6X76

WT6X68

WT6X60

WT6X53

WT6X48

WT6X43.5

WT6X39.5

WT6X36

WT6X32.5

WT6X29

WT6X26.5

WT6X25

WT6X22.5

WT6X20

WT6X17.5

WT6X15

WT6X13

WT6X11

WT6X9.5

WT6X8

WT6X7

WT5X56

WT5X50

WT5X44

WT5X38.5

WT5X34

WT5X30

WT5X27

WT5X24.5

WT5X22.5

WT5X19.5

WT5X16.5

WT5X15

WT5X13

WT5X11

WT5X9.5

WT5X8.5

WT5X7.5

WT5X6

WT4X33.5

WT4X29

WT4X24

WT4X20

WT4X17.5

WT4X15.5

WT4X14

WT4X12

WT4X10.5

WT4X9

WT4X7.5

WT4X6.5

WT4X5

WT4X12.5

WT4X10

WT4X7.5

WT3X8

WT3X6

WT3X4.5

WT2.5X9.5

WT2.5X8

WT2X6.5

MT7X9

MT6X5.9

MT5X4.5

MT4X3.25

MT3X10

MT3X2.2

MT2.5X9.45

MT2X6.5

ST12X60.5

ST12X53

ST12X50

ST12X45

ST12X40

ST10X48

ST10X43

ST10X37.5

ST10X33

ST9X35

ST9X27.35

ST7.5X25

ST7.5X21.45

ST6X25

ST6X20.4

ST6X17.5

ST6X15.9

ST5X17.5

ST5X12.7

ST4X11.5

ST4X9.2

ST3.5X10

ST3.5X7.65

ST3X8.625

ST3X6.25

ST2.5X7.375

ST2.5X5

ST2X4.75

ST2X3.85

ST1.5X3.75

ST1.5X2.85

CAESAR II User's Guide

478

Structural Steel Modeler

Double Angle - Long Legs Back - to - Back
D8X8X1.1250

D8X8X1.0000

D8X8X0.8750

D8X8X0.7500

D8X8X0.6250

D8X8X0.5000

D6X6X1.0000

D6X6X0.8750

D6X6X0.7500

D6X6X0.6250

D6X6X0.5000

D6X6X0.3750

D5X5X0.8750

D5X5X0.7500

D5X5X0.5000

D5X5X0.3750

D5X5X0.3125

D4X4X0.7500

D4X4X0.6250

D4X4X0.5000

D4X4X0.3750

D4X4X0.3125

D4X4X0.2500

D3.5X3.5X0.3750

D3.5X3.5X0.3125 D3.5X3.5X0.2500

D3X3X0.5000

D3X3X0.3750

D3X3X0.3125

D3X3X0.2500

D3X3X0.1875

D2.5X2.5X0.3750

D2.5X2.5X0.3125

D2.5X2.5X0.2500 D2.5X2.5X0.1875

D2X2X0.3750

D2X2X0.3125

D2X2X0.2500

D2X2X0.1875

D2X2X0.1250

D8X6X1.0000

D8X6X0.7500

D8X6X0.5000

D8X4X1.0000

D8X4X0.7500

D8X4X0.5000

D7X4X0.7500

D7X4X0.5000

D7X4X0.3750

D6X4X0.7500

D6X4X0.6250

D6X4X0.5000

D6X4X0.3750

D6X3.5X0.3750

D6X3.5X0.3125

D5X3.5X0.7500

D5X3.5X0.5000

D5X3.5X0.3750

D5X3.5X0.3125

D5X3X0.5000

D5X3X0.3750

D5X3X0.3125

D5X3X0.2500

D4X3.5X0.5000

D4X3.5X0.3750

D4X3.5X0.3125

D4X3.5X0.2500

D4X3X0.5000

D4X3X0.3750

D4X3X0.3125

D4X3X0.2500

D3.5X3X0.3750

CAESAR II User's Guide

479

Structural Steel Modeler

D3.5X3X0.3125

D3.5X3X0.2500

D3.5X2.5X0.3750

D3.5X2.5X0.3125 D3.5X2.5X0.2500

D3X2.5X0.3750

D3X2.5X0.2500

D3X2.5X0.1875

D3X2X0.3750

D3X2X0.3125

D3X2X0.2500

D3X2X0.1875

D2.5X2X0.3750

D2.5X2X0.2500

D2.5X2X0.1875

Double Angle - Short Legs Back - to - Back

B8X6X1.0000

B8X6X0.7500

B8X6X0.2500

B8X4X1.0000

B8X4X0.7500

B8X4X0.5000

B7X4X0.7500

B7X4X0.5000

B7X4X0.3750

B6X4X0.7500

B6X4X0.6250

B6X4X0.5000

B6X4X0.3750

B6X3.5X0.3750

B6X3.5X0.3125

B5X3.5X0.7500

B5X3.5X0.5000

B5X3.5X0.3750

B5X3.5X0.3125

B5X3X0.5000

B5X3X0.3750

B5X3XO.3125

B5X3X0.2500

B4X3.5X0.5000

B4X3.5X0.3750

B4X3.5X0.3125

B4X3.5X0.2500

B4X3X0.5000

B4X3X0.3750

B4X3X0.3125

B4X3X0.2500

B3.5X3X0.3750

B3.5X3X0.3125

B3.5X3X0.2500

B3.5X2.5X0.3750

B3.5X2.5X0.3125

B3.5X2.5X0.2500

B3X2.5X0.3750

B3X2.5X0.2500

B3X2.5X0.1875

B3X2X0.3750

B3X2X0.3125

B3X2X0.2500

B3X2X0.1875

B2.5X2X0.3750

B2.5X2X0.3125

B2.5X2X0.2500

B2.5X2X0.1875

CAESAR II User's Guide

480

Structural Steel Modeler

AISC 1989 Database

W44X285

W44X248 W44X224

W44X198 W40X328 W40X298

W40X268

W40X244 W40X221

W40X192 W40X655 W40X593

W40X531

W40X480 W40X436

W40X397 W40X362 W40X324

W40X297

W40X277 W40X249

W40X215 W40X199 W40X183

W40X167

W40X149 W36X848

W36X798 W36X720 W36X650

W36X588

W36X527 W36X485

W36X439 W36X393 W36X359

W36X328

W36X300 W36X280

W36X260 W36X245 W36X230

W36X256

W36X232 W36X210

W36X194 W36X182 W36X170

W36X160

W36X150 W36X135

W33X619 W33X567 W33X515

W33X468

W33X424 W33X387

W33X354 W33X318 W33X291

W33X263

W33X241 W33X221

W33X201 W33X169 W33X152

W33X141

W33X130 W33X118

W30X581 W30X526 W30X477

W30X433

W30X391 W30X357

W30X326 W30X292 W30X261

W30X235

W30X211 W30X191

W30X173 W30X148 W30X132

W30X124

W30X116 W30X108

W30X99

W27X494

W27X448 W27X407

W27X368 W27X336 W27X307

W27X281

W27X258 W27X235

W27X217 W27X194 W27X178

W27X161

W27X146 W27X114

W27X102 W27X94

W24X492

W24X450 W24X408

W24X370 W24X335 W24X306

W24X279

W24X250 W24X229

W24X207 W24X192 W24X176

W24X162

W24X146 W24X131

W24X117 W24X104 W24X103

W24X94

W24X84

W24X68

W24X76

CAESAR II User's Guide

W30X90

W24X62

W27X539

W27X84

W24X55

481

Structural Steel Modeler

W21X402

W21X364 W21X333

W21X300 W21X275 W21X248

W21X223

W21X201 W21X182

W21X166 W21X147 W21X132

W21X122

W21X111 W21X101

W21X93

W21X83

W21X73

W21X68

W21X62

W21X50

W21X44

W18X311

W18X283

W18X258 W18X234

W18X211 W18X192 W18X175

W18X158

W18X143 W18X130

W18X119 W18X106 W18X97

W18X86

W18X76

W18X71

W18X65

W18X60

W18X50

W18X46

W18X40

W18X35

W16X100 W16X89

W21X57

WT18X115

WT18X128

WT18X116

WT18X105

WT18X97

WT18X91

WT18X85

WT18X80

WT18X75

WT18X67.5

WT16.5X177

WT16.5X159

WT16.5X145.5 WT16.5X131.5

WT16.5X120.5

WT16.5X110.5 WT16.5X100.5

WT16.5X84.5

WT16.5X76

WT16.5X70.5

WT16.5X65

WT16.5X59

WT15X117.5

WT15X105.5

WT15X95.5

WT15X86.5

WT15X74

WT15X66

WT15X62

WT15X58

WT15X54

WT15X49.5

WT13.5X108.5

WT13.5X97

WT13.5X89

WT13.5X80.5

WT13.5X73

WT13.5X64.5

WT13.5X57

WT13.5X51

WT13.5X47

WT13.5X42

WT12X88

WT12X81

WT12X73

WT12X65.5

WT12X58.5

WT12X52

CAESAR II User's Guide

W18X55

482

Structural Steel Modeler

WT12X51.5

WT12X47

WT12X42

WT12X38

WT12X34

WT12X31

WT12X27.5

WT10.5X83

WT10.5X73.5

WT10.5X66

WT10.5X61

WT10.5X55.5

WT10.5X50.5

WT10.5X46.5

WT10.5X41.5

WT10.5X36.5

WT10.5X34

WT10.5X31

WT10.5X28.5

WT10.5X25

WT10.5X22

WT9X71.5

WT9X65

WT9X59.5

WT9X53

WT9X48.5

WT9X43

WT9X38

WT9X35.5

WT9X32.5

WT9X30

WT9X27.5

WT9X25

WT9X23

WT9X20

WT9X17.5

WT8X50

WT8X44.5

WT8X38.5

WT8X33.5

WT8X28.5

WT8X25

WT8X22.5

WT8X20

WT8X18

WT8X15.5

WT8X13

WT7X365

WT7X332.5

WT7X302.5

WT7X275

WT7X250

WT7X227.5

WT7X213

WT7X199

WT7X185

WT7X171

MT7X9

MT6X5.9

MT5X4.5

MT4X3.25

MT3X2.2

ST12X60.5

ST12X53

ST12X50

ST12X45

ST12X40

WT7X155.

CAESAR II User's Guide

MT2.5X9.
45

ST10X48

483

Structural Steel Modeler

ST10X43

ST10X37.5

ST10X33

ST9X35

ST9X27.35

ST7.5X25

ST7.5X21.45

ST6X25

ST6X20.4

ST6X17.5

ST6X15.9

ST5X17.5

ST5X12.7

ST4X11.5

ST4X9.2

ST3.5X10

ST3.5X7.65

ST3X8.625

ST3X6.25

ST2.5X7.375

ST2.5X5

ST2X4.75

ST2X3.85

ST1.5X3.75

ST1.5X2.85

CAESAR II User's Guide

484

Structural Steel Modeler

CAESAR II User's Guide

485

Structural Steel Modeler

CAESAR II User's Guide

486

Structural Steel Modeler

Australian 1990 Database

UB760X244 UB760X220 UB760X197 UB760X173 UB760X148

UB690X140

UB690X125 UB610X125 UB610X113 UB610X101 UB530X92

UB530X82

UB460X82

UB460X74

UB460X67

UB410X60

UB410X54

UB360X57

UB360X51

UB360X45

UB310X46

UB310X40

UB250X37

UB250X31

UB200X30

UB200X25

UB180X22

UB180X18

UB150X18

UB150X14

UC310X283 UC310X240

UC310X198 UC310X158 UC310X137

UC310X118

UC310X97

UC250X89

UC250X73

UC200X60

UC200X46

UC150X37

UC150X30

UC150X23

UC100X15

UBP310X79 UBP250X85

UC200X52

UBP250X63

TFB125X65 TFB100X45

TFC125X65 TFC100X50 TFC75X40

PFC380X100

PFC300X90 PFC250X90 PFC230X75 PFC200X75

PFC180X75

PFC150X75

EL200X200X26 EL200X200X20

EL200X200X18

EL200X200X16 EL200X200X13

EL150X150X19

EL150X150X16 EL150X150X12

EL150X150X10

EL125X125X16 EL125X125X12

EL125X125X10

CAESAR II User's Guide

487

Structural Steel Modeler

EL125X125X8

EL100X100X12

EL100X100X10

EL100X100X8

EL100X100X6

EL90X90X10

EL90X90X8

EL90X90X6

EL75X75X10

EL75X75X8

EL75X75X6

EL75X75X5

EL65X65X10

EL65X65X8

EL65X65X6

EL65X65X5

EL55X55X6

EL55X55X5

EL50X50X8

EL50X50X6

EL50X50X5

EL50X50X3

EL45X45X6

EL45X45X5

EL45X45X3

EL40X40X6

EL40X40X5

EL40X40X3

EL30X30X6

EL30X30X5

EL30X30X3

EL25X25X6

EL25X25X5

EL25X25X3

UL150X100X12 UL150X100X10

UL150X90X16

UL150X90X12

UL150X90X10

UL150X90X8

UL125X75X12

UL125X75X10

UL125X75X8

UL125X75X6

UL100X75X10

UL100X75X8

UL100X75X6

UL75X50X8

UL75X50X6

UL75X50X5

UL65X50X8

UL65X50X6

UL65X50X5

German 1991 Database

I80

I100

I120 I140

I160

I180

I200

I220

I240 I260

I280

I300

CAESAR II User's Guide

488

Structural Steel Modeler

I320

I340

I360 I380

I400

I450

I475

I500 I550

I600

I425

IPE80

IPE100

IPE120 IPE140 IPE160 IPE180

IPE200

IPE220

IPE240 IPE270 IPE300 IPE330

IPE360

IPE400

IPE450 IPE500 IPE550 IPE600

IPEO180 IPEO200 IPEO220 IPEO240 IPEO270 IPEO300

IPEO330 IPEO360 IPEO400 IPEO450 IPEO500 IPEO550
IPEO600

IPEV400 IPEV450

IPEV500

IPEV550

IPEV600

IPBI-100 IPBI-120

IPBI-140

IPBI-160

IPBI-180

IPBI-200

IPBI-220 IPBI-240

IPBI-260

IPBI-280

IPBI-300

IPBI-320

IPBI-340 IPBI-360

IPBI-400

IPBI-450

IPBI-500

IPBI-550

IPBI-600 IPBI-650

IPBI-700

IPBI-800

IPBI-900

IPBI-100
0

IPB-100

IPB-120

IPB-140

IPB-160

IPB-180

IPB-200

IPB-220

IPB-240

IPB-260

IPB-280

IPB-300

IPB-320

IPB-340

IPB-360

IPB-400

IPB-450

IPB-500

IPB-550

IPB-600

IPB-650

IPB-700

IPB-800

IPB-900

IPB-1000

U30X15

U30

U40X20

U40

U50X25

U50

CAESAR II User's Guide

489

Structural Steel Modeler

U60

U65

U80

U100

U120

U140

U160

U180

U200

U220

U240

U260

U280

U300

U320

U350

U380

U400

T20

T25

T30

T35

T40

T45

T50

T60

T70

T80

T90

T100

T120

T140

South African 1992 Database

CAESAR II User's Guide

490

Structural Steel Modeler

CAESAR II User's Guide

491

Structural Steel Modeler

Korean 1990 Database

W594X302

W588X300

W582X300

W612X202

W606X201

W600X200

W596X199

W488X300

W482X300

W506X201

W500X200

W496X199

W440X300

W434X299

W450X200

W446X199

W390X300

W386X299

W404X201

W400X200

W396X199

W350X350

W344X354

W344X348

W336X249

W354X176

W350X175

W346X174

W310X310

W310X305

W304X301

W300X305

W300X300

W298X299

W294X302

W298X201

W294X200

W300X150

W298X149

W250X255

W250X250

W248X249

W244X252

W244X175

W250X125

W248X124

W208X202

W200X204

W200X200

W194X150

W200X100

W150X150

W148X100

W150X75

W125X125

W100X100

W340X250

L250X250X35 L250X250X25 L200X200X25

L200X200X20 L200X200X15

L175X175X15 L175X175X12 L150X150X19

L150X150X15 L150X150X12

L150X150X10 L130X130X15 L130X130X12

L130X130X10 L130X130X9

L120X120X8

L100X100X13 L100X100X10

L100X100X8

L100X100X7

L90X90X13

L90X90X10

L90X90X9

L90X90X8

L90X90X7

L90X90X6

L80X80X7

L80X80X6

L75X75X12

L75X75X9

L75X75X6

L70X70X6

L65X65X8

L65X65X6

L65X65X5

L60X60X6

L60X60X5

L60X60X4

L50X50X6

L50X50X5

L50X50X4

L45X45X5

L45X45X4

L40X40X5

CAESAR II User's Guide

492

Structural Steel Modeler

C300X90

C300X91

C300X92

C125X65

C100X50

C75X40

M300X150

M250X125

M200X100

C300X93

C300X94

M150X75

M125X75

UK 1993 Database

CAESAR II User's Guide

493

SECTION 7

Buried Pipe Modeler

Buried Pipe Modeler or Input > Underground takes an unburied layout and buries it. The
modeler performs the following functions:

Allows the direct input of soil properties. The modeler contains the equations for buried pipe
stiffnesses. These equations are used to calculate the stiffnesses on a per length of pipe
basis and then generate the restraints that simulate the discrete buried pipe restraint.

Breaks down straight and curved lengths of pipe to locate soil restraints using a zone
concept. Where transverse bearing is a concern near bends, tees, and entry/exit points, soil
restraints are located in close proximity.

Breaks down straight and curved pipe so that when axial loads dominate, soil restraints are
spaced far apart.

Allows the direct entry of user-defined soil stiffnesses on a pipe-length basis. Input
parameters include axial, transverse, upward, and downward stiffnesses, as well as ultimate
loads. You can specify stiffnesses separately or in conjunction with CAESAR IIs
automatically generated soil stiffnesses.

The Buried Pipe Modeler is designed to read a standard CAESAR II input data file that
describes the basic layout of the piping system as if it was not buried. From this input, the
software creates a second input data file that contains the buried pipe model. This second input
file typically contains a much larger number of elements and restraints than the first job. The first
file that serves as the pattern is called the original job. The second file that contains the element
mesh refinement and the buried pipe restraints is called the buried job. CAESAR II names the
buried file by appending the letter B to the name of the original job.
The original job must already exist. During the process of creating the buried model, the
modeler removes any restraints in the buried section. Any additional restraints in the buried
section can be entered in the resulting buried model. The buried job, if it exists, is overwritten by
the successful generation of a buried pipe model. It is the buried job that is eventually run to
compute displacements and stresses.
Typical buried pipe displacements are considerably different than similar above-ground
displacements. Buried pipe deforms laterally in areas immediately adjacent to changes in
directions, such as those found in bends and tees. In areas far removed from bends and tees,
the deformation is primarily axial. The optimal size of an element, that is, the distance between a
single FROM and a TO node, is dependent upon which of these deformation patterns is to be
modeled. Because there is no continuous support model, the software must locate additional
point supports along a line to simulate this continuous support. These additional point supports
can also be user-defined. For a given stiffness per unit length, one of the following must be
added:

Several closely spaced, low stiffness supports

A limited number of distant and high stiffness supports

Where the deformation is lateral, smaller elements are needed to properly distribute the forces
from the pipe to the soil. The length over which the pipe deflects laterally is called the "lateral
bearing length" and can be calculated using the following equation:

CAESAR II User's Guide

494

Buried Pipe Modeler

Lb = 0.75() [4EI/Ktr] 0.25
Where:
E

Pipe modulus of elasticity

Pipe moment of inertia

Ktr =

Transverse soil stiffness on a per length basis

CAESAR II places three elements in the vicinity of this bearing span to properly model the local
load distribution. The bearing span lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 1 lengths. The
intermediate lengths in a piping system are called Zone 2 lengths, and the axial displacement
lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 3 lengths. To properly transmit axial loads, Zone
3 element lengths are computed using 100 x Do, where Do is the outside diameter of the piping.
The Zone 2 mesh consists of four elements of increasing length; starting at 1.5 times the length
of a Zone 1 element at its Zone 1 end, and progressing in equal increments to the last which is
50 x Do long at the Zone 3 end. CAESAR II views a typical piping system element breakdown or
mesh distribution as shown below. All pipe density is set to zero for all pipe identified as buried
so that deadweight causes no bending around these point supports.

CAESAR II automatically puts a Zone 1 mesh gradient at each side of the pipe framing
into an elbow. You must tell CAESAR II where the other Zone 1 areas are located in the piping
system.
A critical part of the modeling of an underground piping system is the proper definition of Zone
1or lateral bearing regions. These bearing regions primarily occur:

On either side of a change in direction.

For all pipes framing into an intersection.

At points where the pipe enters or leaves the soil.

CAESAR II User's Guide

495

Buried Pipe Modeler

Using any user-defined node within or near Zone 1.

Data Conversion
CAESAR II converts the original job into the buried job by meshing the existing elements and
adding soil restraints. The conversion process creates all of the necessary elements to satisfy
the Zone 1, Zone 2, and Zone 3 requirements, and places restraints on the elements in these
zones. All elbows are broken down into at least two curved sections, and very long radius
elbows are broken down into segments whose lengths are not longer than the elements in the
immediately adjacent Zone 1 pipe section. Node numbers are generated by adding 1 to the
elements FROM node number. The software checks a node number to make sure that is
unique in the model. All densities on buried pipe elements are zeroed to simulate the continuous
support of the pipe weight. A conversion log is also generated, which details the process in full.

See also
Buried Pipe Modeler Window (on page 496)
Soil Models (on page 501)

Buried Pipe Modeler Window

To start the Buried Pipe Modeler, click Underground Pipe Modeler
displays:

. The following window

Alternatively, you can click Input > Underground.

The Buried Pipe Modeler window is used to enter the buried element descriptions for the job
and allows you to define:

Which part of the piping system is buried

Mesh spacing at specific element ends

Soil stiffnesses

The first two columns of the data input grid contain element node numbers for each piping
element included in the original system. The next three columns allow you to describe the
sections of the piping system that are buried and to define any required fine mesh areas.

CAESAR II User's Guide

496

Buried Pipe Modeler

A finer mesh area is necessary for buried areas that will need to undergo lateral
displacements.
The remaining eight columns are used to define soil stiffnesses and ultimate loads.

Buried Pipe Modeler Toolbar

The Buried Pipe Molder toolbar displays icons for commonly-used commands.
Open - Opens an input data file that will serve as the original job.
Save - Creates an input data file that contains the buried pipe model. By
default, the software appends the filename of the original job with the letter B
to create the second input data file (the buried job).
Print - Prints the data input from the Buried Pipe Modeler window.
Soil Models - Opens the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box in which you
specify soil properties for the CAESAR II buried pipe equations used by the
software to generate one or more soil restraint systems. For more
information, see Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box (on page 507).
Convert - Converts the original job into the buried job by meshing the
existing elements and adding soil restraints.
Find - Activates the search feature.

Change the Name of a Buried Pipe Job

1. Click File > Change Buried Pipe Job Name.
2. In the Change Job Name dialog box, type a new name for the buried pipe job and click OK.
The software updates the name of the job.

From Node
Displays the node number for the starting end of the element

To Node
Displays the node number for the end of the piping element.

CAESAR II User's Guide

497

Buried Pipe Modeler

Soil Model No.

Defines which of the elements in the model are buried.

If you enter 0, the element is not buried.

If you enter 1, then specify the buried soil stiffnesses per length basis in columns 6 through
13.

If you enter a number greater than 1, the software points to a CAESAR II soil restraint model
generated using the equations outlined in Soil Models (on page 501).
You can specify soil properties, such as buried depth, friction factor, undrained shear
strength, using the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box (on page 507). The software uses these
properties to calculate the buried soil stiffnesses on a stiffness per length basis. Because
the soil properties can change from point-to-point along the pipeline, several different soil
models can be entered for a single job. Each different soil model is given a unique soil
model number starting with 2. Consider the following example:
From Node

To Node

Soil Model No.

The pipe from nodes 5 through 15 is not buried. From nodes 15 through 30, you will specify
your own stiffnesses (using columns 6 through 13 of the data input area). From nodes 35
through 40, the software will use the property values indicated in the corresponding soil
model number to generate stiffnesses.

From/To End Mesh

Indicates a fine mesh is needed at the From or To element end.
Long, single elements that you enter need to be broken down into smaller elements to properly
distribute the soil forces. The software performs this breakdown automatically. If the particular
end of an element will undergo lateral displacement, it must have a finer mesh than an element
end that only undergoes axial displacements.
Axial displacement ends are at the end of a virtual anchor length.
Element ends undergo lateral displacements wherever there is a bend at the end of the element.
In this case, the software automatically places a fine mesh along the element entering the bend

CAESAR II User's Guide

498

Buried Pipe Modeler

and along the element leaving the bend. At all other locations, you must tell the software where
the fine meshes must go. These locations include:

1 - Element ends that frame into intersections.

2 - Element ends that enter or exit from the soil.

3 - Element ends where there is any change in direction not defined by a bend.

Follow the rule that too many mesh elements will never hurt the solution, whereas too
few may produce incorrect results. Thus, always check the appropriate box if you are uncertain.
Consider the following example:

CAESAR II places a fine mesh at the 5 end of the element because the pipe enters the soil at 5
and there are probably some displacements there. The software automatically places fine
meshes at element ends where there are bends, so checking the FROM END MESH/TO END
MESH boxes is not needed on the 10-15 element. A fine mesh is also placed at each element
end that frames into the intersection at 20. Finally, a fine mesh is placed at the terminal points
35 and 30.

User-Defined Lateral "K"

Specifies the soil stiffness perpendicular to the pipe axis on a stiffness per length basis. This
stiffness value acts in both directions perpendicular to the pipe. This option is required if Soil
Model No. (on page 498) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.

Ultimate Lateral Load

Specifies the ultimate lateral load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis. It is at
this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic. This option is
required if Soil Model No. (on page 498) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.

User-Defined Axial Stif

Specifies the soil stiffness along the axis of the pipe on a stiffness per length basis. This
stiffness value acts in both directions along the axis of the pipe. This option is required if Soil
Model No. (on page 498) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.
To simulate a rigid, perfectly plastic soil for axial pipeline deformation, enter 1.0E12.

CAESAR II User's Guide

499

Buried Pipe Modeler

Ultimate Axial Load

Specifies the ultimate axial load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis. It is at
this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic. This option is
required if Soil Model No. (on page 498) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.

User-Defined Upward Stif

Specifies the soil stiffness in the upward direction on a stiffness per length basis. The value that
you enter is the stiffness that will resist upward displacement of the pipeline. This option is
required if Soil Model No. (on page 498) is set to 1; otherwise, you can leave this option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.

If the upward and downward stiffnesses are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one--the stiffness value that is not entered defaults to the stiffness value that is entered.

If both User-Defined Upward Stif and User-Defined Downward Stif (on page 500) are set
to 0 or left blank, a fatal error results.

Ultimate Upward Load

Specifies the ultimate upward load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis. The
value you enter is the maximum resistance of the soil to an upward displacement of the pipeline.
It is at this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic. This option is
required if Soil Model No. (on page 498) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.

If the upward and downward ultimate loads are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one. The other load defaults to the entered value.

If both Ultimate Upward Load and Ultimate Downward Load (on page 501) are set to 0 or
left blank, a fatal error results.

User-Defined Downward Stif

Specifies the soil stiffness in the downward direction on a stiffness per length basis. The value
that you enter is the stiffness that will resist downward (-Y) displacement of the pipeline. This
option is required if Soil Model No. (on page 498) is set to 1; otherwise, you can leave this
option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.

If the upward and downward stiffnesses are equal, then you need only enter a value for one.
The other stiffness defaults to the entered value.

If both User-Defined Upward Stif (on page 500) and User-Defined Downward Stif are set
to 0 or left blank, a fatal error results.

CAESAR II User's Guide

500

Buried Pipe Modeler

Ultimate Downward Load

Specifies the ultimate downward load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis.
The value you enter is the maximum resistance of the soil to a downward (-Y) displacement of
the pipeline. It is at this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic.
This option is required if Soil Model No. (on page 498) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option
blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.

If the upward and downward ultimate loads are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one. The other load defaults to the entered value.

If both Ultimate Upward Load (on page 500) and Ultimate Downward Load are set to 0 or
left blank, a fatal error results.

Soil Models
Only use the following procedures for estimating soil distributed stiffnesses and
ultimate loads when you do not have better available data or methods suited.
The soil restraint modeling algorithms used by the software are based on the following:

CAESAR II Basic Model - Stress Analysis Methods for Underground Pipelines, L.C. Peng,
published in 1978 in Pipeline Industry. For more information, see CAESAR II Basic Model
(on page 502).

American Lifelines Alliance - "Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation" from the

Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe by the American Lifelines Alliance
([Link] For more information, see
American Lifelines Alliance (see "American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model" on page 503).

Soil supports are modeled as bi-linear springs having an initial stiffness, an ultimate load, and a
yield stiffness. The yield stiffness is typically set close to zero. After the ultimate load on the soil
is reached, there is no further increase in load even though the displacement may continue. The
axial and transverse ultimate loads must be calculated to analyze buried pipe. Many researchers
differentiate between horizontal, upward, and downward transverse loads, but when the
variance in predicted soil properties and methods are considered, this differentiation is often
unwarranted.
The software allows the explicit entry of these data if it is necessary to your specific
project.
After the axial and lateral ultimate loads are known, the stiffness in each direction can be
determined by dividing the ultimate load by the yield displacement. Researchers have found that
the yield displacement is related to both the buried depth and the pipe diameter. The calculated
ultimate loads and stiffnesses are on a force per unit length of pipe basis.

See also
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box (on page 507)

CAESAR II User's Guide

501

Buried Pipe Modeler

CAESAR II Basic Model

The following recommendations apply when you select CAESAR II Basic Model as the
Soil Model Type in the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box. For more information about the dialog
box and the available soil properties, see Basic Soil Modeler dialog box (on page 507).
Either FRICTION COEFFICIENT or UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH may be left blank. With
clays, the friction coefficient is typically left blank and is automatically estimated by CAESAR II
as Su/600 psf. Both sandy soils and clay-like soils can be defined here.

The soil restraint equations use these soil properties to generate restraint ultimate loads and
stiffnesses. Defining a value for TEMPERATURE CHANGE is optional. If entered the thermal
strain is used to compute and print the theoretical virtual anchor length. These equations are:
Axial Ultimate Load (Fax)
Fax = D[ (2sH) + (pt) + (f)(D/4) ]
Where:
D = Friction coefficient, typical values are:
0.4 for silt
0.5 for sand
0.6 for gravel
0.6 for clay or Su/600
s= Soil density
H = Buried depth to the top of pipe
p= Pipe density
t = Pipe nominal wall thickness
f= Fluid density
D = Pipe diameter
Su = Undrained shear strength (specified for clay-like soils)
Transverse Ultimate Load (Ftr)
Ftr = 0.5s(H+D)2[tan(45 + /2)]2OCM
If Su is given (that is, the soil is clay), then Ftr as calculated above is multiplied by Su/250 psf.

CAESAR II User's Guide

502

Buried Pipe Modeler

Where:
= Angle of internal friction, typical values are:
27-45 for sand
26-35 for silt
0 for clay

OVERBURDEN COMPACTION MULTIPLIER (OCM) is an artificial CAESAR II term that

allows you to take a conservative approach when modeling uncertain soil response.
Because a higher stiffness generally produces conservative results, you may wish to
increase the transverse soil stiffness. CAESAR II uses the OCM to serve this purpose.

You can reduce the OCM from its default of 8 to values ranging from 5 to 7, depending on
the degree of compaction of the backfill. There is no theory which suggests that the OCM
cannot equal 1.0.

For a strict implementation of Peng's Theory as discussed in his articles (April 78 and May
78 issue of Pipeline Industry), use a value of 1.0 for the OCM.
Yield Displacement (yd):
yd = Yield Displacement Factor(H+D)
The Yield Displacement Factor defaults to 0.015(suggested for H = 3D).
Axial Stiffness (Kax) on a per length of pipe basis:
Kax=Fax / yd
Transverse Stiffness (Ktr) on a per length of pipe basis:
Ktr=Ftr / yd

American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model

The following information references "Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation" in
the American Lifelines Alliance document Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe
([Link] This document provides
bilinear stiffness of soil for axial, lateral, uplift and bearing. Each stiffness term has a component
associated with sandy soils (subscripted q) and a component associated with clays (subscripted
c). Data can be entered for pure granular soils and pure clays.
Soil stiffness for both clay and sand (cohesive and granular soils, respectively) are defined
through the following user-defined parameters:
c = soil cohesion representative of the soil backfill
H = soil depth to top of pipe (this is converted by C2 to depth to pipe centerline in ALA
calculations)
= effective unit weight of soil
= total dry unit weight of fill
Ko = coefficient of earth pressure at rest (can be calculated based on internal friction angle of
soil)

CAESAR II User's Guide

503

Buried Pipe Modeler

f = coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle at
the soil-pipe interface
= internal friction angle of soil

Elastic range of soil is either fixed or a function of D & H with limits based on D.
Yield Displacement
Factor

Entry

Limited by

t (dT) Axial

Length units

p (dP) Lateral

Multiple of D

0.04(H+D/2)

qu (dQu) Upward

Multiple of H

Minimum

qu (dQu) Upward

Multiple of D

qd (dQd) Downward

Multiple of D

Axial

Tu = peak friction force at pipe-soil interface maximum axial soil force per unit length that can be
transmitted to pipe)

CAESAR II User's Guide

504

Buried Pipe Modeler

D = pipe OD
= adhesion factor (for clays only)

c = soil cohesion representative of the soil backfill (undrained shear strength)

H = depth of cover to pipe centerline
= effective unit weight of soil
Ko = coefficient of earth pressure at rest
The ratio of the horizontal effective stress acting on a supporting structure and the vertical
effective stress in the soil at that point. At rest indicates the pipe does not move for this
calculation.
= interface angle of friction for pipe and soil, = f
f = coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle
at the soil-pipe interface
Pipe Coating

Concrete

1.0

Coal Tar

0.9

Rough Steel

0.8

Smooth Steel

0.7

Fusion Bonded Epoxy

0.6

Polyethylene

0.6

= internal friction angle of soil

t = axial displacement to develop
Tu = 0.1 inch for dense sand, 0.2 inch for loose sand, 0.3 inch for stiff clay, and 0.4 inch for
soft clay

Lateral
Pu = maximum horizontal soil bearing capacity (maximum lateral soil force per unit length that
can be transmitted to pipe)
Nch = horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)

CAESAR II User's Guide

505

Buried Pipe Modeler

Nqh = horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for sand (0 for =0)

Factor

Nch

H/D

6.752

0.065

-11.063

7.119

Nqh

H/D

2.399

0.439

-0.03

1.059E-3

-1.754E-5

Nqh

H/D

3.332

0.839

-0.090

5.606E-3

-1.319E-4

Nqh

H/D

4.565

1.234

-0.089

4.275E-3

-9.159E-5

Nqh

H/D

6.816

2.019

-0.146

7.651E-3

-1.683E-4

Nqh

H/D*

10.959

1.783

0.045

-5.425E-3 1.153E-4*
*

Nqh

H/D*

17.658

3.309

0.048

-6.443E-3 1.299E-4*
*

*CAESAR II limits the height/diameter (H/D) ratio to a maximum of 20 for angles at 40 to 45 degrees. The software
calculates any values specified that result in a ratio that is greater than 20 as equal to 20.
**The American Lifelines Alliance standard lists the horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for sand (N qh) as a negative
value for both 40 and 45 degree angles. This results in negative yield load values. CAESAR II calculates these values as
a positive value, as shown in the previous table.

Nqh can be interpolated for between 20and 45.

Vertical Uplift

Qu = maximum vertical upward soil bearing capacity (maximum vertical uplift soil force per unit
length that can be transmitted to pipe)
Ncv = vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)

CAESAR II User's Guide

506

Buried Pipe Modeler

Nqv = vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for sand

= 0.01H to 0.02H for dense to loose sands < 0.1D

= 0.1H to 0.2H for stiff to soft clays < 0.2D

Vertical Bearing

Qd - maximum vertical bearing soil force per unit length that can be transmitted to pipe.
Nc, Nq, N = vertical downward soil bearing capacity factors

= total dry unit weight of fill

qd = vertical displacement to develop Q d
= 0.1D for granular soils
= 0.2D for cohesive soils

Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box

Soil Models specifies options for the soil model method to use and defines basic soil
properties, such as undrained sheer strength, friction angles, and so forth. The modeler uses the
values that you define to compute axial, lateral, upward, and downward stiffnesses, along with
ultimate loads. Each set of soil properties is identified by a unique soil model number, starting
with the number 2. The soil model number is used in the buried element descriptions to tell
CAESAR II in what type of soil the pipe is buried. You can enter up to 15 different soil model
numbers in any one buried pipe job.

Soil model number 1 is reserved for user-defined values.

The soil models you enter do not have to be used in the current job. This provides a
convenient mechanism for soil property range studies.

CAESAR II User's Guide

507

Buried Pipe Modeler

Soil Model Type and Classification

Select the soil model method on which the software will base its calculations. Three different soil
model methods are available, each with its own set of soil properties.

American Lifelines Alliance (Sand/Gravel) - This is the default model is that is presented
for granular soils in "Appendix B" of the America Lifelines Alliance document Guidelines for
the Design of Buried Steel Pipe. This model was developed jointly by the American Society
of Civil Engineers and the Federal Emergency Management Agency in July 2001 (addenda
through February 2005.

American Lifelines Alliance (Clay) - This model is for clay soils and from the same
document as American Lifelines Alliance (Sand/Gravel).

CAESAR II Basic Model - A modified implementation of the method described by L.C. Peng
in his two-part article "Stress Analysis Methods for Underground Pipe Lines", published in
Pipe Line Industry (April/May 1978).
For more information, see Soil Models (on page 501).

ALPHA - ADHESION FACTOR

Specifies the soil adhesion factor. This option displays only when you select American
Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Clay as the Soil Classification.
If no value is defined, the soil adhesion factor is calculated using C - SOIL COHESION OF
BACKFILL based upon the following equation:
Alpha = 0.608-0.123C-0.274/(C**2+1)+0.695/(C**3+1)
Where C is in kips/[Link].
Possible values are listed in Figure B.2, "Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation" from
the Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe by the American Lifelines Alliance

C - SOIL COHESION OF BACKFILL

Specifies the soil cohesion representative of the backfill. This option displays only when you
select American Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Clay as the Soil
Classification.
Typical values for cohesive soils are between 2.5 and 20 psi (18 and 140kPa).

CAESAR II User's Guide

508

Buried Pipe Modeler

dP - YIELD DISP FACTOR, LAT, MAX MULTIPLE OF D

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate lateral restraint load is
developed. This is calculated using as the following equation:
dP = 0.4 (H + D/2)
However, the calculated value must be limited to a maximum multiple for the pipe outer diameter
(D). Typical values are between 0.1 and 0.15.

dQd - YIELD DISP FACTOR, DOWN, MULTIPLE OF D

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate downward restraint load is
development. This value is calculated as a multiple of the pipe outer diameter (D). Typical
values are as follows:

Granular soils - 0.1

Cohesive soils - 0.2

dQu - YIELD DISP FACTOR, UP, MAX MULTIPLE OF D

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate upward restraint load is
developed. This value is calculated as per the following equation:
dQu = MIN (MULTIPLE OF H) * H, (MULTIPLE OF D) * D)
The maximum multiple of the pipe outer diameter (D), must be entered here. Typical values are
as follows:

Sand - 0.1

Clay - 0.2

dQu - YIELD DISP FACTOR, UPWARD, MULTIPLE of H

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate upward restraint load is
developed. This value is calculated as per the following equation:
dQu - MIN (MULTIPLE OF H) * H, (MULTIPLE OF D) * D
The maximum multiple of the pipe buried depth (H) must be entered here. Typical values are as
follows:

Dense Sand - 0.01

Loose Sand - 0.02

Stiff Clay - 0.1

Soft Clay - 0.2

CAESAR II User's Guide

509

Buried Pipe Modeler

dT - YIELD DISP FACTOR, AXIAL

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate axial restraint load is
developed. This option displays only when you select American Lifeline Alliance in the Soil
Model Type list.
Typical values are as follows:

Dense Sand - 0.1 in. (2.5 mm.)

Loose Sand - 0.2 in (5.0 mm.)

Stiff Clay - 0.3 in. (7.5 mm.)

Soft Clay - 0.4 in. (10 mm.)

GAMMA - DRY SOIL DENSITY

Specifies the dry density of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This option displays only if you
select American Lifeline Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil
Classification.
Typical soil densities are listed below:
Soil

Dry Density
4.33E-2
lb/[Link].

Clay

Very Loose Sand

5.79E-2
lb/[Link].

1.200E-3
kg/[Link].
<=

1.606E-3
kg/[Link].

Loose Sand

6.08E-2
lb/[Link].

1.686E-3
kg/[Link].

Medium Sand

6.48E-2
lb/[Link].

1.797E-3
kg/[Link].

Dense Sand

6.66E-2
lb/[Link].

1.847E-3
kg/[Link].

Very Dense Sand

CAESAR II User's Guide

6.95E-2
lb/[Link].

1.928E-3
kg/[Link].

510

Buried Pipe Modeler

GAMMA PRIME - EFFECTIVE SOIL DENSITY

Specifies the effective density of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This option displays only
when you select American Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list.
The effective density of the soil may differ from the dry density if the soil is wet, and thus less
buoyant. The effective density of the soil is less than the dry density of the soil. If the water table
may engulf the pipe even for a short time, then it is probably appropriate to enter a wet effective
density. If the soil is expected to remain dry, then enter the dry soil density. The following tables
list some typical soil densities:
Soil

Dry Density

Clay

Very Loose Sand

4.33E-2
lb/[Link].

1.200E-3
kg/[Link].

5.79E-2
lb/[Link].

1.606E-3
kg/[Link].

Loose Sand

6.08E-2
lb/[Link].

1.686E-3
kg/[Link].

Medium Sand

6.48E-2
lb/[Link].

1.797E-3
kg/[Link].

Dense Sand

6.66E-2
lb/[Link].

1.847E-3
kg/[Link].

Very Dense Sand

Soil

1.928E-3
kg/[Link].

Wet (Buoyant) Density

2.73E-2
lb/[Link].

Clay

Very Loose Sand

6.95E-2
lb/[Link].

3.62E-2
lb/[Link].

7.572E-4
kg/[Link].
<=

1.005E-3
kg/[Link].

Loose Sand

3.80E-2
lb/[Link].

1.055E-3
kg/[Link].

Medium Sand

4.05E-2
lb/[Link].

1.123E-3
kg/[Link].

Dense Sand

4.17E-2
lb/[Link].

1.155E-3
kg/[Link].

Very Dense Sand

CAESAR II User's Guide

4.35E-2
lb/[Link].

1.206E-3
kg/[Link].

511

Buried Pipe Modeler

F - COATING FACTOR
Specifies the coating dependent factor that relates the internal friction angle of the soil to the
friction angle at the soil-pipe interface. This option displays only if you select American Lifeline
Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil Classification.
Typical values for external pipe coatings are:

Concrete - 1.0

Coal Tar - 0.9

Rough Steel - 0.8

Smooth Steel - 0.7

Fusion Bonded Epoxy - 0.6

Polyethelyne - 0.6

FRICT. ANGLE
Specifies the internal friction angle of the soil. Typical values are:

Clay - 0

Silt - 26-25

Sand - 27-45

For the American Lifelines Alliance soil model, this entry must be between 20- and
45-degrees.

For the CAESAR II basic soil model, this entry is used in the soil restraint equations to
generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses.

FRICTION COEFFICIENT
Specifies the coefficient of friction between pipe and soil. If the undrained shear strength (on
page 514) is entered, the friction coefficient may be left blank. The friction coefficient is
calculated using the following equation:
Friction Coeffecient = Su/0.4167E + 1
Typical friction coefficient values are:

Silt - 0.4

Sand - 0.5

Gravel - 0.6

Clay - 0.6 or Su/ 0.4167E + 1

This option displays only when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.

CAESAR II User's Guide

512

Buried Pipe Modeler

H - BURIED DEPTH TO TOP OF PIPE

Specifies the buried pipe depth to the top of the pipe. This option displays only when you select
American Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list.
The American Lifetime Alliance method actually defines H as "depth to pipe centerline".
CAESAR II automatically converts this based upon the individual pipe sizes.
Upward soil stiffness calculations are considered to be applicable for H/D ratios of 10 and
below.

KO - COEFFICIENT OF PRESSURE AT REST

Specifies the coefficient of earth pressure. This option displays only if you select American
Lifeline Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil Classification.
Typical values are on the order of 1.0. If left blank, K0 defaults to the following:
K0 - 1.0 - sin(internal friction angle of the soil)
The internal friction angle of the soil is defined by FRICT. ANGLE (Sand=27-45;
Silt=26-35; Clay=0) (deg.) (see "FRICT. ANGLE" on page 512).

OVERBURDEN COMPACTION MULTIPLIER

Specifies the factor by which the transverse ultimate load is multiplied. This option displays only
when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
This value is used in the soil restraint equations to generate restraint ultimate loads and
stiffnesses. The default value is 8. This number can be reduced depending on the degree of
compaction of the backfill. Backfill efficiency can be approximated using the proctor number,
defined in most soils text books. Standard practice is to multiple the proctor number by 8 and
use the result as the compaction multiplier.

SOIL DENSITY
Specifies the weight of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This value is used in the soil restraint
equations to generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses. This option displays only when
you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.

CAESAR II User's Guide

513

Buried Pipe Modeler

TEMPERATURE CHANGE
Specifies the installed to operating pipe temperature difference.
The thermal expansion coefficient and the temperature change inputs are required if you want
CAESAR II to calculate and display the virtual anchor length.

THERMAL EXPANSION COEFFICIENT

Specifies the pipe thermal expansion coefficient multiplied by 1E06.
The thermal expansion coefficient and the temperature change inputs are required if you want
CAESAR II to calculate and display the virtual anchor length.

UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH

Specifies the undrained shear strength. This option displays only when you select CAESAR II
Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
You can leave this option blank if Friction Coefficient is defined.

YIELD DISPLACEMENT FACTOR

Specifies the value used to calculate the soil restraint stiffness. This value must be greater than
0.0. This option displays only when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type
list.
The yield displacement factor is inversely proportional to the soil restraint stiffness. By default,
the yield displacement depth of 1.5% of the buried depth is used, which translates to a yield
displacement factor of 0.015.

Model an underground piping system

The recommended workflow for using the Buried Pipe Modeler is outlined in the steps below.
A buried pipe example problem is provided to illustrate the features of the modeler. This
example should not be considered a guide for recommended underground piping design. For
more information, see Buried Pipe Example (on page 515).
1. Click Underground Pipe Modeler
Underground to open the modeler.

on the CAESAR II toolbar or click Input >

2. Click File > Open on the Buried Pipe Modeler main menu and select the original unburied
job.
The original job serves as the basis for the buried pipe model. It must already exist
and need only contain the basic geometry of the piping system. The modeler will remove
any existing restraints in the buried portion.
3. Click Soil Models

on the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar.

4. In the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box, select a Soil Model Type.
The software populates the dialog box with soil data properties specific to the soil model you
select.

CAESAR II User's Guide

514

Buried Pipe Modeler

5. Enter the necessary soil data and click OK to exit the dialog box.
To enter additional soil models, click Add New Soil Model.
The software saves the soil data in a file with the extension SOI.
6. In columns 1-5 of the buried element data input area, describe the sections of the piping
system that are buried and define any required fine mesh areas and click Save
.
User-defined soil data can be entered in columns 6-13.
7. On the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar, click Convert
to convert the original model into the
buried model. This step produces a detailed description of the conversion.
By default, the software appends the name of the job with the letter B. For example, if the
original job is named UndergroundPipe, the software saves the second input file with the
name UndergroundPipe B. If the default name is not appropriate, click File > Change
Buried Pipe Job Name and rename the buried job.
8. Click File > Exit to return the CAESAR II main window. From here, you can use Input >
Piping to review and edit the buried model, add any additional underground restraints (such
as thrust block) to the buried model, and perform the analysis of the buried pipe job.

A buried pipe example problem is provided to illustrate the features of the modeler. This
example should not be considered a guide for recommended underground piping design.
For more information, see Buried Pipe Example (on page 515).

Clicking Convert
model.

CAESAR II User's Guide

on the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar begins the conversion to a buried

518

Buried Pipe Modeler

The screen listing can also be printed.

Static Analysis Overview

During static analysis, CAESAR II assesses all of the piping data and processes the information
for meaningful reporting later. The software creates element stiffness matrices and load vectors,
as well as solves for displacements, forces and moments, reactions, and stresses. In addition,
you can design specific load cases for analysis, select and design spring hangers, and evaluate
environmental loads.
You must run error checking prior to performing static analysis. If CAESAR II does not find any
errors, the software displays a center of gravity report and generates the analysis data files, and
can then commence the solution and reporting phase.
If the software finds errors with the piping data, it does not continue analysis. You must make
corrections and rerun the Error Checker until no errors exist before the software can complete
analysis.
After error checking, you can specify the load cases to analyze. CAESAR II recommends an
initial set of load cases that you can accept or modify.

Error Checking
You must successfully complete the error checking portion of the piping input before you can
perform static analysis. When error checking completes, the software creates the required
analysis data files. Any changes that you make to the model are not reflected in the analysis
unless you rerun the error checking. If the piping input has changed, CAESAR II does not allow
an analysis to take place until you successfully run the error checker.
Error Check
Saves the input and starts the error checking procedure. You can access the Error Check
command only from the Classic Piping Input or CAESAR II Structural Input dialog boxes.
Batch Run
Checks the input data, analyzes the system, and presents the results without any additional
actions from you.
The software assumes that the load cases associated with the current job do not
need to change, and that the default account number (if Accounting is active) is correct. These
criteria are usually met after the first pass through the analysis.

CAESAR II User's Guide

522

Static Analysis
During error checking, the software reviews the CAESAR II model and alerts you to any possible
errors, inconsistencies, or noteworthy items. These items display in a grid as errors, warnings,
or notes.
Errors and Warnings Dialog Box
Displays the total numbers of errors, warnings, or notes for the current job. You must resolve all
errors for the software to run the analysis. Warnings and notes are for reference and do not
prevent analysis.
Double-click the row number of the message, and the software takes you to the element in the
piping input that pertains to the error, warning, or note. Click the tabs at the bottom of the
window to alternate between the Classic Piping Input and the Errors and Warnings dialog
boxes.
Double-click the column headers to sort the messages by Message Type, Message Number,
or Element/Node Number. Click File > Print to print the messages.

Error Message Type

The software reports an error when the analysis cannot continue. Errors can be caused by a
problem in the model, such as a piping element with no defined length. You must correct all
errors before the software allows you to continue the analysis.
Warning Message Type
Warning Message TypeThe software reports a warning when there is a problem that can be
overcome using some assumptions. An example of this is the wall thickness of an element
that is insufficient to meet the minimum wall thickness for the given pressure (hoop stress).
You do not have to correct warnings to get a successful analysis, but you should carefully
review them.
Note Message Type
The software reports a note to inform you of a fact related to the model. An example of a
note is the number of hangers to be designed by CAESAR II or the Center of Gravity report
generated after analysis. Note messages are just informational, and there is no action
required.

CAESAR II User's Guide

523

Static Analysis

What is a Load Case?

In CAESAR II, a load case is a group of piping system loads that are analyzed together and
occur at the same time. An example of a load case is an operating analysis composed of the
thermal, deadweight, and pressure loads together. Another example is an as-installed analysis
of deadweight loads alone.
A load case can also be composed of the combinations of the results of other load cases. For
example, a load case can be the difference in displacements between the operating and
installed cases.
No matter what the contents of the load case, it always produces a set of reports, which list
restraint loads, displacements and rotations, internal forces, moments, and stresses. Because of
piping code definitions for calculation methods and/or allowable stresses, CAESAR II also tags
load cases with a stress type. For example, the combination mentioned previously might be
tagged as an expansion stress case (EXP).

Piping System Loads

The piping system loads that compose the basic non-combination load sets relate to various
input items found on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. The following tables list the individual
load set designations, their names and the input items, which make them available for analysis.
Designation

Name

Input items which activate this

load case

Deadweight

Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight,

Refractory Weight, Cladding
Weight, Fluid Weight, Rigid Weight

WNC

Weight No fluid Contents

Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight,

Refractory Weight, Cladding
Weight, Rigid Weight

Water Weight

Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight,

Refractory Weight, Cladding
Weight, Water-filled Weight, Rigid
Weight (usually used for Hydro
Test)

Thermal Set 1

Temperature #1

Thermal Set 2

Temperature #2

Thermal Set 3

Temperature #3

Thermal Set 9

Temperature #9

Pressure Set 1

Pressure #1

Pressure Set 2

Pressure #2

CAESAR II User's Guide

524

Static Analysis
P3

Pressure Set 3

Pressure #3

Pressure Set 9

Pressure #9

Hydrostatic Test Pressure

Hydro Pressure

Displacements Set 1

Displacements (1st Vector)

Displacements Set 2

Displacements (2nd Vector)

Displacements Set 3

Displacements (3rd Vector)

Displacement Set 9

Displacements (9th Vector)

Force Set 1

Forces/Moments (1st Vector)

Force Set 2

Forces/Moments (2nd Vector)

Force Set 3

Forces/Moments (3rd Vector)

Force Set 9

Forces/Moments (9th Vector)

WIN1

Wind Load 1

Wind Shape Factor

WIN2

Wind Load 2

Wind Shape Factor

WIN3

Wind Load 3

Wind Shape Factor

WIN4

Wind Load 4

Wind Shape Factor

WAV1

Wave Load 1

Wave Load On

WAV2

Wave Load 2

Wave Load On

WAV3

Wave Load 3

Wave Load On

WAV4

Wave Load 4

Wave Load On

Uniform Loads

Uniform Loads (1st Vector)

Uniform Loads

Uniform Loads (2nd Vector)

Uniform Loads

Uniform Loads (3rd Vector)

Cold Spring

Material # 18 or 19

Hanger Initial Loads

Hanger Design or Prespecified

Hangers

Available piping system loads display on the left side of the Static Analysis dialog box.

CAESAR II User's Guide

525

Static Analysis
Basic Load Cases
Load cases are comprised of one or more major load types as defined in the input. Major load
cases are load cases that require a solution to the matrix equation [K]{x} = {f}.
For example:

W+T1+P1+F1 (OPE) is a major load case

W+P1+F1 (SUS) is a major load case

Basic load cases can consist of a single load, such as WNC for an as-installed weight analysis.
A basic load can also include several loads added together, such as W+T1+P1+D1+F1 for an
operating analysis. The stress type categories sustained (SUS), expansion (EXP), occasional
(OCC), operating (OPE), and fatigue (FAT) are specified at the end of the load case definition.
The definition of the two examples is: WNC (SUS) and W+T1+P1+D1+H (OPE). Enter each
basic load case in this manner.
Load components, such as W, T1, D1, WIN1, can be preceded by scale factors such as 2.0,
-0.5, and so forth. Likewise, you can precede references to previous load cases by scale factors
when you build combination cases.
This provides you with several benefits.

If one loading is a multiple of the other (such as Safe Shutdown Earthquake being two times
Operating Basis Earthquake) you only have to type one loading in the Classic Piping Input
dialog box. You can use this loading in a scaled or unscaled form in the Static Analysis Load Case Editor dialog box.

If a loading can be directionally reversible, such as wind or earthquake, you only have to
type one loading in the Classic Piping Input dialog box. You can use this loading preceded
by a + or a - to switch the direction.

Load Rating Design Factor (LRDF) methods can be implemented by scaling individual load
components by their risk-dependent factors. For example:
1.05W + 1.1T1+1.1D1+1.25 WIN1
You can select the stress type from the list on each line.

Combination Load Cases

You can combine the results of the basic load cases by using combination load cases. Always
type these combinations after the last of the basic load cases. Designate combinations of basic
load cases by using the prefix L1, L2, and so on.
Algebraic combination load cases are combinations of previously-solved major load cases. For
example:

L1-L2 (EXP) is a combination case which combines the displacements, forces, and stresses
using a combination method that you select.

L4+L6+L8 (OCC) is a combination case which combines the displacements, forces, and
stresses using a combination method that you select.

The + and - signs are unary operators/sign of multiplier. If no value precedes the load for
major load cases or the load case for combination cases, then the multiplier is +1.0 or -1.0. If a
value precedes the load or the load case, then the multiplier is +value or -value.

CAESAR II User's Guide

526

Static Analysis
You must specify the expected number of load cycles for all load cases with stress type
fatigue (FAT).

The following family of load cases provides an example of algebraic combinations.

Load
Case

Designation

Comments

W+T1+P1+H+0.67C Hot operating. The 0.67scale factor takes credit only for 2/3
S (OPE)
of the cold spring.

W1+P1+H+0.67CS( Cold operating with cold spring included.

OPE)

W1+P1+H(SUS)

Traditional sustained case.

WIN1(OCC)

Wind case. This will be manipulated later to represent

average wind 1X, maximum wind 2X (in the positive and
negative directions).

L1-L2(EXP)

Traditional cold to hot expansion case. Use L for load,

rather than DS.

CAESAR II User's Guide

527

Static Analysis
Load
Case

Designation

Comments

L1-L2(FAT)

Same case evaluated for fatigue at 10,000 cycles.

L1+L4(OPE)

Hot operating with average wind (in positive direction).

L1-L4(OPE)

Hot operating with average wind (in negative direction).

L1+2L4(OPE)

Hot operating with maximum wind (in positive direction).

L1-2L4(OPE)

Hot operating with maximum wind (in negative direction).

L2+L4(OPE)

Cold operating with average wind (in positive direction).

L2-L4(OPE)

Cold operating with average wind (in negative direction).

L2+2L4(OPE)

Cold operating with maximum wind (in positive direction).

L2-2L4(OPE)

Cold operating with maximum wind (in negative direction).

L3+L4(OCC)

Occasional stress case, sustained plus average wind.

L3+2L4(OCC)

Occasional stress case, sustained plus maximum wind.

L9+L10+L11+L12(O Maximum restraint load case. The combination option

PE)
should be MAX.

CAESAR II permits the specification of up to 999 load cases for analysis. Copy the model
to a new file to specify the additional load cases if more cases are required.

Working with Load Cases

From the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box, you can create and edit load cases
for analysis. A load case is a group of piping system load primitives that are analyzed together.
The dialog box features two views that you select from the upper right corner of the dialog box.
List View - The default view for editing load cases, shows all load cases associated with the job.
From this view, you can edit individual load cases, create new load cases by typing in the
primitives, and drag and drop from the Loads Defined in Input or the load case identifier to
build load cases or create combination load cases.
Other List view functionality includes:

Group By functionality - Click a column heading and drag it to the top to sort the list of load
cases by that column.

Filter functionality on columns - Select the column head filter control and choose the filter
options for the selected column.

Static columns - See the load case identifier, definition and name even when you scroll to
set additional load case options.

CAESAR II User's Guide

528

Static Analysis

Column re-ordering - Click and drag to change the order of the List view columns.

Load Case Editor context menu - Right-click any load case and insert a blank new load
case above or below it, or delete the selected load case without having to click outside of the
list.

CAESAR II saves the grouping, filtering, and column re-ordering settings for the current
session only.
Group Edit View - A group (or bulk) editing view lets you select multiple load cases and make
changes to options all at once. For more information, see Editing Multiple Load Cases (on page
529).

Editing Multiple Load Cases

Use the Group Edit view of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor to update values on
multiple load cases at one time. This view saves you valuable time as you can make global
changes to load cases, rather than having to edit each load case individually.

To perform a group edit of multiple load cases

1. Open a CAESAR II job.
2. Run error checking or the analysis, and then select Static Analysis.
3. Click Group Edit in the upper-right corner of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
From the Group Edit view of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor, you can see the
Loads Defined in Input list, the existing load cases already defined for the job, and the
available options that you can globally change.
4. CTRL+click to select random load cases or SHIFT+click to select a group of load cases for
which you want to set options.
CAESAR II deactivates any boxes for options that already have differing values in the load
cases. The software immediately applies all changes made to the active boxes to the
selected load cases.

Building Static Load Cases

The CAESAR II load case editor combines native and combination loads as needed by the
various piping codes that CAESAR II supports.
This section describes which load cases to use in a variety of situations. If you need assistance
in load case definition for a situation not covered here, or if you need further clarification of the
load cases described, please contact ICAS Technical Support by e-mail at
caesarii@[Link].
Standard load cases for B31.1, B31.3, ASME SECT III Class 2 & 3, NAVY 505, B31.4, B31.5,
B31.8, B31.9, B31.11, Canadian Z662, RCC-M C & D, Stoomwezen, CODETI, Norwegian,
FDBR, BS 806 piping codes are as follows
Standard load cases for situations where you have weight, temperature, and pressure:
L1

W+T1+P1

CAESAR II User's Guide

(OPE)

529

Static Analysis
L2

W+P1

(SUS)

L1-L2

(EXP)*

* Use the algebraic combination method on the Load Cases tab for the expansion case.
Some of the piping codes perform a code stress check on the operating case and some
do not. For more information, see the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide for the equations used
by the various piping codes to obtain code stress and allowable stress.
The expansion case is a combination case that results from subtracting the sustained case from
the operating case. Because of this, the expansion case represents the change in the piping
system due to the effect of temperature, but in the presence of other loads. This is important
because the restraint status of the operating and sustained cases can be different if there are
nonlinear restraints (such as +Y, -Z, any restraint with a gap, and so on) or boundary conditions
(such as friction).
Standard load cases for B31.4 Ch IX, B31.8 Ch VIII, and DNV codes:
L1

W+T1+P1

(OPE)

W+P1

(SUS)

No expansion stress is calculated for these piping codes.

Standard load cases for BS7159 and UKOOA piping codes:
L1

W+T1+P1

(OPE)

No expansion or sustained stress is calculated for these piping codes.

Recommended Load Cases

When you initially open the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box, the software
recommends three types of load cases, based on the loads defined in the model: Operating,
Sustained, and Expansion. The software does not recommend Occasional load cases.
Operating load cases represent the loads acting on the pipe during hot operation. These load
cases include primary loadings (weight pressure, and force), secondary loadings (displacements
and thermal expansions). Operating cases are used to find hot displacements for interference
checking, and to find hot restraint and equipment loads. CAESAR II combines weight, pressure
case, and hanger loads with each of the thermal load cases when recommending operating load
cases. For example, the software combines the first displacement set with the first thermal set,
the second displacement set with the second thermal set, and so on. Then, the software
combines any cold spring loads.
Sustained load cases represent the primary force-driven loadings acting on the pipe. This case
is weight and pressure alone. This usually coincides with the cold as-installed load case.
Sustained load cases are used to satisfy the code sustained stress requirements, as well as to
calculate as-installed restraint and equipment loads. Sustained load cases are generally built by
combining weight with each of the pressure and force sets, and then with any hanger loads.

CAESAR II User's Guide

530

Static Analysis
Expansion load cases represent the range between the displacement extremes usually between
the operating and sustained cases. Expansion load cases are used to meet expansion stress
requirements. Generally, when you specify only one temperature and one pressure, the
recommended cases look similar to the following:
Case 1

W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE)

Operating

Case 2

W+P1+H (SUS)

Sustained load case

Case 3

L1-L2 (EXP)

Expansion load case

Review any load recommendations made by CAESAR II.

CAESAR II does not recommend any occasional load cases. Definition of these is your
responsibility.
If the recommended load cases do not satisfy the analysis requirements, you can delete or
modify them. Conversely, you can reset the load cases at any time to the software
recommended set.
If you have an operating temperature below ambient in addition to one above ambient you
should add another expansion load case as follows:
Case 1

W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE)

Operating

Case 2

W+D2+T2 +P1+H (OPE)

Operating

Case 3

W+P1+H (SUS)

Sustained load case

Case 4

L1-L3 (EXP)

Expansion load case

Case 5

L2-L3 (EXP)

Expansion load case

Case 6

L2-L1 (EXP)

Expansion load case

Static Seismic Load Cases

In the Classic Piping Input dialog box, click the Uniform Loads auxiliary panel and select the
in G's option. On the first element, type the seismic load in Gs. Enter the X-direction
acceleration in the Vector 1 box, the Y-direction acceleration in the Vector 2 box, and the
Z-direction acceleration in the Vector 3 box. This makes load case generation easier.
Because a seismic event is likely to occur while the piping system is in operation, an operating
case should have all operating loads plus the seismic load. This load case is then used with the
standard operating case to segregate the effect of the seismic load. The seismic load is then
combined with the static sustained load case for code compliance considerations.
L1

W+T1+P1

(OPE)

W+T1+P1+U1

(OPE)

CAESAR II User's Guide

531

Static Analysis
L3

W+T1+P1-U1

(OPE)

W+T1+P1+U2

(OPE)

W+T1+P1-U2

(OPE)

W+T1+P1+U3

(OPE)

W+T1+P1-U3

(OPE)

W+P1

(SUS)

L1-L8

(EXP)

L10

L2-L1

(OCC)

L11

L3-L1

(OCC)

L12

L4-L1

(OCC)

L13

L5-L1

(OCC)

L14

L6-L1

(OCC)

L15

L7-L1

(OCC)

L16

L8+L10

(OCC)

L17

L8+L11

(OCC)

L18

L8+L12

(OCC)

L19

L8+L13

(OCC)

L20

L8+L14

(OCC)

L21

L8+L15

(OCC)

Load cases 2 through 7 include all the loads and call these operating cases. The subtracted
uniform load vectors reverse the direction of the uniform load applied. Use these load case
results for occasional restraint loads and occasional displacements. Load cases 10 through 15
signify the segregated occasional loads. These are called occasional load cases, but you do not
need a code stress check here because these are only part of the final solution for code
compliance. Because of this, you can select the Suppress option for the Output Status. Also,
these combination load cases all use the Algebraic Combination Method on the Load Cases
tab. Load cases 16 through 21 are all used for code compliance. Add the segregated occasional
results to the sustained case results and use either the Scalar or ABS Absolute Value
Combination Method. Both scalar and absolute will give the same code stress results although
the displacements, forces, and moments could be different. Because you do not use any results

CAESAR II User's Guide

532

Static Analysis
except the stresses for combination cases, it does not matter which combination method you
use.
Sometimes you want to combine the results of vertical g-loads with horizontal g-loads. A factor
is often applied to the vertical g-load component of the combined load. You can accomplish this
when you type the Uniform Load data on the Classic Piping Input dialog box for the vertical
component, or you can do this directly in the load case editor as shown below. Using the
previous example, combine .67 vertical g-load with each horizontal component.
L1

W+T1+P1

(OPE)

W+T1+P1+U1+0.67U2

(OPE)

W+T1+P1-U1+0.67U2

(OPE)

W+T1+P1+U1-0.67U2

(OPE)

W+T1+P1-U1-0.67U2

(OPE)

W+T1+P1+U3+0.67U2

(OPE)

W+T1+P1-U3+0.67U2

(OPE)

W+T1+P1+U3-0.67U2

(OPE)

W+T1+P1-U3-0.67U2

(OPE)

L10

W+P1

(SUS)

L11

L1-L10

(EXP)

L12

L2-L1

(OCC)

L13

L3-L1

(OCC)

L14

L4-L1

(OCC)

L15

L5-L1

(OCC)

L16

L6-L1

(OCC)

L17

L7-L1

(OCC)

L18

L8-L1

(OCC)

L19

L9-L1

(OCC)

L20

L10+L12

(OCC)

L21

L10+L13

(OCC)

CAESAR II User's Guide

533

Static Analysis
L22

L10+L14

(OCC)

L23

L10+L15

(OCC)

L24

L10+L16

(OCC)

L25

L10+L17

(OCC)

L26

L10+L18

(OCC)

L27

L10+L19

(OCC)

Sometimes you need to combine the horizontal and vertical components of seismic loading. You
can do this from the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. Set up the static seismic load cases
as shown in the first example, then combine the segregated horizontal and vertical load cases
together using the SRSS Combination Method. Add these results to the sustained case.
L1

W+T1+P1

(OPE)

W+T1+P1+U1

(OPE)

W+T1+P1-U1

(OPE)

W+T1+P1+U2

(OPE)

W+T1+P1-U2

(OPE)

W+T1+P1+U3

(OPE)

W+T1+P1-U3

(OPE)

W+P1

(SUS)

L1-L8

(EXP)

L10

L2-L1

(OCC) *

L11

L3-L1

(OCC) *

L12

L4-L1

(OCC) *

L13

L5-L1

(OCC) *

L14

L6-L1

(OCC) *

L15

L7-L1

(OCC) *

L16

L10+L12

(OCC) **

CAESAR II User's Guide

534

Static Analysis
L17

L10+L13

(OCC) **

L18

L11+L12

(OCC) **

L19

L11+L13

(OCC) **

L20

L14+L12

(OCC) **

L21

L14+L13

(OCC) **

L22

L15+L12

(OCC) **

L23

L15+L13

(OCC) **

L24

L8+L16

(OCC) ***

L25

L8+L17

(OCC) ***

L26

L8+L18

(OCC) ***

L27

L8+L19

(OCC) ***

L28

L8+L20

(OCC) ***

L29

L8+L21

(OCC) ***

L30

L8+L22

(OCC) ***

L31

L8+L23

(OCC) ***

* Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
** Use the SRSS combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
*** Use the ABS or Scalar combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
Change the operating load cases that include seismic loads to OCC for piping codes that
do not perform a sustained code stress check. Use these cases for code compliance. The
combination cases are not needed in such cases.

Recommended Load Cases for Hanger Selection

CAESAR II must analyze two additional load cases to get the data required to select a variable
support, if you want to let the software design spring hangers. The two basic requirements for
sizing hangers are the deadweight carried by the hanger, which is hanger hot load, and the
range of vertical travel to be accommodated.
The first load case, traditionally called restrained weight, consists of only deadweight (W). For
this analysis, CAESAR II includes a rigid restraint in the vertical direction at every location where
a hanger is to be sized. The load on the restraint from this analysis is the deadweight that must
be carried by the support in the hot condition.

CAESAR II User's Guide

535

Static Analysis
For the second load case, the hanger is replaced with an upward force equal to the calculated
hot load, and an operating load case is run. This load case, traditionally called free thermal,
includes the deadweight and thermal effects, the first pressure set if defined, and any
displacements, W+D1+T1+P1. The vertical displacements of the hanger locations, along with
the previously calculated deadweights, are then passed on to the hanger selection routine. After
the hangers are sized, the added forces are removed and replaced with the selected supports
along with their pre-loads cold loads designated by load component, H. Load component H can
appear in the load cases for hanger design if you have predefined any springs. In this case, it
would represent the pre-defined operating loads.
CAESAR II then continues with the load case recommendations as defined above. A typical set
of recommended load cases for a single operating load case spring hanger design is as follows:
Case 1

Weight for hanger loads

Case 2

W+D1+T1+P1

Operating for hanger travel

Case 3

W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE)

Operating, hangers included

Case 4

W+P1+H (SUS)

Sustained load case

Case 5

L3-L4 (EXP)

Expansion load case

These hanger sizing load Cases 1 and 2 generally supply no information to the output reports
other than the data found in the hanger tables. Cases 3, 4, and 5 match the recommended load
cases for a standard analysis with one thermal and one pressure defined. The displacement
combination numbers in Case 5 have changed to reflect the new order. If multiple temperatures
and pressures existed in the input, they too would appear in this set after the second spring
hanger design load case.
Two other hanger design criteria also affect the recommended load cases. If the actual cold
loads for selected springs are to be calculated, one additional load case, WNC+H, would appear
before Case 3. If the hanger design criteria of the piping system is set so that the proposed
springs must accommodate more than one operating condition, other load cases must appear
before Case 3 above. You must perform an extra hanger design operating load case for each
additional operating load case used to design springs. See Load Cases with Hanger Design (on
page 536) for more information on these options.

Load Cases with Hanger Design

When CAESAR II designs spring hangers, two additional load cases are required. The letter H
designates the hanger installation load (pre-load) that is always present in a spring hanger.
L1

(HGR) *HS = Rigid

W+T1+P1

(HGR) *HS = Ignore

W+T1+P1+H

(OPE) *HS = As Designed

W+P1+H

(SUS) *HS = As Designed

CAESAR II User's Guide

536

Static Analysis
L5

L3-L4

(EXP) **

*HS is the hanger stiffness specified in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
** Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
When you use only predefined spring hangers, there is no need for the first two load cases.
However, the letter H is still required in the operating and sustained load cases. Other hanger
load cases are required when you use multiple load case design. In such instances, let
CAESAR II recommend the load cases. You can then add or edit the non-hanger design load
cases as necessary.

Load Cases with Pitch and Roll

There is often platform movement, or relative movement, between two platforms with
inter-connected piping, in an offshore piping system. This also applies to FSPO and other
shipboard piping systems. Apply the pitch and roll displacements to CNodes on each affected
restraint. Use displacement vectors not already in use to describe thermal displacement
boundary conditions. There is usually a + displacement and a - displacement to describe the
peak pitch and roll conditions. Look at the state of the platform at its peaks to determine the
worst two conditions for relative displacement between piping separated by the largest distance
along the line of wave travel. D3 and D4 describe two peak pitch conditions. D1 is a thermal
displacement.
L1

W+T1+D1+D3+P1

(OPE)

W+T1+D1+D4+P1

(OPE)

W+P1

(SUS)

L1-L3

(EXP) *

L2-L3

(EXP) *

* Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
It is likely that you will want to perform a fatigue analysis because of the large number of
displacement cycles common in pitch and roll situations. Select the appropriate fatigue curve on
the first piping input under the Allowable Stress area on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Add the following cases to the previous example. Enter the number of cycles for each pitch
condition for fatigue stress type (FAT).
L6

L1-L3

(FAT)

21000000

L2-L3

(FAT)

21000000

The 21000000 represents 21 million load cycles during the life of the piping system. Use the
number of cycles that you would expect to occur during the life of such a storm for large
displacements, such as those that occur during a 1-year, 30-year, or 100-year event. Multiply
this number by the number storms likely to happen during the lifetime of the piping system.

CAESAR II User's Guide

537

Static Analysis

Load Cases with Thermal Displacements

Thermal displacements are generally associated with specific operating conditions. D1 is
applied with T1, D2 to T2, and so on. When one temperature is below ambient, and one is
above ambient, you can determine the full expansion stress range.
L1

W+T1+D1+P1

(OPE)

W+T2+D2+P1

(OPE)

W+P1

(SUS)

L1-L3

(EXP) * effects of D1 and T1

L2-L3

(EXP) * effects of D2 and T2

L1-L2

(EXP) * full expansion stress

range

* Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box.
Include the thermal displacements in the operating cases as shown for piping codes with
no expansion stress computation.

Load Cases with Thermal Displacements and Settlement

Use a CNode for settlement on any affected restraints. This CNode must be a node number that
is not used elsewhere in the model. Place the settlement on the CNode using a displacement
vector that is not already used for thermal displacements. This example uses D3 to describe
restraint settlement.
L1

W+T1+D1+D3+P1

(OPE)

W+T2+D2+D3+P1

(OPE)

W+P1

(SUS)

W+P2

(SUS)

L1-L3

(EXP) * effects of D1 and T1 and

settlement

L2-L4

(EXP) * effects of D2 and T2 and

settlement

L1-L2

(EXP) * full expansion stress range

between OPE1 and OPE2

Settlement is evaluated as an expansion load because it is strain related with a half-cycle.

CAESAR II User's Guide

538

Static Analysis
* Include the thermal and settlement displacements in the operating cases as shown for piping
codes with no expansion stress computation.

Providing Wind Data

If you specify the wind shape factor in the Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II lists
WIN1, WIN2, WIN3 and WIN4 as available loads in Static Analysis - Load Case Editor
dialog box. Because the software requires additional information to make an analysis, CAESAR
II activates the Wind Loads tab so that you can define the required wind load data.

You can specify up to four different wind load profiles. Omit any of them to exclude the data from
the analysis. CAESAR II supports thirteen wind codes. For more information, see Wind Loads
Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 554).

Select Wind Code or Profile

You can use the following wind codes to generate wind loads on piping systems. Refer to the
CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide for details on which versions of each code that CAESAR II
supports.
ASCE 7

IS 875

AS/NZS 1170.0

Mexico

CAESAR II User's Guide

539

Static Analysis
Brazil NBR 6123

NBC

BS 6399-2

UBC

China GB 50009

Wind Pressure vs Elevation (user defined)

EN 1991-1-4

Wind Velocity vs Elevation (user defined )

IBC

Providing Wave Data

If you specify the hydrodynamic coefficients in Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II lists
WAV1, WAV2, WAV3 and WAV4 as available loads in Static Analysis (Load Case Editor).
Because the software requires additional information to make an analysis, CAESAR II activates
the Wave Loads tab so that you can define the extra wave load data.

You can specify up to four different wave load profiles. Current data and wave data can be
specified and included together. Omit either of them to exclude the data from the analysis.
CAESAR II supports three current models and six wave models. For more information, see
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 570).

CAESAR II User's Guide

540

543

Static Analysis

Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box

Controls options for static analysis.
After error-checking your model, specify your static load cases using the Edit Static Load
Cases
command, which is only available after you have successfully error checked the
piping input file.
The Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box lists many details about the input, including
the following:

Available loads that are defined in the input.

Available stress types.

Current load cases offered for analysis.

CAESAR II lists recommended load cases if the job is entering static analysis for the first time.
The list displays loads saved during the last session if the job has been run previously.

Options
Save - Saves the load case and environmental data file. For more information, see Save
<filename> (on page 231).
Add a load case - Inserts a blank load case following the selected line in the list. If no line is
selected, the load case is added at the end of the list. To select a load case, click the number to
the left of the list.

CAESAR II User's Guide

544

Static Analysis
To add load cases quickly, right-click on a load case and select Insert Above or Insert
Below to add a blank load case to the list.
Delete a load case - Removes the current entry from the Load Cases list.
To delete load cases quickly, select the load case, right-click and choose Delete.
Recommend load cases - Replaces the current load cases with the CAESAR II
recommended load cases.
Import load cases - Copies the load cases from a file. The units and load types of the
copied file must match those of the current file.
Analyze load cases- Runs the static analysis.

Tabs
Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 545)
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 554)
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 570)

See Also
Working with Load Cases (on page 528)
Building Static Load Cases (on page 529)

Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog

Box)
Controls options for editing load cases. You can define up to 999 load cases. Click a line in the
list to edit the load property. You can perform edits on groups of load cases by clicking the
Group Edit option in the right corner of the dialog box. For more information, see Editing
Multiple Load Cases (on page 529).
You must specify all basic (non-combination) load sets before you can declare any algebraic
combinations. This is true for both user-defined and edited load cases.
Drag basic load cases and drop them on other load cases to create algebraic combination
cases. CAESAR II prompts you for the combination type when necessary.
Select combination methods and other specifics pertaining to the load case in the boxes to the
right of the Loads Defined in Input list.
You can change the Stress Type value by clicking in the box and then selecting a different
value from the list. Stress type determines the stress calculation method and the allowable
stress to use.
When you define a fatigue (FAT) stress type for a load case, you must enter the number
of anticipated Load Cycles for that load case or the software prompts you before analysis.

CAESAR II User's Guide

545

Static Analysis

Recommend Load Cases

Displays the Recommended Load Cases dialog box. CAESAR II suggests the load cases that
you should run to satisfy the basic requirements of the piping codes. You can then choose to run
the load cases as recommended, or you can modify them to meet your requirements. Click Yes
to accept the recommended load cases (which you can later edit), or No to return to the Static
Analysis dialog box.

Recommended Load Cases Dialog Box

Displays a list of load cases that CAESAR II recommends to satisfy the expansion and
sustained code compliance requirements. You can choose to run the load cases as presented,
or you can modify the cases to meet your requirements.

Import Load Cases

Imports load cases from a CAESAR II file.
Make sure the units match between the two jobs files prior to importing. When you import
load cases from another job, you must verify the load case values, wind data, and wave data to
ensure data integrity.

Loads Defined in Input

Output Status
Controls the disposition of the load case results. The available options are Keep or Suppress.

Use Keep when the load case is producing results that you want to review. The default for
all new cases (except for HGR load cases) is Keep.

Use Suppress for artificial cases such as the preliminary hanger cases, or intermediate
construction cases. Load cases used for hanger design, that is, the weight load case and
hanger travel cases designated with the stress type HGR, must be designated as Suppress.

For example, a wind only load case could be designated as Suppress because it was built only
to be used in subsequent combinations and has no value as a standalone load case. For all load
cases created under previous versions of CAESAR II, all load cases except the HGR cases are
converted as Keep.

Output Type
Designates the type of results available for load cases that have a Keep status. Use this field to
help minimize clutter on the output and to ensure that only meaningful results are retained. The
available options are:

Disp/Force/Stress - Provides displacements, restraint loads, global and local forces, and
stresses. This is a good choice for operating cases where you are designing to a code which
does a code check on operating stresses, because the load case is of interest for
interference checking (displacements) and restraint loads at one operating extreme (forces).

Disp/Force - Provides displacements restraint loads, global and local forces. This is a good
choice for OPE cases where you are designing for those codes which do not do a code
check on OPE stresses.

CAESAR II User's Guide

549

Static Analysis

Disp/Stress - Provides displacements and stresses only.

Force/Stress - Provides restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This is a good
choice for the Sustained (cold) case, because the load case would be of interest for restraint
loads at one operating extreme (forces), and code compliance (stresses). FR combination
loads cases developed under previous versions of CAESAR II are converted with this
force/stress type.

Disp - Provides displacements only.

OCC Load Factor

Displays/overrides the Occasional load factor defined in the configuration. The default value
changes according to the piping code and the frequency of occurrence.
ISO-14962 - Occasional load factors are defined differently for different load cases (Operating,
Sustained, Occasional, and Hydrotest). The default occasional load factors for these load
cases are:

1.0 - Sustained load cases

1.25 - Operating load cases

1.33 - Occasional and Hydrotest cases

The Occasional load factor and the System design factor from the Allowable Stress dialog
box are multiplied together to generate the Part Factor for Loading (f2) as defined in
ISO-14692. As an example, using a default system design factor of 0.67 with the above default
occasional load factors results in the following default values for the part factor for loading:

CAESAR II User's Guide

553

Static Analysis
Load Case
Type

System Design
Factor

Occasional Load
Factor

Part Factor for

Sustained (SUS)

0.67

1.00

0.67

Operating (OPE)

0.67

1.24

0.83

Occasional (OCC)

0.67

1.33

0.89

Hydrotest (HYD)

0.67

1.33

0.89

Flange Analysis Temperature

Specifies the temperature used to determine the flange allowable.
None No flange analysis.
T1 - T9 - Operating temperatures 1 through 9.
Tmax - Maximum of T1 through T9.
TAmb Ambient temperature.

Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog

Box)
Controls options for wind loads. For more information, see the input descriptions for this tab or
Wind Loads (on page 901).

Editing Wind Case

Specifies the wind case to edit. The first box indicates the active wind case. The second box
displays the total number of defined cases.

Select Wind Code or Profile

Specifies the wind code or one of the user-defined (velocity or pressure) profiles. The software
updates the dialog box depending on the selection you choose. For more information, see the
specific wind code options or Wind Loads (Technical Discussions) (see "Wind Loads" on page
901).

See Also
ASCE 7 Wind Code Options (on page 555)
AS/NZS 1170 Wind Code Options (on page 557)
BS-6399-2 Wind Code Options (on page 558)
Brazil NBR 6123 Wind Code Options (on page 561)
China GB 50009 Wind Code Options (on page 562)
EN Wind Code Options (on page 562)

CAESAR II User's Guide

554

Static Analysis
IBC/UBC Wind Code Options (on page 563)
IS 875 Wind Code Options (on page 564)
Mexico Wind Code Options (on page 566)
NBC Wind Code Options (on page 568)
Wind Pressure/Velocity vs. Elevation (User-Defined) (on page 569)

ASCE 7 Wind Code Options

Wind Load Parameters
Basic Wind Speed - Specifies the three-second gust speed at 33 ft. (10 m.) above ground for
Exposure C category as determined according to Section [Link].
According to ASCE 7, the following are typical basic wind-speed values:

California and West Coast Areas -124.6 ft./sec. (85 mph)

Rocky Mountains - 132.0 ft./sec (90 mph)

Great Plains - 132.0 ft./sec (90 mph)

Non-Coastal Eastern United States -132.0 ft./sec (90 mph)

Gulf Coast - 190.6 ft./sec (130 mph)

Florida-Carolinas - 190.6 ft./sec (130 mph)

Miami - 212.6 ft./sec (145 mph)

New England Coastal Areas - 176.0 ft./sec (120 mph)

Wind Exposure - Specifies the wind exposure. This value is the exposure category that
adequately reflects the characteristics of ground surface irregularities. The ASCE 7 code
standard (found in ASCE 7 2005, Section [Link] and ASCE 7 2010, Section 26.7.3) defines
exposure categories as follows:
2 - Exposure B - Urban, suburban, and wooded areas, prevailing. For upwind distance
requirements, refer to the code standard.
3 - Exposure C - All cases where exposures B and D do not apply.
4 - Exposure D - Flat coastal areas, prevailing. Urban, suburban, wooded, or open terrain
areas with scattered obstructions. For upwind or downwind requirements, refer to the code
standard.

Wind Exposure options 2, 3 and 4 correlate to ASCE 7 exposure categories B, C, and D.

See ASCE 7 2005 (Section [Link]) and ASCE 7 2010 (Section 26.7.3) for any exceptions on
wind exposures.
Structural Damping Coef. - Specifies the structural damping coefficient. This value is the
percentage of critical damping and is used to calculate the gust factor for the wind load
calculations.
Structural Classification - Specifies the classification of buildings and structures based on the
type of occupancy.
ASCE 7-2005 Table 1-1, classification is as follows:

CAESAR II User's Guide

555

Static Analysis
1 - Category I - Failure represents low hazard.
2 - Category II - All structures except 1, 3, and 4.
3 - Category III - Primary occupancy more than 300 people.
4 - Category IV - Essential facilities (Hospitals, and so forth)
1, 2, 3 and 4 are the options for structural classification categories, and are equivalent to
categories I, II, III and IV defined in ASCE 7.
Importance Factor - Specifies the importance factor (I). This value is used to calculate the
velocity pressure for wind load calculations. The importance factor depends on the structural
classification and whether or not the region is prone to hurricanes, as shown below.
For ASCE 7 2010, CAESAR II sets the importance factor to 1, as the code standard no longer
addresses this factor.
For ASCE 7 2005, set the importance factor as per the code standard in Table 6-1.
Category

Non-Hurricane

Hurricane Prone

1-I

0.87

0.77

2-II

1.00

3-III

1.15

4-IV

1.15

1, 2, 3, and 4 are the options for structural classification categories, and are equivalent to
categories I, II, III and IV, defined in ASCE 7.
Structure Natural Frequency - Specifies the natural frequency used to calculate the dynamic
wind gust effect factor for dynamically sensitive structures. (f < 1 Hz. )
If the natural frequency is zero CAESAR II uses a gust effect factor 0.85.

Topographic Factor Parameters

Height of Hill or Escarpment - Specifies the height of hill or escarpment value. This value is
the height relative to the upwind terrain. It is used in calculations of the topographic factor of
structures sited on the upper half of hills and ridges or near the edges of escarpments.
Crest Distance - Specifies the distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground
elevation is half the height of hill or escarpment.
Distance from Crest to Site - Specifies the distance upwind or downwind from the crest to the
building site.
Hill Type - Specifies the hill type. This value is the hill type is defined as follows:
0 - No Hill
1 - 2D Ridge
2 - 2D Escarpment
3 - 3D Axisymmetric Hill

CAESAR II User's Guide

556

Static Analysis
AS/NZS 1170 Wind Code Options
Specifies options for the AS/NZS 1170.2 wind code.
Design Wind Speed - Design Wind Speed Vr. This is the regional wind speed described in
section 3.2 of the code.
Wind Region -Wind region. The wind region is determined from the geographic locations for
Australia and New Zealand. The maps of these locations are in Figure 3.1 of the code.
Terrain Category - Value discussed in section 4.2.1 of the code. These categories are defined
as:

Category 1 - Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions and water surfaces at
serviceable wind speeds

Category 2 - Water surfaces, open terrain, grassland with few, well-scattered obstructions
having heights generally from 1.5 m to 10 m.

Category 3 - Terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions 3 m to 5 m high such as

areas of suburban housing

Category 4 - Terrain with numerous large, high (10 m to 30 m high) and closely spaced
obstructions such as large city centers and well-developed industrial complexes

Choose the terrain category with due regard to the permanence of the obstructions that
constitute the surface roughness. In particular, vegetation in tropical cyclonic regions cannot be
relied upon to maintain surface roughness during wind events.
Lee Effect Multiplier (Mlee) - Specifies the Lee Effect Multiplier. The default value is 1.0.
Paragraph 4.4.3 discusses the issue of the lee effect multiplier. In the case of New Zealand,
reference is made to the New Zealand site map. For all other sites, it shall be taken as 1.0.
Hill Shape Factor (Mh) - Specifies the appropriate hill shape factor, which can be obtained from
Table 4.4 of the code. Please refer to paragraph 4.4.2 which gives precise details for the
derivation of the hill shape factor.
Upwind Slope
(H/2Lu)

< 0.05

1.00

0.05

1.8

0.10

1.16

0.20

1.32

0.30

1.48

>= 0.45

1.71

Wind Direction Multiplier (Md) - Specifies the wind direction multiplier. The default value is 1.0.
The wind direction multiplier is detailed in paragraph 3.4 of the code, specifically Table 3.2. As
the wind multiplier is determined from the cardinal wind directions (N, NE, E, SE, S SW, W and

CAESAR II User's Guide

557

Static Analysis
NW), the value for any direction is specified in the table as 1.0. We recommend this value be
used for all cases.
Convert to Permissible Stress Gust Wind Speed - In the standard AS/NZS 1170.2 Supp
1:2002 Section C3, there is a discussion regarding the division of the wind speed given in the
standard by the square root of 1.5. Checking the box converts the wind speed given to a
permissible stress basis. Doing this lowers the wind loads on the vessel.
Surface Roughness Height (hr) - This value is used to compute the ratio hr/d which is then
used to compute the drag force coefficient (Cd) for rounded cylindrical shapes per Table E3. For
pressure vessels, this value ranges from 0.003 mm for painted metal surfaces to 15 mm for
heavily rusted surfaces. Light rust has a value of 2.5 mm while galvanized steel has a value of
0.15 mm.
The ratio hr/d is taken to be unitless (mm/mm).
Site Elevation (E) Specify the height of the site above the mean sea level, E.
Average Spacing of Shielding Buildings - Specifies the average spacing of the shielding
buildings. This is discussed in paragraph 4.3.3 of the code.
Average Breadth of Shielding Buildings (bs) - Specifies the average breadth of the buildings
that shield the piping.
Average Height of Shielding Buildings (hs) - Specifies the average height of the buildings
that shield the piping.
Number of Upwind Bldgs at 45 degs - Specifies the number of upwind buildings within a 45
degree arc. The upwind buildings are the ones shielding the piping.

BS-6399-2 Wind Code Options

Specifies options for the BS-6399-2 British Wind Code.
Design Wind Speed - Specifies the design value of the wind speed. These vary according to
geographical location and according to company or vendor standards. Here are a few typical
wind speeds in miles per hour. Typical wind speeds are shown in Figure 6 of BS-6399-2. The
wind speeds are only relevant to the United Kingdom. The wind speeds vary typically from 20
m/sec to 31 m/sec (44.7 mph to 69.3 mph).
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following, because the wind
design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.
Site Elevation - delta s - Enter the site altitude above mean sea level (paragraph [Link] of the
code). Use this value plus the Base Elevation to calculate the height of each point in the vessel
above mean sea level. For example, if the vessel is installed on a site that is 100 m (328 ft)
above sea level, it is exposed to a higher wind pressure (P) than if installed on the beach (at
mean sea level).
Upwind Building Height (Obstruction Height) - Ho - For buildings in town terrain, type the
average height of the building upwind of the piping (as they tend to shield the piping from the
wind). To be conservative, this value can be zero, so the piping takes the full force of the wind.
Ho is used to modify the effective piping wind height (He) for any piping element. See paragraph
[Link] of BS-6399-2.
Upwind Building Spacing - X - For buildings in town terrain, type the average spacing of the
buildings upwind of the piping (as they tend to shield the piping from the wind). If the buildings
are closer together, they provide greater protection from the wind. See paragraph [Link] of
BS-6399-2.

CAESAR II User's Guide

558

Static Analysis
Pipe Location - Specifies the location where the system is installed, either in the country, or in a
town. The BS-6399-2 factors in Table 4 modify the wind velocity. The final wind pressure acting
on any element of the piping is determined by the distance from the coast, whether located in
the country or a town, and the effective height (He). This table derives Sb, which is calculated by
internally.
Distance to Coastline - Specifies the distance the vessel is located from the coast in
kilometers. This distance affects the corrected wind speed (Ve). The BS-6399-2 factors in Table
4 modify the wind velocity. The final wind pressure acting on any element of the vessel is
determined by the distance from the coast, whether located in the country or a town, and the
effective height (He). This table derives Sb, which is calculated by internally.
Size Effect Factor - Ca - Specifies the size effect factor Ca. This value is normally taken from
Figure 4 of BS-6399-2. This factor generally ranges from 0.53 to a maximum value of 1.0. The
size effect factor is a function of the diagonal dimension a, the effective height, the site in the
town or country and the distance to the sea.
Factor Kb from Table 1 - Kb - Specifies the 'Building-type factor Kb' taken from Table 1 of
BS6399. Choose from one of five values: 8, 4, 2, 1 or 0.5. CAESAR II sets the default to 2, but
any other value may be chosen. Please note the following limitations of Kb based on the vessel
height:
Kb

Maximum Vessel Total Height

23 m (75.4 ft)

75 m (246 ft)

240 m (787 ft)

300 m (984 ft)

0.5

300 m (984 ft)

Designing towers over 75 meters in height is unlikely and you would need to consider many
other things.
BS 6399 Table 1. Building-type Factor Kb
8

Welded Steel unclad frames

Bolted steel and reinforced concrete unclad frames

Portal sheds and similar light structures with few internal walls

Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs only (e.g. office
buildings of open plan or with partitioning)

0.5

Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs with additional
masonry subdivision walls (for example, apartment buildings), building of masonry
construction and timber-framed housing

Annual Probability Factor - Q - Calculates the final probability factor (Sp) associated with the
likelihood of high velocity gusts occurring over certain periods such as 50 years. The default

CAESAR II User's Guide

559

Static Analysis
value is Q = 0.02. The code sets 0.02 as a standard value for a mean recurrence value of 50
years. Annex D of BS-6399-2 should be consulted for a fuller explanation.
Q

Explanation

0.632

NOTE 1: The annual mode, corresponding to the most likely annual

maximum value. (Sp = 0.749)

0.227

NOTE 2: For the serviceability limit, assuming the partial factor for loads for
the ultimate limit is f = 1.4 and for the serviceability limit is f = 1.0, giving Sp
= Sqrt(1 / 1.4) = 0.845. (Sp = 0.845)

0.02

NOTE 3: The standard design value, corresponding to a mean recurrence

interval of 50 years. (Sp = 1.000)

0.0083

NOTE 4: The design risk for bridges, corresponding to a mean recurrence

interval of 50 years. (Sp = 1.048)

0.00574

NOTE 5: The annual risk corresponding to the standard partial factor for
loads, corresponding to a mean recurrence interval 1754 years. This is
back-calculated assuming the partial factor load for the ultimate limit is ?f =
1.4 and all risk is ascribed to the recurrence of wind. (Sp = Sqrt(1.4))

0.001

NOTE 6: The design risk for nuclear installations, corresponding to a mean

recurrence interval of 10,000 years. (Sp = 1.263)

Seasonal Factor - Ss - BS6399 in paragraph [Link] states: "...For permanent buildings and
buildings exposed for continuous periods of more than 6 months a value of 1.0 should be used
for Ss..." PV Elite uses 1.0 as the default value for this reason. Using a value of less than 1.0 is
not recommended, or should only be used with solid research.
Directional Factor - Sd - Taken from Table 3 of BS6399. Because a tower is symmetrical about
its central axis, the default value has been taken as 1.0. It is recommended that this value not be
reduced other than for exceptional circumstances. For other values, please consult Table 3. The
values in that table range between 0.73 and 1.00.
Pipe Surface Type - Specifies the pipe surface condition. The three options are: 1 Smooth, 2
Rough, and 3 Very Rough.
Total Wind Height - Specifies the total height of the building or structure, which CAESAR II
uses in wind force equations. For piping systems, consider using the maximum height of the
piping system. Refer to the particular wind code standard for more information on this value.

CAESAR II User's Guide

560

Static Analysis
Brazil NBR 6123 Wind Code Options
Specifies options for the Brazil NBR 6123 wind code.
Basic Wind Velocity (Vo) - Velocity from a three second gust, exceeded only once in 50 years.
It is measured at 10 meters over smooth open ground and depends on the plant location. As a
general rule, the wind may blow in any horizontal direction. This velocity is taken from Figure 1,
and item 8 which shows the iso-velocities over Brazil. The referred to Figures and Tables are
found in the Petrobras document BPE-500-P4-19i and the Brazilian Wind Code NBR 6123.
Topographical Factor (S1) - Accounts for the variations and profile of the land. For plain or
slightly uneven ground, use a value of 1. The larger this value is, the greater the final computed
wind pressure is. If the vessel is on a hill top, this value should be computed according to
section 5.2 of NBR 6123.
Roughness Category (S2) Category

Description

Plain ground with large dimensions (more than 5 km of extension)

Plain (or slightly uneven) ground with few, and separated, obstacles

Plain or uneven ground obstructed by obstacles (walls or separated low

buildings)

Ground with many grouped obstacles in industrial or urban areas

Ground with many grouped and tall obstacles (such as developed

industrial areas)
Using Category I produces a higher wind load than Category II and so forth.

Dimension Class Class

Description

Greatest dimension is less than or equal to 20 meters

Greatest dimension is greater than 20m and less than 50 meters

Greatest dimension is greater than or equal to 50 meters

Statistical Factor (S3) - Accounts for security and the expected life of the equipment. For
industrial plants S3 is generally taken to be 1.0.
Pipe Surface Condition - Vessel surface condition can be classified as smooth or rough. A
selection of rough results in an increased value of the shape coefficient. Using a rough
classification generates a higher wind load on the vessel as there is more drag. The shape
coefficient is computed based on the height to diameter ratio of the vessel.
Frequency - Specifies the natural frequency used to calculate the dynamic wind gust effect
factor for dynamically sensitive structures. (f < 1 Hz. )
If the natural frequency is zero CAESAR II uses a gust effect factor 0.85.

CAESAR II User's Guide

561

Static Analysis
Total Wind Height - Specifies the structural damping coefficient. This value is the percentage of
critical damping and is used to calculate the gust factor for the wind load calculations.

China GB 50009 Wind Code Options

For details on the China GB 5009 wind code parameters used in CAESAR II, refer to the China
GB 5009 wind code standard.

EN Wind Code Options

Ref. Wind Velocity [Vb,0] - Specifies the fundamental value of the basic wind velocity of the
area where the equipment is situated. Vb,0 is used along with C Dir and C Season to compute
Vb.
Terrain Category - Select the appropriate terrain category from the table below. Category 0
generates the highest wind loads while category 4 produces the lowest wind loads.
Terrain Category Description
0

Sea or Coastal area exposed to the open sea

Lakes or flat and horizontal areas with negligible vegetation and without
obstacles

Area with low vegetation such as grass and isolated obstacles (trees,
buildings) with separations of at least 20 obstacle heights

Area with regular cover of vegetation or buildings or with isolated obstacles

with separations of maximum 20 obstacle heights (such as villages,
suburban terrain, permanent forest)

Area in which at least 15% of the surface is covered with buildings and
their average height exceeds 15 m

Directionality Factor [C Dir] - Value of the directional factor, C Dir, found in the National
Annex. The recommended value is 1.0.
Season Factor [C Season] - Value of the season factor, C Season, found in the National
Annex. The recommended value is 1.0.
Structural Factor [CsCd] - Structural factor used to determine the force on the vessel. This
value is defined in Section of the EN 1991-1-4:2005(E) Wind load specification in Annex D. This
value normally ranges between 0.90 and 1.10. The greater the structural factor value, the higher
the element load.
Force Coefficient [Cf] - Force coefficient which accounts for the fact that the vessel is circular
in cross section. This value modifies the area of the vessel that the wind is blowing against. This
value is often specified in the design specifications or can be computed based on the
methodology given in Section 7.9 for circular cylinders. A typical value for Cf would be between
0.7 and 0.8.
Structure Damping Coefficient - Specifies the structural damping coefficient. This value is the
percentage of critical damping and is used to calculate the gust factor for the wind load
calculations.

CAESAR II User's Guide

562

Static Analysis
IBC/UBC Wind Code Options
Specifies options for the UBC and IBC wind codes.
Design Wind Speed - Specifies the design value of the wind speed. This varies according to
geographical location and according to company or vendor [Link] wind speeds in
miles per hour are 85.0, 100.0, 110.0, and 120.0.
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following because
the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.
Exposure Constant - Specifies the exposure factor, as defined in UBC-91 Section 2312 or the
IBC Exposure Constant:

Exposure B - Terrain with building, forest or surface irregularities 20 feet or more in height
covering at least 20 percent or the area extending one mile or more from the site.

Exposure C - Terrain which is flat and generally open, extending one-half mile or more from
the site in any full quadrant.

Exposure D - The most severe exposure with basic wind speeds of 80 mph or more. Terrain
which is flat and unobstructed facing large bodies of water over one mile or more in width
relative to any quadrant of the building site. This exposure extends inland from the shoreline
1/4 mile or 0 times the building (vessel) height, whichever is greater.

Most petrochemical sites use a value of 3, exposure C. This value is used to set the Gust
Factor Coefficient (Ce) found in Table 23-G.
Importance Factor (IBC) - This is the Occupancy Importance Factor, IE, as defined in Section
1616.2 and shown in Table 1604.5. The calculated spectrum accelerations will be multiplied by
this value to generate the shock spectra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.25 based on the function of
the structure.
Importance Factor (UBC)- Specifies the importance factor. The software uses this value directly
without modification. This value is taken from Table 23-L of the UBC standard. Followings are
the context of Table 23-L:
Category

Value

I - Essential facilities

1.15

II - Hazardous facilities

1.15

III - Special occupancy structures

1.00

IV - Standard occupancy structures

1.00

Height of Hill (IBC) - Specifies the height of hill or escarpment value. This value is the height
relative to the upwind terrain. It is used in calculations of the topographic factor of structures
sited on the upper half of hills and ridges or near the edges of escarpments.
Distance to Site (IBC) - Specifies the distance upwind or downwind from the crest to the building
site.
Crest Distance - Specifies the distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground
elevation is half the height of hill or escarpment.

CAESAR II User's Guide

563

Static Analysis
Hill Type - Specifies the hill type. This value is the hill type is defined as follows:
0 - No Hill
1 - 2D Ridge
2 - 2D Escarpment
3 - 3D Axisymmetric Hill
Structure Damping Coeff. (IBC)/Beta (UBC) - Specifies the structural damping coefficient. Type
the value of structural damping coefficient (percentage of critical damping) beta. The default
value is 0.01.
This value is used to compute the dynamic gust effect factor G as outlined in the commentary
section 6.6 page 158 of ASCE 95 or section 6.5.8 pages 29-30 of the 98 standard. If your design
Code is not ASCE, then the software uses the damping coefficient in accordance with that
particular wind design code.
If your design specification does not call out for a specific value of beta, then leave the value of
0.01 in this cell. Please note that other values of beta can be specified for the filled case and the
empty case. Again if the specifications do not supply these values for empty and filled leave
these cells blank.
Natural Frequency (IBC)- Specifies the natural frequency used to calculate the dynamic wind
gust effect factor for dynamically sensitive structures. (f < 1 Hz. )
If the natural frequency is zero CAESAR II uses a gust effect factor 0.85.

IS 875 Wind Code Options

Specifies options for the Indian Standard, IS-875 (Part 3), wind code. IS-875 is the standard in
India for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures.
Basic Wind Speed - Basic wind speed as applicable to 10 m height above mean ground level
for different zones in the country can be directly calculated if the proper value is defined in the
Wind Zone Number box. Alternatively, wind speed can be defined here. Basic wind speed
should be based on peak gust velocity averaged over a short time interval of about 3 seconds
and correspond to mean heights above ground level in an open terrain. This box is optional.
Wind Zone Number - Figure 1 of IS-875 shows different Wind Zones of the country. Various
zone numbers and corresponding Basic Wind Speed values are:
Zone 1

33 m/sec 73.82 miles/hour

Zone 2

39 m/sec 87.25 miles/hour

Zone 3

44 m/sec 98.43 miles/hour

Zone 4

47 m/sec 105.15 miles/hour

Zone 5

50 m/sec 111.86 miles/hour

Zone 6

55 m/sec 123.04 miles/hour

The value typed here must be between 1 and 6. The zone the vessel is in is determined from a
map of India showing the various wind zones.

CAESAR II User's Guide

564

Static Analysis
Optionally, you can define the basic wind speed directly in the Basic Wind Speed box. If the
wind speed is specified, it overrides the value of wind speed and zone based on the table
above.
Risk Factor (K1) - Assuming the mean probable design life as 100 years, the corresponding
risk coefficient values for various wind zones are:
Zone

Zone 1

1.05

Zone 2

1.06

Zone 3

1.07

Zone 4

1.07

Zone 5

1.08

Zone 6

1.08

Terrain Category - Terrain in which specific equipment is assessed as one of the following
categories:

Category 1 - Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions and in which the average
height of any object surrounding the equipment is less than 1.5 m. This category includes
open sea - coasts and flat treeless plains.

Category 2 - Open terrain with well scattered obstructions having height generally between
1.5 to 10 m. This includes airfields, open parklands and undeveloped sparsely built up
outskirts of towns and suburbs. This category is commonly used for design purpose.

Category 3 - Terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions having the size of buildings
and structures up to 10 m in height. This includes well wooded areas, towns, and industrial
areas full or partially developed.

Category 4 - Terrain with numerous tall, closely spaced obstructions. This includes large
city centers, generally with obstructions above 25 m, and well developed industrial
complexes.

Equipment Class - Equipment and structures are classified into following classes depending
upon their size.

Class A - Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal or

vertical dimension) less than 20 m.

Class B - Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal or

vertical dimension) between 20 and 50 m.

Class C - Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal or

vertical dimension) greater than 50 m.

Topography Factor - The topography factor ranges between 1.0 and 1.36. This factor takes
care of local topographic features such as hills, valleys, cliffs, ridges and so on, which can
significantly affect wind speed in their vicinity. The effect of topography is to accelerate wind
near summits of hills or crests of cliffs and decelerate the wind in valleys or near the foot of cliffs.
Effect of topography is significant if upwind slope is greater than about 3 degrees. Below 3

CAESAR II User's Guide

565

Static Analysis
degrees, the value of K3 can be taken as 1.0. For slopes above 3 degrees, the value of K3
ranges between 1.0 and 1.36.
Use Gust Response Factor - If this box is checked, the software calculates the gust response
factor per IS-875 and uses it in the appropriate equations. Experience has shown that these
gust response factors are very conservative. Select this box only if the design specifications and
the customer or owner explicitly require you to do so.

Mexico Wind Code Options

Specifies the options available for the Mexico wind code.
Design Wind Speed - According to Paragraph 4.6.2, Isotach Maps. Regional Velocity (VR) , the
velocity of the wind, VR, is the maximum mean velocity likely to occur within a certain
recurrence period in a determined zone or region of the country.
The Isotach maps that are included in this clause with the different periods of return, such
velocities refer to homogenous conditions that correspond to a height of 10 meters over the
surface of the floor in the flat terrain (Category 2 per Table I.1). It does not consider the local
terrain roughness characteristics or the specific topography of the site. Therefore, such velocity
is associated with three-second wind gusts and it takes into account the possibility that there
might be hurricane winds present in the coastal zones.
The regional velocity, VR, is determined by taking into account the geographic location of the
site of the building's uproot and its destination.
In Figures I.1 through I.4, the Isotach regional maps are shown, corresponding to the periods of
recurrence for 200, 50, and 10 years.
The importance of the structures (Paragraph 4.3) dictates the periods of recurrence which
should be considered for the wind design. From this, the groups A, B and C associate
themselves with the periods of return of 200, 50 and 10 years, respectively. The uproot site is
located in the map with the recurrence period which corresponds to the group to which the
building belongs to, in order to obtain the regional velocity. In the Tomo III from Ayudas de Dise
O a table is shown with the main cities in the country and their corresponding regional velocities
for the different periods of return.
Structural Classification - Specifies the structural classification.
Class

Description

Every remote structural element exposed directly to the wind action.

Horizontal or vertical structures that measure less than 20 meters of
length.

Horizontal or vertical structures that measure between 20 and 50

meters of length.

Horizontal or vertical structures that measure more than 50 meters of

length.

CAESAR II User's Guide

566

Static Analysis
Terrain Category - Defined in Table I.1, based on the type of soil and roughness.
Category

Description

Open terrain, practically smooth, without obstructions.

Flat or undulating soil, with few obstructions.

Terrain covered by many obstructions narrowly spaced.

Terrain with many big, tall, narrowly spaced obstructions.

Topographic Factor (Ft) (Paragraph 4.5.4) - This factor takes into account the local
topographic effect from the place in which the structure uproots. For example, if the building is
found on the hillsides, on top of hills or on mountains at important heights with respect to the
general level of the terrain of its outskirts, it is probable that wind accelerations generates and
the regional velocity should be increased.
Damping Factor (Zeta) - Typically, this value is 0.01.
Drag Coefficient (Ca) - (Table 1.28), as shown below.
Cross Section

Type of Surface

H/b
1

Smooth or little rough

(d'/b 0.0)

0.5

0.6

0.7

Rough (d'/b 0.02)

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.2

Very rough (d'/b 0.08)

0.8

1.0

1.2

Circular
(bVD 6 m2/s)

Any

0.7

0.8

1.2

Hexagonal or octagonal

Any

1.0

1.2

1.4

Square (wind normal to a

face)

Any

1.3

1.4

2.0

2.2

Square (wind on a corner) Any

1.0

1.1

1.5

1.6

Circular
(bVD 6 m2/s)

where:

b is the diameter or the horizontal dimension of the structure, including the roughness of the
wall; to determine the product bV D, this diameter is the one that is located at two thirds of the
total height, from the level of the land, in m

d' is the dimension that exceeds from the roughness, such as ribs or "spoilers", in m

VD is the velocity of the wind of design (4.6), in m/s, and it is valued for the two thirds of the
total height

For intermediate values of H/b and d'/b lineal interpolation is permitted.

CAESAR II User's Guide

567

Static Analysis
Strouhal Number (St) - The Strouhal number is unitless; 0.2 for circular sections and 0.14 for
rectangular sections.
Barometric Height (Omega) - - Indicates the barometric pressure in mm Hg, as shown below:
Height

Barometric Pressure (mm Hg)

760

500

720

1000

675

1500

635

2000

600

2500

565

3000

530

3500

495

Ambient Temperature - Indicates the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius.

Frequency - Specifies the fundamental frequency time interval, in Hz.

NBC Wind Code Options

Reference Wind Pressure or Design Wind Speed - Specifies the NBC Reference Wind
Pressure. The reference velocity pressure q is the appropriate value determined in conformance
with Subsection 1.1.3 (based on probability) or Table C-1.
Design Wind Speed - Specifies the design value of the wind speed. This varies according to
geographical location and according to company or vendor [Link] wind speeds in
miles per hour are 85.0, 100.0, 110.0, and 120.0.
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following because
the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.
Importance Factor (Iw) - Specifies the NBC importance factor. This value is the importance
factor for wind taken from the table below. This is table [Link] on page 4-17 of Division B of
NBC 2005.
Importance Category

Importance Factor, Iw
ULS

SLS

Low

0.8

0.75

Normal

1.0

0.75

High

1.15

0.75

CAESAR II User's Guide

568

Static Analysis
Post Disaster

1.25

0.75

Exposure Constant - based on the profile of mean wind speed, the Exposure Constant varies
considerably with the general roughness of the terrain over which the wind has been blowing
before it reaches the building. These exposures are applicable only under the dynamic (detailed)
method, whereas the terms open and rough were used for the static (simplified)
method.
Exposure A - (Open or Standard Exposure) - indicates open-level terrain with only
scattered buildings, trees, or other obstructions, open water or shorelines. Reference wind
speeds are based on Exposure A.
Exposure B - (Rough Exposure) - indicates rough terrain, such as large cities with several
and dense high-rise buildings, which persists in the upwind direction for at least 20 times the
building height. Prior to NBC 2010, referred to winds that persist in the upward direction for
1.0 km or 10 times the building height, whichever is larger.
Exposure C - (NBC 2005 only) - Rough terrain, such as large cities with several and dense
high-rise buildings, which persists in the upwind direction for at least 1.0 km or 10 times the
building height, whichever is larger.
Roughness Factor - Specifies the Roughness Factor:
1 - Round, moderately smooth
2 - Round, rough (D'/D = 0.02)
3 - Round, very rough (D'/D = 0.08)
Height of the Windward Face - Specifies the height of a piping section that is exposed to wind
blow.
Structural Damping Coefficient - Specifies the structural damping coefficient. This value is the
percentage of critical damping and is used to calculate the gust factor for the wind load
calculations.
Natural Frequency - Specifies the natural frequency used to calculate the dynamic wind gust
effect factor for dynamically sensitive structures. (f < 1 Hz. )
If the natural frequency is zero CAESAR II uses a gust effect factor 0.85.

Wind Pressure/Velocity vs. Elevation (User-Defined)

Allows you to indicate your own wind profiles, based on one of two options:

Wind Pressure vs. Elevation

Wind Velocity vs. Elevation

When you select a user-defined wind code (Wind Pressure vs. Elevation or Wind Velocity vs.
Elevation), enter the corresponding pressure or velocity values. Enter a single entry in the table
if a uniform pressure or velocity is to act over the entire piping system. Otherwise, type the
pressure or velocity profile for the applicable wind loading.
The software acquires the pressure/velocity and elevation values from the piping input.
They do not necessarily match the current setting in the configuration file.

CAESAR II User's Guide

569

Static Analysis

Copy Wind Vector

Displays the Copy Environmental Loading Data dialog box, which is used to copy the wind
data from any defined wind case to any remaining wind case. This is especially useful for large
wind pressure or Velocity versus Elevation tables.

Copy Environmental Loading Data Dialog Box

Copies the wind or wave data from the current wind or wave case to any specified remaining
wind or wave case. Use this feature when there is large wind or wave pressure or with Velocity
versus Elevation tables.

Wind Direction Specification

Specifies the direction vector (cosine) which defines the direction of the wind. The magnitude of
the vector is not significant. For example:

Wind in X direction, vector is 1, 0, 0

Wind in Z direction, vector is 0, 0, 1

Wind at 45 degrees, vector is .707, 0, .707

You only need to specify the method and the wind direction if you are using a pressure or
velocity versus elevation table. After clicking User Wind Profile, a dialog box prompts you for
the corresponding pressure or velocity table. You only need to make a single entry in the table if
a uniform pressure or velocity is to act over the entire piping system. Otherwise, type the
pressure or velocity profile for the applicable wind loading.

Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog

Box)
Controls options for wave loads.

Editing Wave Case

Specifies the wave case to edit. The first box indicates the active wave case. The second box
displays the total number of defined cases.

CAESAR II User's Guide

570

Static Analysis

Copy Wave Vector

Displays the Copy Environmental Loading Data dialog box.

Copy Environmental Loading Data Dialog Box

Current Profile Type

Specifies the means of modeling the current speed against the depth profile. Available current
profiles are:

Power Law - Current speed decays with depth to the 1/7 power.

Linear Table - Define the depth versus. speed table

Linear - Current speed decays linearly with depth becoming zero at the sea bottom.

Surface Velocity
Specifies the current speed at the free surface elevation, excluding the wave. This value is
superseded by the entries in a depth versus speed table.

Direction Cosines
Specifies the X- and Z- cosines defining the direction of the current. The current direction may
differ from the direction of any accompanying wave.

Wave Theory
Specifies the wave theory by which to model any wave effects. The available theories are:

Stream Function - Dean's stream function theory

Stream Function, Modified - Dean's stream function theory modified to include a shear
current. This shear current is assumed to vary linearly from the surface speed to the bottom
speed. Therefore, this option only works with the Linear current profile.

STOKE'S 5th - Stoke's 5th order wave theory.

STOKE'S 5th, Modified - Stoke's 5th order wave theory modified to address particle data
above the mean sea level.

AIRY - Basic linear wave theory.

AIRY, Modified - Basic linear wave theory modified to address particle data above the mean
sea level.

CAESAR II User's Guide

571

Static Analysis

Stream Function Order

Specifies the order of the stream function when using the stream function wave theory. Typical
values are from 5-21.

Water Depth
Specifies the water depth at this location.

Wave Height
Specifies the wave height (the crest to trough distance).

Wave Period
Specifies the wave period. That is, the time it takes for successive crests to pass a fixed
reference point.

Wave Kinematics Factor

Specifies the wave kinematics factor. According to Section 2.3.1b of API RP 2A-WSD
"Recommended Practice for Planning, Designing and Constructing Fixed Offshore Platforms -Working Stress Design", the horizontal wave velocities calculated by the Stream Function or
Stokes 5th wave theories may be multiplied by this factor in order to fit them to the wave
spreading and other irregularities associated with real world wave characteristics.
Typical ranges for this factor are 0.85 to 0.95 for tropical storms and 0.95 to 1.0 for extra-tropical
storms. For particular recommendations for Gulf of Mexico and other U.S. waters, refer to
Sections 2.3.4d.1 and 2.3.4f.1 of API RP 2A-WSD.

Wave Direction Cosines

Specifies the X- and Z- cosines defining the direction of the wave. The wave direction may differ
from the direction of any accompanying current.

Wave Phase Option

Indicates whether all elements of the model should be simultaneously loaded with the same
phase of the wave (typically the phase of maximum loading) or whether each element
experiences a different loading phase, based upon its location relative to the model origin.

CAESAR II User's Guide

572

Static Analysis

Phase Angle
Specifies the wave phase angle to use to calculate the wave loadings at either:

every element

model origin.

Free Surface Elevation

Specifies the elevation of mean sea level, in terms of model elevation. This submerges the
elements of the model to the appropriate level.

Kinematic Viscosity
Specifies the kinematic viscosity of the fluid. Typical values for seawater are:
Temp (F)

v(in-in/sec)

Temp (C)

v(mm-mm/sec)

1.81e-3

15.556

1.171

2.10e-3

10.000

1.356

2.23e-3

4.444

1.440

2.88e-3

-1.111

1.858

Density
Specifies the density of the sea water. A typical value for salt water is 0.037 (lb/[Link].) or
0.00103 (kg/[Link].)

Current Table Depth

Displays the depth values. When using Linear Table Current Model, type up to 10 depths. A
value of 0.0 indicates the surface. Positive numbers indicate distance downward from the
surface.

CAESAR II User's Guide

573

Static Analysis

Current Table Velocity

Displays the velocity values. When using Linear Table Current Model, type up to the current
speeds corresponding to the specified depths. Current speed typed in this table overrides the
Surface Velocity value.

CAESAR II User's Guide

574

SECTION 9

Static Output Processor

Provides an interactive review of static analysis results for the open job. The Static Output
Processor window automatically displays upon completion of a static analysis. You can also
select Output > Static from the main CAESAR II menu to open the window anytime after an
analysis has been completed.
The Static Output Processor window displays analysis results in a tabular form, in a graphical
animated form, or a combination of the two. Use commands in the Static Output Processor
window to:

Interactively review reports for any selected combination of load cases and/or report types.

Print or save to file copies for any combination of load cases and/or report types.

Add title lines to output reports.

Select extended or summarized versions of most standard reports.

Load Cases Analyzed - Lists all of the load cases which have been analyzed for the current
job. The cases are numbered, and labeled with the type (load category) addressed by the case.
Load types are:

OPE - operating, not a stress compliance case for B31.1/B31.3 and similar codes.

SUS - sustained, stress compliance for primary loads.

EXP - expansion, stress compliance for secondary loads.

OCC - occasional, stress compliance for occasional loads.

FAT - fatigue, stress compliance for cumulative damage.

HAR - harmonic case for dynamic evaluation of harmonic loads.

HGR - construction case used for spring hanger design - results are not available for these
load cases.

The load case description also includes the individual load components that contributed to the
load case.
The results for a load case can be viewed by selecting the load case. Multiple load cases can be
selected using the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys in combination with the mouse. Load cases can be
cleared by using the <Ctrl> key in combination with the mouse.
Standard Reports - Lists the available reports associated with those load cases. For more
information, see Work with Reports (on page 576) and Standard Reports (on page 584).
General Computed Results - Lists reports, such as input listings or hanger selection reports,
that are not associated with load cases. For more information, see General Computed Results
(on page 596).
Custom Reports - Lists generated or imported custom reports. For more information, see Work
with Reports (on page 576) and Report Template Editor (on page 603).

CAESAR II User's Guide

575

Static Output Processor

Output Viewer Wizard - Selects specific reports and reviews their order before sending the
output to the selected device. To close the Output Viewer Wizard, click Less <<. For more
information, see Output Viewer Wizard (on page 602).

Work with Reports

Greater or Equal

Less than

Less or Equal

Specifies filter criteria for flange output reports related to ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection
NC-3658.3 Method (NC-3658.3). You can set up filter criteria for all NC-3658.3 reports based on
Torsion Moment, Bending Moment, Bolt Circle Diameter, Bolt Area, Flange Stress,
Allowable Stress, and a Ratio factor. Use the operator boxes to specify comparison operators
for the filter values.
For example, if you specify for the Flange NC-3658.3 filter class to with a Ratio of 30 percent or
greater, then the software reports on only flanges of the NC method that are 30 percent of the
maximum rated equivalent pressure for the flange.
For more information on filtering output reports, see Filters Dialog Box and Filter Reports (on
page 577).
The software does not apply report-specific filter criteria to custom reports that use
combination classes.

Print or Save Reports to File Notes

The tabular results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer. Different
combinations of load cases and report types may be chosen, each followed by the File-Print
command, to create a single report.
Prints copies of the reports. To print copies of multiple reports as a single report,
use the Output Viewer Wizard to populate the report order tree, click Send To
Printer and then Finish.
Sends reports to a file (in ASCII format) rather than the printer. After selection, a
dialog displays where you select the file name. To change the file name for a new
report, select FILE-SAVE AS.

CAESAR II User's Guide

583

Static Output Processor

Typically, the set of output reports to print out for documentation purposes is:
Load Case

Report

Purpose

SUSTAINED

STRESS

Code compliance

EXPANSION

STRESS

Code compliance

OPERATING

DISPLACEMENTS

Interference checks

OPERATING

RESTRAINTS

Hot restraint, equipment loads

SUSTAINED

RESTRAINTS

As-installed restraint, equipment loads

Load cases used for hanger sizing produce no reports. Also, the hanger table and hanger
table with text reports are printed only once even though more than one active load case may be
highlighted.
To save multiple reports as a single report to a file, use the Output Viewer Wizard.

The signs in all CAESAR II Reports show the forces and moments that act "ON" something.
The Element Force/Moment report shows the forces and moments that act "ON" each
element to keep that element in static equilibrium. The Restraint Force/Moment report shows
the forces and moments that act "ON" each restraint.

When sending reports to MSWord, if a file named "[Link]" exists in the \caesar\system
directory, its contents are read and used as the page header when CAESAR II exports the
report to MSWord. The intent is that "[Link]" contains the company logo, address
details and formatting for tables. The interface uses a style names "report table" which you
can set up in "[Link]".

Standard Reports
For most load cases, except hanger design and fatigue, there are a variety of different report
options that can be selected for review.
Most standard reports have short and long versions, designated by the word Extended.
The extended reports usually have more data items available and may require a landscape
option when printed.

Displacements - Shows the nodal translations and rotations at each of the nodes. These
values represent the solution vector for each load case. For more information, see
Displacements (on page 585).

Restraints - Shows the loads imposed on the system supports for each load case. For more
information, see Restraints (on page 586).

Restraint Summary - Combines the restraint reports for any number of (user selected) load
cases. This provides a concise summary of the loads on the restraints, across load cases.
For more information, see Restraint Summary (on page 589).

CAESAR II User's Guide

584

Static Output Processor

Global Element Forces - Shows the element forces and moments acting on the ends of the
element. These forces and moments are aligned with the global coordinate system, and
represent the element free-body diagram. For more information, see Global Element Forces
(on page 592).

Local Element Forces - Shows the element forces and moments acting on the ends of the
element. These forces and moments are aligned with the local element coordinate system,
and represent the element free-body diagram. For more information, see Local Element
Forces (on page 592).

Stresses - Shows the element stresses acting on the ends of the elements. This report
also includes codes SIFs, code allowables, and the "code" stress when applicable. For more
information, Stresses (on page 593).

Cumulative Damage - Lists the combined fatigue stresses for all selected fatigue load
cases and compares it to the corresponding allowable for each node of each element. Note
that this report is only available for those jobs that include fatigue cases. For more
information, see Cumulative Usage Report (on page 596).

This system consists of two small horizontal lines anchored at both ends. The last element of
each line is skewed 45 degrees in the X-Z plane. At the end of this skewed line is an axial
restraint, as illustrated in the following figure:

The typical Global Restraint report for this system displays in the following table. At node 140,
this report shows two equal loads in the (global) X and Z directions. These values (24,463) are
the global component loads acting on the skewed restraint. The actual magnitude of the restraint
load, acting in-line with the pipe can be found by performing the SRSS of these component
loads, which yields 34595. This value is the load on the restraint acting axially with the pipe.
Operating Case Restraint Loads Global Coordinate System
NODE

FX lb.

FY lb.

FZ lb.

MX [Link].

MY [Link].

MZ [Link].

100

-24463

-514

1340.5

-273.3

-6418.6

Rigid ANC

119

-24528

0.0

Rigid Z

140

24463

0.0

Flex X

200

-24463

-514

1340.5

-273.3

-6418.6

Rigid ANC

219

-24528

0.0

Rigid Z

240

24463

0.0

Flex X

The process of performing SRSS or sine/cosine operations to obtain restraint loads in the
element coordinate system can be tedious. As an alternative, generate a restraint report where
all of the loads are aligned with the associated element coordinate system. The report for the
same small job displays in the table below.

CAESAR II User's Guide

588

Static Output Processor

Operating Case Restraint Loads Local Element Coordinate System
NODE

fx lb.

fy lb.

fz lb.

mx [Link].

my [Link].

mz [Link].

100

-24463

514

1340.5

-6418.6

273.3

Rigid ANC

119

-24528

0.0

Rigid Z

140

34595

0.0

Flex X

200

-24463

514

1340.5

-6418.6

273.3

Rigid ANC

219

-17344

0.0

Rigid Z

240

34595

0.0

Flex X

In reviewing the relationship between the local versus global restraint loads note the following:
The global FY (vertical) load at node 100 of -514 translates to a local fz load. For details on the
global to local coordinate system relations, see Technical Discussions (on page 879). (These
two values are shown in the tables in bold.)
At node 140, the skewed axial restraint, the first table showing the global coordinate system
loads, reports the two equal component loads. The second table showing the local loads,
reports only the resultant axial load at the restraint. (These values are shown in the tables in
bold.)

Restraint Summary
Similar to the restraint report, this option provides force and moment data for all valid selected
load cases together on one report.

Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 577).

CAESAR II User's Guide

589

Static Output Processor

Nozzle Check Report

The Nozzle Check report defines the appropriate force/moment limits on a specified nozzle.

Data for each load case reported is a result of calculation (and can also be viewed on a Local
Restraints report). The Limits shown in the report are the values from the input. Similarly, the
Comparison method also reflects the input setting. The loads shown are the loads on the
nozzle for the indicated load cases. If any load exceeds its corresponding allowable load, then
the entire line is shown in red (with an asterisk at the far right in the event the report is printed in
black and white.)
The Resultant column reports the resultant forces and moments for the SRSS Comparison
method, and the unity check value for the Unity Check method.

Flange Reports
Flange Reports are available after completing the In-line Flange Evaluation analysis. There
are two methods and two corresponding reports for evaluating flanges under load: Kellogg
Equivalent Pressure Method (Peq) and ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3
Method (NC-3658.3).

CAESAR II User's Guide

590

Static Output Processor

The reports display some of the relevant input items along with the calculated corresponding
moments and stresses or equivalent pressure for each node where the flange evaluation was
requested. This is an elemental type report, and the flanges may be defined on either end of the
element. Because of this, some lines in the report with no corresponding output are blank.

CAESAR II User's Guide

591

Static Output Processor

Global Element Forces

Forces and moments on the piping are reported for each node in the model.

General Computed Results lists reports, such as input listings or hanger selection reports,
which are not associated with load cases.

Topics
Load Case Report ....................................................................... 597
Hanger Table with Text ............................................................... 598
Input Echo .................................................................................. 599
Miscellaneous Data..................................................................... 600
Warnings .................................................................................... 601

CAESAR II User's Guide

596

Static Output Processor

Load Case Report

The Load Case Report documents the Basic Names (as built in the Load Case Builder),
User-Defined Names, Combination Methods, Load Cycles, and Load Cases (Output Status,
Output Type, Snubber Status, Hanger Stiffness Status, and Friction Multiplier) of the static load
cases. This report is available from the General Computed Results column of the Static
Output Processor.

CAESAR II User's Guide

597

Static Output Processor

Static Output Processor

Summary - Generates a single output report for all the specified load cases as a sum\-mary,
in a format similar to the standard Restraint Summary report.

Code Compliance - Generates an output stress check report for multiple load cases as a
single report, similar to the standard Code Compliance report.

Actual columns and their order on the reports are controlled solely by you. Data from
various categories can be customized on a single report to suit your needs.
The Template Settings category provides options for the report header and the report body
text, formatting, and alignment. You can also set the font face, size, and color for the header and
the report body. You can include or remove specific header text (such as Report Name, Job
Title or Filters Description) by selecting and clearing the check box next to the corresponding
item. Report Line Spacing changes the spacing between lines of text. The Summary Line
check box (used with Summary-type reports) toggles the appearance of the summary line with
MAX values for each field or column per node. Select the Node Number/Name check box (used
with Summary-type reports) to repeat the Node information on each Loadcase line. If you clear
this option, then the node will appear on the separate line above the data for load cases. These
two options may help with later data manipulations when sending the reports to a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet
Any changes in the editor are immediately reflected in the preview window.
Each of the following categories consists of related output data. For example, the
Displacements category contains three translational (DX, DY, and DZ) and three rotational
(RX, RY, and RZ) fields, Stresses contains Axial, Bending, and Code stresses among other
stress related fields. A number next to the field name indicates the Column Order this field will
be placed in. When nothing or a zero value is specified, this column will not be included in the
current report.
Each field contains the following information:
Field Name

Description

Column Number

Indicates the order of the fields in the output report.

Precision

Indicates the number of decimal places to be displayed.

Sort Order

Specifies whether the data in the column is in ascending,

descending, or in no order. This gives you flexibility of reviewing
reports for maximum (or minimum) values.

Font

Specifies the text font face, size and color for this field whenever
special formatting is required. Set the generic font settings for the
entire report at the Template Settings > Body category.

Align Values

Controls left, right, or center alignment of the values in the

column.

Field Caption

Customize the name of the field as it appears on the report. This

may be useful to customize the display of the output
displacements in the report to reflect the plant
North/South/East/West directions or vertical and Horizontal
notations instead of generic X, Y, Z.

CAESAR II User's Guide

604

Static Output Processor

Field Name

Description

Column Width

Controls the size of the column in terms of the number of

displayed characters or digits. In addition, resizing the columns in
the Preview Grid adjusts the Column Width value. Type 0 to
close the column and remove it from the report. Type -1 to size
the column to the predefined default size.

Units Based
Precision

Indicates whether to enable the automatic control of the displayed

number of decimal places to be calculated based on the selected
display units. This value is used together with the Units
Conversion Label value. The Precision value is ignored in this
case. When set to No, the Precision value takes place.

Static Output Processor

Options Menu
Specifies common settings that are available on all reports such as how node numbers display
and title information.

Topics
On Screen .................................................................................. 611
Set Report Font .......................................................................... 611
Using Microsoft Word.................................................................. 611
Using Microsoft Excel ................................................................. 612
New Custom Report Template .................................................... 612
Edit Custom Report Template ..................................................... 613
Delete Custom Report Template ................................................. 613
Reset Default Custom Report Templates .................................... 614
Import Custom Report................................................................. 614
Export Custom Report ................................................................ 614
View Animations ......................................................................... 615
Graphical Output......................................................................... 616
Title Lines ................................................................................... 618
Load Case Name ........................................................................ 618
Node Name ................................................................................ 618
Return to Input ............................................................................ 618

On Screen
Displays the selected reports on the monitor. This permits the analysis data to be reviewed
interactively in text format. After selecting the combination of one or more active load cases with
any combination of report options, select Options > View Reports > On Screen. Each report is
presented one at a time for inspection. You can scroll through the reports vertically and
horizontally. You can also click On Screen
on the toolbar.

Set Report Font

Activates the Font dialog box used to define the text font, font style, and font size. You can
select this command from Options > View Reports > Set Report Font on the Static Output
Processor window menus, or by clicking the small down arrow next to On Screen
on the
standard toolbar. Some fonts that you can display reports in to the screen may not be available
on your printer. If the font is not available for your printer, the closest matching font on your
printer is used.

Using Microsoft Word

Send output reports directly to Microsoft Word, which permits the use of all of Microsoft Word
formatting features (font selection, margin control, and so forth) and printer support from
CAESAR II. Select Options > View Reports > Using Microsoft Word or click
on the
toolbar.
Word is available as an output device to the Static Output Processor and the Dynamic
Output windows. You can append multiple reports to form a final report by:

CAESAR II User's Guide

611

Static Output Processor

1. Select the required reports.
2. Click View Reports Using Microsoft Word

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more reports.

A table of contents, reflecting the cumulatively produced reports, displays on the first page of the
Microsoft Word document.

Using Microsoft Excel

Sends output reports directly to Excel, which permits the use of all of Microsoft Excels
features and printer support from CAESAR II. Excel is available as an output device to the
Static Output Processor window. You can append multiple reports to form a final report by:
1. Select the required reports.
2. Click View Reports using Microsoft Excel

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more reports.

Each report displays in a separate spreadsheet with the corresponding report name. There is no
generated table of contents.

New Custom Report Template

Creates a new custom report using the Report Template Editor dialog box. For more
information, see Report Template Editor (on page 603). You must select at least one load case
from the Load Cases Analyzed list before you can create a new report template.
1. From the Load Cases Analyzed list, select the load case for the custom report template.
2. Click Options > Custom Reports > New

3. In the Template Name box, enter a name for your custom report.
4. In the Template Description box, enter a description.
5. Using the Report Template Editor dialog box options, create your custom report.
6. Click Save Current Custom Report Template

CAESAR II User's Guide

on the Reports Navigation toolbar.

612

Static Output Processor

Do not use File > Save or the Save command on the main toolbar.
Your report appears in the Custom Reports list.

Edit Custom Report Template

Modifies and saves existing custom reports using the Report Template Editor. For more
information, see Report Template Editor (on page 603).
1. Select one or more load cases from the list.
2. From the Custom Reports list, select the report to edit.
3. Select Options > Custom Reports > Edit

4. Using the Report Template Editor dialog box options, edit your custom report.
5. Click Save Current Custom Report Template

on the Reports Navigation toolbar.

Do not use File > Save or the Save command on the main toolbar.
- OR Click Save Current Custom Report Template with a New Name
new custom report leaving the original report unchanged.

to save your edit to a

Delete Custom Report Template

Deletes a custom report template. You cannot delete a standard delivered report using this
command.
You cannot undo the deletion of a custom report template.
1. From the Custom Reports list, select the report to delete.
2. Select Options > Custom Reports > Delete

3. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the report.

CAESAR II User's Guide

613

Static Output Processor

Reset Default Custom Report Templates

Replaces the current report templates, both CAESAR II delivered and custom defined
reports, with the default report templates delivered with CAESAR II. Use this command if you
received a new version or a patch of CAESAR II and want to use the new reports.
Make sure that you export any custom reports that you want to keep before using
this command. This command affects ALL jobs system-wide and cannot be undone. For more
information about exporting custom reports, see Export Custom Report (on page 614).

Import Custom Report

Imports a custom report template that was exported earlier using Options > Custom
Reports > Export
.
The report template file extension is *.C2RPT and can be read from any network location. After
the report template file is imported, it becomes a part of the current configuration. The new
report is appended to the Custom Reports list of the Static Output Processor window. The
default name of the template file corresponds to the custom report name. You can also access
this feature by selecting Options > Custom Reports > Import.

Export Custom Report

Saves any custom generated report to a text file, which you can then share with others. The
report template file name extension is *.C2RPT and can be saved to any accessible location.
The default file name is the custom report name. Use Options > Custom Reports > Import
to import these saved custom reports.
1. In the Custom Reports list, select the report to export.
2. Select Options > Custom Reports > Export

3. Select a folder and enter a file name.

4. Click Save.

CAESAR II User's Guide

614

Static Output Processor

View Animations
Displays the piping system as it moves to the displaced position of the basic load cases. To
animate the static results, select Options > View Animations. The following screen appears:

The Animated Plot menu has several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the
commands to activate the animation. Motion uses centerline representation while Volume
Motion produces 3D graphics. Select the load case from the drop down list. Animations may be
sped up, slowed down, or stopped using the toolbars.
CAESAR II also enables you to save animated plots as HTML files by selecting File > Save As
Animation. After saving these files, you can view them on any computer outside of CAESAR II.
The corresponding animation graphics file <job_name>.HSF must be transferred along
with the HTML file for proper display.

CAESAR II User's Guide

615

Static Output Processor

Graphical Output
To support a graphics mode, the Static Output Processor window provides 3D/HOOPS
Graphics toolbars that contain commands to zoom, orbit, and pan, as well as provide the ability
to switch views and modes.
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics toolbar commands include the display of displaced shapes,
highlighting and zooming to maximum displacements, restraint loads, and stresses of the model.
Another advantage provided by 3D/HOOPS graphics is the graphical representation of stresses
by value and by percentage use color.
A variety of CAESAR II Output Plot functions, accessed from the 3D/HOOPS Graphics toolbars
or the Show menu, are broken into submenus:

Displacements

Restraints

Forces/Moments

Stresses

Selection Options Toolbar

Show Event Viewer Grid - Shows or hides the Event Viewer on the plot. See
Event Viewer Dialog Box (see "Element Viewer Dialog Box" on page 626).
Zoom to Selection - Fits the selected element in the view.

Organization Tools Toolbar

Line Numbers - Displays the Line Numbers dialog box, which allows graphical
editing of line numbers. You can do the following from this pane.

Assign a new line number to the block of elements that have been selected
on the 3D graphical display.

Remove an existing line number.

Set and reset visibility options to hide and unhide elements.

Assign a color to an individual line number.

To reassign one or more elements from one line number to another existing line
number, simply drag-and-drop (move) the elements between existing Line
Numbers in the Line Numbers dialog box.
When you click the Line Number name in the Line Number dialog box, the
corresponding elements are highlighted in the 3D pane and are selected to
perform block (global) operations.

CAESAR II User's Guide

616

Static Output Processor

Line Numbers Dialog Box
Controls options for line numbers. You can set visibility options for line numbers from the 3D
model on the piping input and the Graphical Output in the Static Output Processor.
Press SHIFT + click to select multiple line numbers.
Create from Selection
Creates line numbers from the selected elements. You can only create line numbers for
selected elements from the piping input 3D model.
Remove Line Number
Deletes line numbers from the selected elements. You can only remove line numbers for
selected elements from the piping input 3D model.
You can also right-click select Remove Line Number (in Piping Input only).
Reset Settings
Returns visibility settings to their default settings. Use the drop down to specify to Reset
Visibility, Reset Color, or All settings.
You can also right-click on a line and select one of the reset options.
<type here to search>
Limits the elements that display in the Line Numbers dialog box to those line numbers and
node numbers that match the text in this field. Clear this field to display all elements. You
can search on a line number name or a node number.
Show/Hide
Turns the display of line numbers for elements on or off.
Visibility
Specifies the opacity of elements. 100% indicates that the element is opaque. 0% indicates
that the element is completely translucent, or invisible.
Color
Displays the Color dialog box from which you can specify a color for the element.
Name
Specifies the name of the element.

CAESAR II User's Guide

Range Dialog Box

Displacements
Turns the display of displacements on or off.

Nozzle Flexibility
Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off.

Flange Check
Turns flange checking on or off.

Nozzle Check
Turns nozzle checking on or off.

CAESAR II User's Guide

620

Static Output Processor

Compass
Turns the display of the orientation tee on or off.

CAESAR II User's Guide

621

Static Output Processor

Length
Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.

Tees
Turns the display of tees on or off.

Expansion Joints
Turns the display of expansion joints on or off.

Piping Codes
Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use this option to see the
piping code variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.

CAESAR II User's Guide

622

Static Output Processor

CAESAR II User's Guide

623

Static Output Processor

Insul/Cladding Unit Wt.

Temperatures
Displays the temperature parameters that you have defined.

Pressures
Displays the pressure parameters that you have defined.

CAESAR II User's Guide

624

Static Output Processor

Plot View Menu

Performs actions associated with viewing the model. You must select Options > Graphical
Output
before these commands are available.

Topics
Reset .......................................................................................... 625
Front View .................................................................................. 625
Back View................................................................................... 625
Top View .................................................................................... 625
Bottom View ............................................................................... 625
Left-side View ............................................................................. 625
Right-side View ........................................................................... 626
Southeast ISO View .................................................................... 626
Southwest ISO View ................................................................... 626
Northeast ISO View .................................................................... 626
Northwest ISO View .................................................................... 626
4 View ........................................................................................ 626

Reset
Resets the view to the default settings.

Front View
Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.

Back View
Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.

Top View
Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.

Bottom View
Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.

Left-side View
Displays the model from the left side. Alternatively, press X.

CAESAR II User's Guide

625

Static Output Processor

Right-side View
Displays the model from the right side. Alternatively, press Shift + R.

Southeast ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively, press F10.

Southwest ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the southwest.

Northeast ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the northeast.

Northwest ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the northwest.

Element Viewer Dialog Box

Use options in the Element Viewer dialog box to navigate among the elements, navigate to
various reports within a load case, and view the reports for other load cases. This is done in the
Report Selection pane on the left in the dialog box.
The dialog box has a tree structure similar in operation to Windows Explorer.

Click the + sign for a particular load case expands the tree to show reports.

Select the report to display the data in the grid view to the right.

Select a node or an element in the grid view when Select Elements is enabled to highlight
the corresponding element on the graphics view.

Zoom to the selected element if the corresponding Zoom to Selection is enabled. Similarly,
click an element on the graphics view to highlight the corresponding data row in the report
view. This is a bi-directional connection.

CAESAR II User's Guide

626

Static Output Processor

Change the load case within the Element Viewer dialog box to update the graphics view (if
applicable), and the Load Case Selection box on the Load Case toolbar.

CAESAR II User's Guide

627

SECTION 10

Dynamic Analysis
Performs dynamic analysis on a piping model. This section introduces dynamic analysis
concepts and describes data input for each of the options available. The command is also
available from Analysis > Dynamics.

In This Section
Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems .............................................. 628
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis ................................... 634
Dynamic Analysis Workflow ........................................................ 635
The Dynamic Analysis Window ................................................... 636
Excitation Frequencies Tab ......................................................... 639
Harmonic Forces Tab ................................................................. 641
Harmonic Displacements Tab ..................................................... 645
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab ....................................... 648
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab ..................................... 653
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab............................................... 668
Lumped Masses Tab .................................................................. 673
Snubbers Tab ............................................................................. 675
Control Parameters Tab .............................................................. 676
Advanced Tab ............................................................................ 708
Directive Builder.......................................................................... 712
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data ........................................................... 713
DLF/Spectrum Generator ............................................................ 714
Relief Load Synthesis ................................................................. 724
Analysis Results ......................................................................... 736

Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems

A piping system can respond far differently to a dynamic load than it would to a static load of the
same magnitude. Static loads are those which are applied slowly enough that the system has
time to react and internally distribute the loads, thus remaining in equilibrium. In equilibrium, all
forces and moments are resolved (that is, the sum of the forces and moments are zero) and the
pipe does not move.
A dynamic load changes quickly with time. The piping system does not have time to internally
distribute the loads. Forces and moments are not always resolved, resulting in unbalanced loads
and pipe movement. Because the sum of forces and moments are not in equilibrium, the
internally-induced loads can be differenteither higher or lowerthan the applied loads.
The software provides several methods for analyzing different types of system response under
dynamic loads. Each method provides a trade-off of accuracy versus computing requirements.
The methods include modal natural frequency calculations, harmonic analysis, response
spectrum analysis, and time history analysis.
Modal natural frequency analysis measures the tendency of a piping system to respond to
dynamic loads. The modal natural frequencies of a system typically should not be too close to

CAESAR II User's Guide

628

Dynamic Analysis
equipment operating frequencies. As a general rule, higher natural frequencies usually cause
less trouble than low natural frequencies. CAESAR II provides calculation of modal natural
frequencies and animated plots of the associated mode shapes.
Harmonic analysis addresses dynamic loads that are cyclic in nature, such as fluid pulsation in
reciprocating pump lines or vibration due to rotating equipment. These loads are modeled as
concentrated forces or displacements at one or more points in the system. To provide the proper
phase relationship between multiple loads, a phase angle can also be used. Any number of
forcing frequencies can be analyzed for equipment start-up and operating modes. Harmonic
responses represent the maximum dynamic amplitude the piping system undergoes and have
the same form as a static analysis: node deflections and rotations, local forces and moments,
restraint loads, and stresses. For example, if the results show an X displacement of 5.8 cm at a
node, then the dynamic motion due to the cyclic excitation is from +5.8 cm. to -5.8 cm. at that
node. The stresses shown are one half of, or one amplitude of, the full cyclic stress range.
Response spectrum analysis allows an impulse-type transient event to be characterized by
response versus frequency spectra. Each mode of vibration of the piping system is related to
one response on the spectrum. These modal responses are summed together to produce the
total system response. The stresses for these analyses, summed with the sustained stresses,
are compared to the occasional stress allowables defined by the piping code. Spectral analysis
can be used in a wide variety of applications. For